SHRUBS
SIZE TYPE EXAMPLE HEIGHT SPREAD CALIPER
1 Gal. low growing Pitt. tobira - etc. 8-10" 6-8"
1 Gal. tall growing Pitt. eugen. - etc. 10-12" 6-8"
5 Gal. low growing Pitt. tobira - etc. 15-18" 15-18"
5 Gal. tall growing Pitt. eugen. - etc, 24-30" 15-18"
15 Gal. low growing Pitt. tobira - etc. 30-36" 30-36"
15 Gal. tall growing Pitt eugen. - etc. 42-48" 36-42"
TREES
5 Gal. slow growing Quercus - etc. 5-6' 12-18" 1/4 - 1/2" 5 Gal. fast growing Euc. - Prunus - etc. 6-7' 12-18" 1/2 - 3/4" 15 Gal. slow growing Quercus - Pyrus - etc. 7-8' 24-30" 3/4 - 1" 15 Gal. fast growing Euc. - Prunus - etc. 8-10' 30-36" 1- 1 1/4" 24" Box slow growing Quercus - Pyrus - etc. 8-10' 3-4' 1 1/2-1 3/4" 24" Box fast growing Euc. - Prunus - etc. 10-12' 4-5' 1 3/4-2 1/2 30" Box slow growing Quercus - Pyrus - etc. 12-14' 6-7' 2 1/2 - 3" 30" Box fast growing Euc. - Prunus - etc. 12-14' 6-7' 2 1/2 - 3" 36" Box slow growing Quercus - Pyrus - etc. 14-16' 8-10' 2 1/2 - 3" 36" Box fast growing Euc. - Prunus - etc. 14-16' 8-10' 2 1/2 - 3" 36" Box fast growing Euc.- Prunus - etc. 14-16' 8-10' 2 1/2 - 3"
3. All plants not conforming to the requirements herein specified, shall be considered defective and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected and immediately removed from the site of the work and replaced with new plants at the Contractor's expense. The plants shall be of the species, variety, size, and condition specified herein or as shown on the Drawings. Under no conditions will there be any substitution of plants or sizes listed on the plans, except with the expressed written approval of the Owner. 270
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02905 September 2024 Landscape Installation
02905-7
4. At no time shall trees or plant materials be pruned, trimmed or topped prior to delivery and any alteration of their shape shall be conducted only with the approval and when in the presence of the Owner and/or as noted on the Planting Specifications.
5. Nursery Grown and Collected Stock
a. Plant materials shall conform with the best edition of ANSI Z60.1-1990 American Standard for Nursery Stock.
b. Grown under climatic conditions similar to those in locality of project. c. Container-grown stock in vigorous, healthy condition, not root bound or with root system hardened off.
d. Use only linear stock plant material which is well established in removable containers or formed homogeneous soil sections.
6. Ground Cover: Ground cover plants shall be grown in flats, peat pots, or taken as cuttings, as indicated on the plans. Flat grown plants (rooted cuttings) shall remain in those flats until transplanting. The flat's soil shall contain sufficient moisture so that it will not fall apart when lifting the plants. If plants from peat pots are used, the pots shall be protected at all times prior to planting to prevent unnecessary drying of the rootball.
F. Tree Staking Material
1. Stakes for Tree Support
a. Wood Tree Stakes: Lodge pole pine stakes full-length treated with copper naphthanate. Minimum nominal size: two inches in diameter x eight feet (2"x 8') long and pointed at one (1) end (adjust length to fit tree). Stakes shall be free from knots, checks, splits, or disfigurements.
2. Ties
a. 24" length cinch tie as manufactured by V.I.T. Company 1-714-871-2309 or approved equal.
3. Duckbill Total System tree anchor kit with white vinyl coated cable by Foresight Products, Inc., 1-800-325-5360.
a. Safety sleeve one-half (1/2) inch black polyethylene tubing.
G. Mulch
1. Mulch shall be walk-on fir bark mulch as manufactured by Lassen Forest Products, Red Bluff CA., 1-800-621-8557 or approved equal. 271
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02905 September 2024 Landscape Installation
02905-8
2. The mulch shall consist of fir bark mulch with a particle range of three-quarter to one and one-half (3/4 -1 1/2) inch in diameter. Shredded redwood bark ("gorilla hair") is not acceptable.
H. Sod
1. Sod varieties shall be as specified on Drawings. Sod shall be healthy, weed free, and obtained from a certified sod growing nursery or farm.
2. All sod shall be cut within twenty-four (24) hours prior to installation.
L. Fungicide
1. "Subdue" (Cibiba-Geigy) or approved equal.
2. Sod Planting – Fungicide labeled for fungi known to effect turf grass in Northern Central Valley or Northern California.
M. Pre-emergent
1. Pre-emergent, as approved by the Landscape Architect - prevent annual weed development in hydromulch applications. Do not use in hydromulch mixes incorporating annual wildflower or grass seeds.
N. Weed Control
1. Use Enide (Upjohn), Dymid (Elanco Products Co.), Treflan, Eptan, Surflan or approved equal.
O. Root Barrier
1. By Deep Root Corp. model numbers UB-18-2 or approved equal.
P. Miscellaneous Materials
1. Sand: wash river sand or equal.
2. Tree wound paint: as approved. Morrison Tree Seal, Cabot Tree Paint, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 OBSERVATION
The Owner’s Representative to verify that topsoil has been imported, and final grades have been established prior to beginning planting operations. The Owner to observe, shrubs and liner stock plant material for injury, insect infestation and trees and shrubs for 272
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02905 September 2024 Landscape Installation
02905-9
improper pruning. Do not begin planting of trees until deficiencies are corrected or plants replaced.
3.02 LAYOUT OF PLANTING AREAS
A. Stake or mark with lime locations for plants and outline of planting beds on ground.
Do not begin excavation until plant locations and plant beds are acceptable to the Landscape Architect. The irrigation system shall be operational and approved prior to planting.
B. Locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted shall be marked on the ground by the Contractor before any plant pits are dug. All such locations shall be approved by the Landscape Architect. If an underground construction or utility line is discovered prior to work, other locations for planting may be selected by the Landscape Architect.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Preparation of planting areas areas:
1. Amend soil per recommendations of soil analysis outlined in Section 02905 Paragraph 3.07.
2. All soil areas shall be compacted and settled by application of heavy irrigation to a minimum depth of twelve (12) inches.
3. After grading and de-rocking, and prior to planting, add 3” of imported soil in turf areas, and incorporate amendments in Section 02905 Paragraph 2.02. to a depth of four (4) inches.
4. At time of planting, the top six (6) inches of all areas to be planted shall be free of stones, stumps, or other deleterious matter one (1) inch in diameter or larger, and shall be free from all wire plaster, or similar objects that would be a hindrance to planting and maintenance. All rock larger than 1 inch to be removed by mechanical means, either by sieve for loose rock and by heavy equipment if solid bedrock.
B. Final Grades
1. Finished grading shall insure proper drainage of the site. Conform to specification SECTION 02260 - LANDSCAPE GRADING.
2. The following areas shall be graded so that the final grades shall be established below adjacent paved areas, sidewalks, valve boxes, clean outs, area drains, curbs, etc. as follows:
a. Shrub/ground cover areas: 2-1/2 inches
b. Sod areas: 1-1/2 inches
273
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02905 September 2024 Landscape Installation
02905-10
3. Surface drainage shall be away from all building foundations, where applicable.
4. Dispose of excess or unacceptable soil from the site.
3.04 PLANT INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable and in accordance with locally accepted practice, as approved by the Owner.
2. Only as many plants as can be planted and watered on that same day shall be distributed in a planting area.
3. Container shall be opened and plants shall be removed in such a manner that the ball of earth surrounding the roots is not broken and they shall be planted and watered as herein specified immediately after removal from the containers.
Containers shall not be opened prior to placing the plants in the planting area.
B. Layout of Major Plantings
1. Locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted shall be marked on the ground by the Contractor before any plant pits are dug. All such locations shall be approved by the Owner. If an underground construction or utility line is discovered prior to work, other locations for planting may be selected by the Owner.
C. Planting of Trees and Shrubs
1. Excavation for planting shall include the stripping and stocking of all acceptable topsoil encountered within the areas to be excavated for trenches, tree holes, plant pits and planting beds.
2. Excess soil generated from the planting holes and not used as backfill or in establishing the final grades shall be removed from the site.
3. Excavating for Planting:
a. Shape
i. Vertical sides and flat bottom.
ii. Plant pits to be square for box material, circular for canned material. iii. Scarify sides and bottom of each pit.
b. Size: All trees and shrubs shall have planting pits dug twice the diameter of the root ball. Backfill around the root ball with prepared backfill mix. 274
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02905 September 2024 Landscape Installation
02905-11
4. Protect all areas from excessive compaction when trucking plants or other materials to planting site.
5. Install Root Barrier at all locations where tree is with 5’-0” of concrete or other hardscape.
6. Can Removal
a. Cut cans on two (2) sides with an acceptable can cutter. b. Do not injure the root ball.
c. Do not cut cans with spade or ax.
d. Carefully remove plants without injury or damage to root ball. e. After removing plant, manually scarify root ball to loosen perimeter roots.
7. Box Removal
a. Remove bottom of plant boxes before planting.
b. Remove sides of box without damage to root ball after positioning plant and partially backfilling.
8. Center plant in pit.
9. Face plants with fullest growth into prevailing wind.
10. Set plant plumb and hold rigidly in position until soil has been tamped firmly around ball roots.
11. Remainder of planting pit shall be backfilled with:
a. Amended soil per Soil Analysis and Drawing Detail.
b. Grow Power-Plus per rate of manufacture’s recommendations. c. Specified type and quantity of planting tablets
12. All plants which settle shall be raised to the correct level. After the plant has been placed, additional backfill shall be added to the hole to cover approximately onehalf (1/2) of the height of the root ball. Water shall be added to the top of the partly filled hole to thoroughly saturate the root ball and adjacent soil.
13. After the water has completely drained, planting tablets shall be placed adjacent to but not in contact with root ball:
One (1) tablet per 1-gallon container
Two (2) tablets per 5-gallon container
Three (3) tablets per 15-gallon container
275
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02905 September 2024 Landscape Installation
02905-12
Four (4) tablets per 24" box
Five (5) tablets per 30" box
Six (6) tablets per 36" box
Seven (7) tablets per 42" box
Eight (8) tablets per 48" box and larger box sizes
14. The remainder of the hole shall be backfilled.
15. After backfilling an earthen basin shall be constructed around each plant. Each basin shall be of a depth sufficient to hold at least two (2) inches of water. Basin shall be of a size suitable for the individual plant. In no case shall the basin for fifteen (15) gallon plant be less than four (4) feet in diameter; a five (5) gallon plant less than three (3) feet in diameter. The basins shall be constructed of amended backfill materials and shall not be constructed for trees in turf areas.
Edge of planter to be 2-1/2” below finish grade to allow for bark and prevent spilling onto sidewalk and existing parking lot.
16. Pruning: Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches and to compensate for loss of roots during transplanting, but never to exceed one-third (1/3) of the branching structure. Upon approval of the Owner, pruning may be done before delivery of plant, but not before plants have been observed and approved. Cuts over three-quarter (3/4) inch in diameter shall be painted with tree wound paint.
17. Staking and Guying
a. Staking of all trees shall conform to tree staking and tree guying details. b. Flagging: All guys are to be flagged 90% of the wire length and shall be covered with black polyethylene one-half (1/2) inch diameter tube. c. One (1) tree of each size shall be staked and approved by the Owner prior to continued staking.
D. Planting of Ground Cover
1. Ground cover shall be planted in straight rows and evenly spaced, unless otherwise noted, and at intervals called out in the Drawings. Triangular spacing shall be used unless otherwise noted on the Drawing.
2. Each rooted plant shall be planted with its proportionate amount of flat soil or in a peat pot in a manner that will insure minimum disturbance of the root system, but in no case shall this depth be less than two (2) nodes. To avoid drying out, planting shall be immediately irrigated after planting until the entire area is soaked to the full depth of each hole, unless otherwise noted on the Drawing.
3. Care shall be exercised at all times to protect the plants after planting. Any damage to plants by trampling or other operations of this Contract shall be repaired immediately.
276
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02905 September 2024 Landscape Installation
02905-13
E. Sod Planting
1. Soil Preparation: As per paragraph 3.03 A.
2. Grading and Rolling: Carefully smooth all surfaces to be sodded. Roll area to expose soil depressions or surface irregularities. Regrade as required.
3. Fertilizing: Spread turf fertilizer (16-6-8) onto the soil evenly at the rate of four (4) pounds per 1,000 square feet of lawn area.
4. Laying sod: Lay first strip of sod along a straight line (use a string in irregular areas). Butt joints tightly, but do not overlap edges. On second strip, stagger joints. Use a sharp knife to cut sod to fit curves, edges and irrigation heads.
5. Watering: Do not lay whole lawn before watering. When a conveniently large area has been sodded, water lightly to prevent drying. Continue to lay sod and to water until installation is complete.
6. Rolling sod: After laying all sod, roll lightly to eliminate irregularities and to form good contact between sod and soil. Avoid a very heavy roller or excessive initial watering which may cause roller marks.
7. Irrigation: Water thoroughly the completed lawn surface. Soil should be moistened at least eight (8) inches deep. Repeat irrigation at regular intervals to keep sod moist at all times until rooted. After sod is established, decrease frequency and increase amount of water per application as necessary.
8. Replacement: Replace all dead or dying sod with equal material as directed by the Owner.
H. Weed Control
1. Apply weed control to all non-turf areas after completion of all planting and one (1) complete watering (to "set" plants).
2. Apply as per manufacturer's specifications.
I. Fungicide
1. Apply fungicide to all turf following installation
2. Apply as per manufacturer’s specifications.
3. After initial application apply at two-week intervals as required to prevent fungus until end of Contract period.
J. Hardpan Conditions
277
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02905 September 2024 Landscape Installation
02905-14
1. Where hardpan exists, whether it is in the form of caliche or other impervious clay, and it is within the top two-and-one-half feet (2-1/2') of soil, use powered equipment to break through completely at each plant location to allow drainage and root growth. Remove hardpan at least one-and-one-half feet (1-1/2') greater than the rootball diameter of plant. Backfill with soil mix as specified.
2. Where hard pan is within the first twelve (12) inches of soil, it shall be completely penetrated for all trees and shrubs.
3.05 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner in advance for the following observations according to the time indicated:
1. Pre-construction conference - 7 days.
2. Rough grade review - 48 hours.
3. Controller and backflow preventer installation review - 48 hours.
4. Irrigation pressure line and lateral line installation and testing - 48 hours.
5. Irrigation sprinkler coverage test - 48 hours.
6. Finish grade review - 48 hours.
7. Plant material review - 48 hours.
8. Plant layout review - 48 hours.
9. Soil preparation, plant layout, and planting operations. One (1) tree with each type of specified shall be approved prior to planting of trees - 48 hours.
10. End of landscape installation - 48 hours.
11. Final Acceptance - 48 hours
B. No site visits shall commence without all items noted in previous Observation Reports either completed or remedied, unless such compliance has been waived.
Failure to accomplish punch list tasks or prepare adequately for desired observations shall make the Contractor responsible for reimbursing the Owner at his current billing rates per hour, plus transportation costs.
3.06 CLEAN UP
After all planting operations have been completed; remove all trash, excess soil, empty plant containers or rubbish from the property. All scars, ruts or other marks in the ground caused by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a neat and orderly condition throughout the site. The Contractor shall pick-up all trash resulting from this work no 278
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02905 September 2024 Landscape Installation
02905-15
less frequently than each Friday before leaving the site, once a week, and/or the last working day of each week. All trash shall be removed completely from the site. The Contractor shall leave the site area broom-clean and shall wash down all paved areas within the Contract area, leaving the premises in a clean condition acceptable to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
279
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02970 September 2024 Landscape Maintenance
02970 - 1
SECTION 02970
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 CONDITIONS
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any) apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services required to maintain landscape in a healthy growing condition and in a neat and attractive appearance throughout the maintenance period.
B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections:
1. SECTION 02811 - IRRIGATION SYSTEM
2. SECTION 02905 - LANDSCAPE INSTALLATION
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Maintenance Contractor shall be experienced in horticulture and landscape maintenance, practices, and techniques, and shall provide sufficient number of workers with adequate equipment to perform the work during the maintenance period.
1.04 MAINTENANCE PERIOD
A. Continuously maintain the entire project area during the progress of the work and during the sixty (60) calendar-day, maintenance period or until final acceptance of the project by the Landscape Architect.
B. Sections of the project may begin the maintenance period before others if project schedule is divided into thirds or an alternate schedule that is accepted by the Architect. A prime requirement is that lawn and landscape areas shall be planted and that lawn areas shall show an even, healthy stand of grass seedlings or sod, either of which shall have been mown twice. If such criteria are met to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect, a written notification shall be issued to establish the effective beginning date of maintenance period for each section of the project.
C. Any day of improper maintenance, as determined by the Landscape Architect, shall not be credited as an acceptable maintenance period day. The maintenance period shall be extended on a daily basis if the work is not in accordance to the Plans and Specifications. Project shall not be segmented into maintenance areas or phases unless authorization of the Landscape Architect is obtained. 280
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02970 September 2024 Landscape Maintenance
02970 - 2
D. Maintenance shall continue beyond the sixty (60) day maintenance period, as required, until final acceptance is given by the Landscape Architect.
1.05 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT
A. Guarantee: All plant material and other materials installed under the Contract shall be guaranteed for one (1) year from time of final acceptance against any and all poor, inadequate or inferior materials and/or workmanship or improper maintenance, as determined by the Landscape Architect, shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
B. Replacement: Any materials found to be dead, missing, or not in a satisfactory or healthy condition during the maintenance period shall be replaced immediately. The Landscape Architect shall be sole judge as to the condition of material. Material to be replaced within the guarantee period shall be replaced by the Contractor within five (5) days of written notification by the Landscape Architect. All replacement materials and installations shall comply to the Plans and Specifications. Any plant missing due to suspected theft shall be replaced by the Contractor. If the Contractor suspects that theft may be a problem, the Contractor shall provide written documentation to the Landscape Architect that security on this site needs to be intensified. The Contractor may relieve himself of theft responsibility if after the security notice, with no result, a written notice to the Landscape Architect shall be given that plant material will not be replaced for theft or vandalism due to lack of site security being maintained. This procedure may take place only during the Landscape Maintenance Period.
1.06 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE
Normal progress observations shall be requested by the Contractor from the Landscape Architect as per observations listed in specifications SECTION 02905 - LANDSCAPE INSTALLATION.
1.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT
A. Upon completion of all project work, including maintenance period, the Landscape Architect will, upon proper request, make an observation to determine final project acceptability.
B. Where observed work does not comply with the Plans and Specifications, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance period until re-inspected by the Landscape Architect and determined to be acceptable. All replacement materials and installations shall be in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Remove rejected work and materials immediately from project. Prior to the date of final observation, Contractor shall provide the Owner with all Record Drawings and written Guarantee Statement in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 281
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02970 September 2024 Landscape Maintenance
02970 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All materials used shall either conform to Specifications in other sections or shall otherwise be acceptable to the Landscape Architect. The Landscape Architect shall be given a monthly record of all herbicides, insecticides and disease control chemicals used.
B. Fertilizer – Ammonium sulfate (21-0-0)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MAINTENANCE
A. General: Proper maintenance, including watering, weeding, mowing, edging, fertilization, repairing and protection shall be required until entire project is finally accepted, but in any event for a period of not less than the specified maintenance period after planting.
B. Watering: Thoroughly water to insure vigorous and healthy growth until work is accepted. Water in a manner to prevent erosion due to application of excessive quantities of water. When hand watering use a water wand to break the water force.
C. Weeding: Keep plant basins and areas between plants free of weeds. Control weeds with pre-emergent herbicides. If weeds develop, use legally approved herbicides.
Avoid frequent soil cultivation that destroys shallow roots. Weeding also shall be included in all paved areas including public or private sidewalks.
D. Pruning
1. Trees: Prune trees to select and develop permanent scaffold branches; to eliminate narrow V-shaped branch forks that lack strength; to reduce toppling and wind damage by thinning out crowns; to maintain a natural appearance and to balance crown with roots. Prune only as directed by the Landscape Architect.
2. Shrubs: Same objectives as for trees. Shrubs shall not be clipped into balled boxed forms unless such is required by the landscape plans. All pruning cuts shall be made to lateral branches, buds or flush with the trunk. "Stubbing" and "heading" shall not be permitted.
3. Only skilled workmen shall perform pruning work in accordance with standard horticultural pruning practices. Remove from the project all pruned branches and material. Remove and replace any plant material excessively pruned or malformed resulting from improper pruning practices at no additional costs to the Owner.
E. Staking and Guying: Stakes and guys shall remain in place through 282
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02970 September 2024 Landscape Maintenance
02970 - 4
the guarantee period (one year) and shall be inspected and adjusted to prevent rubbing that causes bark wounds.
F. Insect, Animal, Rodent and Disease Control: Maintain proper control with legally approved materials as required as part of the Contract.
G. Protection: The Contractor shall maintain protection of the planted areas. Damaged areas shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense.
H. Trash: Remove trash weekly in all planted areas, pedestrian walkways, and plazas.
I. Replacement: As per Guarantee and Replacement Specifications of this Section.
3.02 MAINTENANCE FERTILIZER
Fertilization: During maintenance period an application of Maintenance Fertilizer (21-0-0), shall be made at thirty (30) days and again at sixty (60) days from the date of landscape installation at a rate of five (5) pounds per 1,000 square feet, or as per manufacturer's recommendations.
3.03 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. System Observation: The Contractor shall check all systems for proper operation.
Lateral lines shall be flushed out after removing the last sprinkler head or two at each end of the lateral. All heads are to be adjusted as necessary for unimpeded coverage.
B. Controllers: Set and program automatic controllers for seasonal water requirements.
Give the Town's representative instructions on how to turn off system in case of emergency.
C. Repairs: Repair all damages to irrigation system at the Contractor's expense. Repairs shall be made within twenty-four (24) hours.
END OF SECTION
283
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-1
SECTION 03 00 00
CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, and equipment for the construction of reinforced cast-in-place concrete.
B. This section includes basic finishing and curing methods, accessory control, and expansion and contraction joint devices.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. The following is a list of specifications which may be related to this section:
1. Section 01 31 00, Project Management and Coordination.
2. Section 03 11 00, Concrete Forming. (ACI 347)
3. Section 03 15 00, Construction Joints.
4. Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel. (ASTM A615) (ACI 315-65)
5. Section 03 35 00, Concrete Finishing.
6. Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing.
7. Section 07 92 00, Sealants.
8. Section 31 00 00, Earthwork.
9. Section 32 16 00, Sidewalks, Curbs, and Gutters.
10. Section 32 84 00, Planting Irrigation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
284
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-2
a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. c. C150, Standard Specification for Portland cement.
d. C260, Standard Specification for Air-entraining Admixtures for Concrete. e. C494/C494M, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
f. C979, Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. g. C1059, Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete.
2. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. 211, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete. b. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete.
c. 305.1, Specification for Hot Weather Concreting.
d. 306.1, Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
e. 309, Standard Practice for Consolidating Concrete.
f. 504, Guide to Joint Sealants.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data on the following:
1. Ready-mixed concrete mix designs.
2. Fly ash.
3. Admixtures (such as air-entraining and water-reducing admixtures).
4. Form release agents.
5. Bonding agents.
6. Colorant.
7. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings that indicate formwork, dimensions, reinforcement, accessories and control and expansion joint layout.
C. Record Drawings: Provide accurate locations, measured from two permanent visible locations, all embedded utilities, sleeves, and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.
285
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-3
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
B. Verify that pipe sleeving and other conduits, of sizes and types specified, are installed as required prior to placing concrete.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and/or a supervisor who is an ACIcertified Concrete Flatwork Technician.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
D. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field-Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
E. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.
1.7 MOCK UP
A. Cast concrete mock up to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship.
B. Mock up shall be a minimum 25 sq. ft. for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Landscape Architect.
C. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Demolish and remove concrete mockups when directed by Landscape Architect. 286
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-4
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The ready-mixed concrete truck driver shall provide the batch ticket to Landscape Architect at the time of concrete delivery. The ticket shall summarize the following information legibly in an easily discernible table:
1. Weight in pounds of all materials, excepting the water reducing and air entraining agents which shall be in ounces.
2. Cubic yards batched.
3. The ratio of water to cementitious (W/C) materials ratio.
4. Temperature of the concrete at the time it was batched.
5. Time of batching.
6. Free moisture in the fine and coarse aggregates in percent of weight of aggregate.
7. Gallons of water that may be added at the site without exceeding the permissible W/C ratio.
8. Ratio of colorants to cementitious materials ratio.
9. Concrete Mix Design Number.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
287
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-5
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
C. Installation of concrete other than approved mixes shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Acquire cement and aggregate from the same source for all work.
B. Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement Type II, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
C. Aggregate:
1. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall consist of hard, strong, durable particles complying with the provisions of ASTM C33.
2. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate shall conform to the provisions of ASTM C33. Aggregate shall be crushed aggregate or angular screened natural aggregate.
Hydraulic - cement aggregate is unacceptable.
D. Water: Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic materials, or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel.
Mixing water for prestressed, pretensioned and prestressed post-tensioned concrete or for concrete which will contain aluminum embedments shall not contain deleterious amounts of chloride ion.
288
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-6
E. Admixtures: Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior acceptance by Landscape Architect. The admixture shall maintain the same composition and performance throughout the Work as the product used in the concrete proportions established in accordance with ACI 211. Admixtures containing chloride ions shall not be used.
1. Air Entrainment:
a. An air-entraining agent shall be used in all concrete. The agent used shall conform to ASTM C260.
b. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the amount of airentraining agent used in each concrete mix shall be such as will affect the entrainment of the percentage of air shown in the following tabulation in the concrete as discharged from the mixer or pumper discharge hose if applicable. Table 1 is applicable for concrete strengths less than five thousand (5,000) psi
c. The level of exposure shall be determined by Landscape Architect. d. When a batch of concrete delivered to the Project does not conform to the minimum specified air content, an air-entraining admixture may be added, one (1) time only for the batch, at Contractor’s option prior to consideration for rejection. After the admixture is added, the concrete shall be remixed for a minimum of twenty (20) revolutions of the mixer drum at mixing speed.
The concrete shall then be retested and if found acceptable, may be placed in accordance with the Specifications.
2. Water Reducing, Set-Controlling Admixture: Contractor shall use a “midrange” water reducing, set controlling admixture, Polyheed 997, or equal. The waterreducing admixture shall be used in all concrete and shall conform to ASTM C494/C494M, specifically Types A, B, C, D, and E.
Table 1
Nominal Max.
Aggregate Size (Inch)
Average Air Content
(Percent)
Severe Exposure Moderate Exposure
3/8 7-1/2 ± 1-1/2 6 ± 1-1/2
3/4 6 ± 1-1/2 5 ± 1-1/2
1-1/2 5-1/2 ± 1=1/2 4-1/2 ± 1-1/2
289
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-7
3. Finely Divided Mineral Admixtures (Fly Ash): Mineral admixtures shall be limited to fly ash conforming to ASTM C618, Class C or Class F. Class C fly ash is not permitted where sulfate resistant cement is required.
F. Evaporative Retardant: In accordance with Section 03 29 00, Concrete Curing.
G. Bituminous Coating: Bituminous Coating for aluminum pipes will be in accordance with AASHTO M-190 Type A.
H. Grout: In accordance with Section 03 60 00, Grouting.
I. Epoxy Bonding Agent:
1. Master Builders; Concresive Liquid (LPL).
2. Master Builders; Concresive Standard Liquid.
2.3 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
A. Concrete compressive strength requirements consist of a minimum strength that must be obtained before various loads of stresses are applied to the concrete and, for concrete designated by strength, a minimum strength at the age of twenty-eight (28) days. Unless otherwise shown on the DRAWINGS, the twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of structural concrete shall be a minimum of four thousand five hundred (4,500) psi.
B. The mix shall be designed for required strengths in accordance with ACI 301. The ratio of water to the sum of concrete plus pozzolan shall not exceed 0.45 by weight for durable, watertight, concrete. The amount of fly ash in the mix shall be between fifteen and twenty percent (15 and 20%) by weight of the total cementitious materials.
C. Unless otherwise permitted or specified in the DRAWINGS, the concrete shall be proportioned and produced to have a slump not to exceed four (4) inches or less than two and one-half (2-1/2) inches. Concrete not consolidated by internal vibration shall be proportioned to have a slump not to exceed five and one-half (5-1/2) inches or less than four (4) inches.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Batching:
1. Measuring and batching of materials shall be done at a batching plant.
2. Portland Cement:
290
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-8
a. Either sacked or bulk cement may be used. No fraction of a sack of cement shall be used in a batch of concrete unless the cement is weighed. Bulk cement shall be weighed on scales separate and distinct from the aggregate hopper or hoppers. Batching shall be such that the accuracy of batching shall be plus or minus one percent of the required weight.
3. Water:
a. Unless water is to be weighed, the water-measuring equipment shall include an auxiliary tank from which the measuring tank shall be filled. In lieu of the volume method, Contractor shall be permitted to use a water-metering device.
4. Aggregates:
a. Aggregates shall be handled from stockpiles or other sources to the batching plant in such a manner as to secure a uniform grading of the material.
Aggregates that have become segregated, or mixed with earth or foreign material, shall not be used. Batching shall be so conducted as to result in the weights of material required for each type aggregate within a tolerance of two percent (2%).
b. Free water contents of the coarse and fine aggregates shall be continuously tested and concrete mixture adjusted for moisture conditions of the aggregate in order to meet the designated water/cement ratio.
5. Fine Aggregate:
a. The proportion of fine aggregate shall be between thirty-six and forty-four percent (36 and 44%) by volume of the total aggregates in the concrete.
B. Mixing:
1. Ready-mixed concrete shall be either “central mixed” or “shrink mixed” concrete as defined in ASTM C94/C94M. “Truck mixed” concrete as defined in ASTM C94/C94M shall not be permitted. Mixing time shall be measured from the time water is added to the mix, or cement contacts the aggregate. All concrete shall be homogeneous and thoroughly mixed, and there shall be no lumps or evidence of undispersed cement. Mixers and agitators, which have an accumulation of hard concrete or mortar, shall not be used. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.
2. The temperature of mixed concrete, immediately before placing shall not be less than fifty degrees Fahrenheit (50°F) or more than ninety degrees Fahrenheit (90°F). Aggregates and water shall be heated or cooled as necessary to produce concrete within these temperature limits. Neither aggregates nor mixing water shall be heated to exceed one hundred fifty degrees Fahrenheit (150°F). 291
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-9
3. The time elapsing from the time water is added to the mix (or the cement comes in contact with aggregate) until the concrete is deposited in place at the site of the WORK shall not exceed sixty (60) minutes when the concrete is hauled in nonagitating trucks, nor more than ninety (90) minutes when hauled in truck mixers or truck agitators.
4. The batch shall be so charged into the drum that a portion of the mixing water shall enter in advance of the cement and aggregates. The flow of water shall be uniform and all water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one-quarter (1/4) of the specified mixing time.
5. Cement shall be charged into the mixer by means that will not result in loss of cement because of the effect of wind, or in accumulation of cement on surfaces of hoppers or in other conditions which reduce or vary the required quantity of cement in the concrete mixture.
C. Transporting Mixed Concrete; Mixed Concrete or Truck Mixers:
1. Transporting of mixed concrete shall conform to ASTM C94/C94M.
2. Truck agitators shall be loaded not to exceed the manufacturer’s guaranteed capacity. They shall maintain the mixed concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass during hauling.
3. No additional mixing water shall be incorporated into the concrete during hauling or after arrival at the delivery point, unless approved by Landscape Architect. If additional water is to be incorporated into the concrete at the site, the drum shall be revolved not less than thirty (30) revolutions at mixing speed after the water is added and before discharge is commenced. One (1) addition of water at the site to adjust mix workability is permitted but the maximum water cement ratio shall not be exceeded.
4. Contractor shall furnish a water-measuring device in good working condition, mounted on each transit mix truck, for measuring the water added to the mix on the site. All water tanks on transit mix trucks shall be filled prior to being batched and arrive at the construction site one hundred percent (100%) full.
5. Each load of ready mixed concrete delivered at the job shall be accompanied by the ticket in accordance with Article Delivery, Storage, and Handling. 292
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prior to placing concrete, Contractor shall remove all debris and thoroughly dampen the surfaces that may be in contact with the concrete to be placed.
B. Contractor shall use compressed air from an air compressor to blow out construction debris and dirt at the bottom of members to be placed such as walls, beams, and columns, prior to final placement of forms that may obscure any joint. Contractor shall demonstrate to Landscape Architect that all debris, such as concrete particles, saw dust, loose tie wire, bar tags, tape, trash and dirt, have been thoroughly removed.
C. All surfaces of forms and embedded materials that have become encrusted with dried mortar or grout from concrete previously placed shall be cleaned of all such mortar or grout before the surrounding or adjacent concrete is placed.
D. No concrete shall be placed until all formwork, reinforcement, installation of parts to be embedded, bracing of forms, and preparation of surfaces involved in the placing have been reviewed by Landscape Architect.
E. Immediately before placing concrete, all surfaces upon or against which the concrete is to be placed shall be free from standing water, mud, debris, or loose materials.
F. No concrete shall be placed when form surfaces that may be in contact with the concrete, reinforcement, embedded items or sub-base is less than thirty-two degrees Fahrenheit (32°F). When the mean daily outdoor temperature is less than forty degrees Fahrenheit (40°F), the temperature of the concrete shall be maintained between fifty degrees Fahrenheit (50°F) and seventy degrees Fahrenheit (70°F) for the required curing period. When necessary, arrangements for heating, covering, insulating, or housing the concrete work shall be made in advance of placement and shall be adequate to maintain the required temperature without injury as a result of concentration of heat.
Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first twenty-four (24) hours unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide.
G. Concrete shall not be placed against forms exposed to heating unless the temperature of the forms is first cooled to less than or equal to ninety degrees Fahrenheit (≤90°F).
3.2 PLACEMENT
A. Placement shall conform to ACI 301, Chapter 8, ACI 304, ACI 306.1, ACI 305.1, and ACI 309. No concrete shall be placed in water except with the written permission of Landscape Architect. The surfaces of absorptive materials against or upon which 293
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-11
concrete is to be placed shall be moistened thoroughly so that moisture will not be drawn from the freshly placed concrete. The concrete shall be placed by equipment that will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. The stream of concrete shall not be allowed to separate by permitting it to fall freely over rods, spacers or other embedded materials.
B. Unless otherwise called out in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings, the placement lift depth of concrete in walls shall be limited to two (2) feet or less to minimize surface defects such as air voids that can form on concrete surfaces. Lift depths shall be limited to one (1) foot if, in the opinion of Landscape Architect, the quality of the finish is unacceptable at the two- (2- ) foot lift depth.
C. Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the materials and the displacement of the reinforcement.
D. Concrete shall not be dropped more than five (5) feet unless confined by closed chutes or pipes. Care shall be taken to fill each part of the form by depositing the concrete as near final position as possible. The coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the forms and worked around the reinforcement without displacing the bars. After initial set of the concrete, the forms shall not be jarred and strain shall not be placed on the ends of projecting reinforcement.
E. Where steep slopes are required, the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or be in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement.
F. Concrete shall not be pumped through aluminum alloy pipe.
G. All chutes, troughs, and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete.
3.3 CONSOLIDATION
A. Concrete vibrators for consolidating concrete shall be two and one-half inch (2-1/2") diameter “high cycle” vibrators with a frequency under load of eight thousand (8,000) to ten thousand four hundred (10,400) vibrations per minute (vpm). Concrete vibrators of lesser capacity are unacceptable for use in any part of the construction. Contractor shall have at least one standby concrete vibrator ready for use for every two (2) concrete vibrators in use during a concrete placement.
B. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated with internal vibrators as recommended in ACI 309 immediately after deposition. The concrete shall be thoroughly worked around the reinforcing steel, around embedded items and into corners of forms. Vibration shall be supplemented by spading, rodding, or forking to eliminate all honeycomb and voids around embedded items.
294
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-12
C. The vibrator shall be inserted vertically, allowing it to penetrate rapidly to the bottom of the lift and at least six (6) inches into the previous lift. The vibrator shall be held at the bottom of lift for five to fifteen (5 - 15) seconds. The vibrator shall be pulled up at a rate of about three (3) inches per second.
D. The vibrator shall be inserted so that the fields of action overlap. The field of action is approximately eight (8) times the vibrator’s head diameter. Thus for a two and one-half (2-1/2) inch diameter vibrator, the spacing of each insertion shall be approximately twenty (20) inches.
E. Vibration shall be stopped when the concrete surface takes a sheen and large air bubbles no longer escape.
F. Do not use a vibrator to move concrete horizontally.
3.4 OPENINGS AND INSERTS
A. Pipe sleeves, inserts for pipe connections, anchors, and forms for pipe holes shall be accurately placed and securely fastened to the forms in such a manner that the placing of concrete shall not alter their alignment or location. In the event that openings are inadvertently omitted or improperly placed, Landscape Architect may require the concrete to be cored at the proper location. Filling of improperly placed openings shall be done with expansive grout or dry pack or mortar applied with an accepted epoxy adhesive. The surfaces of the opening shall be roughened prior to filling.
3.5 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. At the time of concrete placement, embedded items shall be clean and free from mud, oil, and other coatings that may adversely affect bonding capacity. Aluminum embedments shall be coated with a bituminous material to prevent electrolytic action between the embedded item and reinforcing steel that results in concrete deterioration.
Embedment items shall be accurately placed and securely fastened to the forms in such a manner that the placing of concrete shall not alter their alignment or location. Contact between embedded items and reinforcing steel or tendon ducts is unacceptable and is not permitted.
3.6 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. The location of all construction joints shall be subject to the acceptance of Landscape Architect. The surface of all construction joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and all laitance and standing water removed. Clean aggregate shall be exposed by abrasive blast cleaning. Wire brushing and air water jets may be used while concrete is fresh provided results are equal to abrasive blast cleaning. Construction joints shall be keyed 295
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-13
at right angle to the direction of shear. Except where otherwise shown on the Drawings, keyways shall be at least one and one-half (1-1/2) inch in depth over at least twenty five percent (25%) of the area of the section.
3.7 EVAPORATIVE RETARDANT
A. The use of an evaporative retardant is required to assist in proper placement of concrete in accordance with Section 03 29 00, Concrete Curing. Apply two (2) times; after screeding and after the first floating operation. The retardant should be applied at a rate of one (1) gallon of sprayable solution per two hundred to four hundred (200 - 400) square feet by spraying with an industrial type sprayer. If the nozzle of the sprayer becomes plugged, Contractor shall clean, or replace, the nozzle. Under no circumstances shall the retardant be used except by spraying a mist with a nozzle. The retardant shall be applied in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and precautions. In no case shall the retardant be used as a finishing agent. The use of an evaporative retardant requires review and approval by Landscape Architect.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor shall assist Owner or the concrete testing consultant as requested during the performance of quality control testing. When concrete is placed using a concrete pumper, concrete for testing will be taken from the pumper discharge hose.
END OF SECTION 03 00 00
296
Advantage
System Specification
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This guide specification covers the application of the Advantage Laykold system. Advanced Polymer Technology Corporation of Harmony, Pennsylvania, U.S.A provides technical data and guideline specifications only. Consult with a professional engineer or architect for a formal specification. The Advantage Laykold system is designed and used for the protection, beautification, and surface pace for a variety of all-weather athletic and recreational surfaces, including tennis courts, basketball courts, playgrounds, handball courts, paddle tennis courts, etc. Laykold products should only be applied to properly prepared concrete or asphalt substrates. The Advantage Laykold system is comprised of Laykold Acrylic Deep Patch, Laykold Acrylic Resurfacer, Advantage Laykold concentrate, Laykold Line Prime and Laykold Textured White Line Paint. When applying the Advantage Laykold system to a concrete substrate Laykold Epoxy VTB Primer (≥ 75% RH), or LM Bond-Kote (adhesion promoter), is required.
B. Court Construction: Refer to the American Sports Builders Association (ASBA) manual Tennis Courts: A Construction & Maintenance Manual for court construction details. This publication may be obtained by calling the ASBA at 443-640-1042 or visiting www.sportsbuilders.org.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All tennis court surfacing materials shall be Laykold as manufactured by Advanced Polymer Technology (APT) of Harmony, PA, an ISO 9001 certified manufacturer. APT may be contacted via telephone 888-266- 4221, fax 724-452-1703, or web sites: www.sportgroup.com/laykold.
B. All work shall be done in accordance with American Sports Builders Association (ASBA) guidelines.
C. The contractor shall record the batch number of each product used on the site and maintain it through the warranty period.
D. The contractor shall provide the inspector, upon request, an estimate of the volume of each product to be used on the site.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit one set of Advanced Polymer Technology’s “Advantage Laykold System Specifications”.
B. Submit system components Technical Data Sheets (TDS) and one Laykold Color Chart.
C. Submit current Safety Data Sheets.
D. Submit current ISO Quality Management System Certification certificate.
E. Submit current ITF surface classification.
297
2 [Type here]
Advantage System Specification
1.4 WORKING CONDITIONS & LIMITATIONS
A. Concrete substrates shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 30 days before application of any coatings. If time sensitive and/or high RH level is present, Laykold Epoxy VTB Primer can be applied to 5-day old (minimum) concrete substrates according to coatings manufacturer guidelines.
B. If Laykold Epoxy VTB is required, concrete substrate must be shot blasted, or hydro blasted to a CSP3 profile. Minimum requirements are a broom finish and acid etching, if using LM Bond-Kote as an adhesion promoter.
C. Asphalt substrates shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 14 days before application of any coatings.
D. The substrate shall be CLEAN and DRY before coatings are applied. The surface of the substrate shall be inspected and made sure to be free of grease, oil, dust, dirt, and other foreign matter before any coatings are applied.
E. Water used in all mixtures shall be fresh and potable.
F. No part of the surfacing system shall be applied during a rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent.
G. Do not apply coatings to a cold surface. Surface and air temperature must be a minimum of 50ºF (10ºC) and rising. A minimum temperature of 50°F must be maintained during the entire installation process to include 24-hours before and after the installation.
H. Shaded areas will be cooler with slower curing times. Special precautions should be taken to ensure all coatings cure sufficiently prior to application of additional coatings.
I. Do not apply coatings if extremely high humidity prevents drying.
J. No coatings are to be applied if surface temperatures exceed 130°F (54°C).
K. All materials shall be delivered to the job site in sealed containers with the manufacturer’s label affixed.
L. Color(s) of acrylic color coating system is to be selected by owner from manufacturer’s product color card(s).
M. If all the above conditions are met, surfacing materials shall have a (2) two-year limited warranty as supplied by the manufacturer.
1.5 WARRANTY
Advanced Polymer Technology Corp. (APT) warrants, subject to limitations, exclusions, terms and conditions contained herein, that the material supplied by APT, and which is covered by this Warranty, will not fail due to defects for two (2) year. APT’s maximum responsibility under this Limited Warranty shall be limited to the replacement of material in a quantity not in excess of the quantity of material furnished by APT in connection with the project. No salesman or other employee or agent of APT is authorized to bind APT by any agreement, warranty, promise, or understanding not herein expressed. 298
3 [Type here]
Advantage System Specification
This Limited Warranty is made and given in lieu of all other warranties and conditions, expressed or implied, statutory or otherwise, including but not limited to any warranties or conditions of merchantability, durability and of fitness for a particular purpose. Under no circumstances shall APT be liable or otherwise obligated for indirect, incidental, or consequential damages of any nature or kind whatsoever, including damages arising in contract, tort, product liability or otherwise.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ADVANTAGE LAYKOLD SYSTEM MATERIALS
A. All components of Advantage Laykold system shall be supplied by Advanced Polymer Technology, an ISO 9001 certified manufacturer. Advantage Laykold system components shall not contain ANY lead, mercury, nor any heavy metals, PCB, or formaldehyde.
B. Laykold Epoxy VTB Primer (concrete courts only). A two-component, 100% solids, solvent-free epoxy moisture mitigation primer. LM Bond-Kote (adhesion promoter) may be substituted where concrete’s relative humidity, hydrostatic pressure, efflorescence, and staining are not a concern.
1.Percent Solids by Weight 98% (minimum)
2.Weight 9.01 lbs./gallon
C. LM Bond-Kote (concrete substrates only). A one-component PU/Acrylic hybrid emulsion used as a permeable concrete adhesion promoter. LM Bond-Kote is diluted 1 part LM Bond-Kote to 5 parts portable water and mixed until uniform.
1.Percent Solids by weight: 48% (minimum)
2.Weight: 8.9 lbs./gallon
D. Laykold Acrylic Resurfacer. Acrylic-based emulsion used for smoothing rough pavements. 1 to 2-coats as required. Laykold NuSurf is recommended for use on new asphalt pavements and is an acceptable substitute for Acrylic Resurfacer. Laykold NuSurf is not recommended on concrete substrates.
1.Percent Solids by Weight 52% (minimum)
2.Weight 10.7 lbs./gallon
E. Advantage Laykold Color. A factory textured, pigmented wear-resistant acrylic emulsion. 2-coats required.
No bagged sand is to be added at jobsite.
1.Percent Solids by Weight 72.9% (minimum)
2.Weight 12.52 lbs./gallon
F. Optional Laykold ColorCoat Concentrate finish batch mixture. Pigmented wear-resistant acrylic emulsion. 1-coat. Laykold Colorflex finish batch mixture is an acceptable substitute. A finish coat will speed up the surface pace of the court.
1.Percent Solids by Weight 49 % (minimum)
2.Weight: 9.47-9.52 lbs./gallon
G. Laykold Line Prime. Clear drying acrylic emulsion line primer. 1-coat required.
1.Percent Solids by Weight 29%
2.Weight: 8.9 lbs./gallon 299
4 [Type here]
Advantage System Specification
H. Laykold Textured White Line Paint. Factory textured, wear-resistant acrylic emulsion line marking paint. 1- 2 coats as required.
1.Percent Solids by Weight 67% (minimum)
2.Weight: 11.4 lbs./gallon
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect concrete substrate for dryness. Report any discrepancies to general contractor or owner.
B. Surface of substrate shall be cleaned by general contractor as required.
C. Surfacing contractor to approve site and surface conditions prior to proceeding with application of any coatings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. New Concrete or Existing Concrete Substrates
1.Concrete must be shot blasted, or hydro blasted to a CSP3 profile if Laykold Epoxy VTB is required.
When using LM Bond-Kote as an adhesion promoter, concrete must have a minimum of a medium broom finish and acid etched if using LM-Bond-Kote as an adhesion promoter.
2.The workmanship of other contractors including the sub-base shall be level and compacted. The field dry density shall be a minimum of 95%. The concrete base must have a maximum deviation of ¼” below a 10-foot straight edge when measured in any random path.
3.New concrete shall be cured for a minimum of 30 days before proceeding.
4.All surfaces shall be checked to ensure a level surface. The surface shall be flooded with water, any area that retains 1/8” of water in depth after 20 minutes should be marked and leveled after the Laykold VTB Primer application. All cracking and construction joints should be filled with the correct sealant. This sealant should be designed for waterproofing or moisture mitigation. If using LM Bond-Kote, depression should be leveled before LM Bond-Kote application.
5.Surface cleaning - All surfaces must be clean, dry, and free from any bond inhibiting contaminants and foreign residue. Pressure wash the surface to remove any residues.
6.The polyethylene vapor barrier application shall be applied by additional contractors. The application of the barrier shall be installed preceding any cables or steel. The vapor barrier shall be applied at a minimum of two (2) 6-mil layers. Once the installation is completed do not allow any traffic (including vehicular) onto the surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Primer (for concrete substrates only): When installing the Advantage Laykold System over concrete, LM Bond-Kote must be applied as the first layer of the system. If applying a breathable system or RH tests less than 75%, LM Bond-Kote can be applied. LM Bond-Kote is mixed by diluting 1 part LM Bond-Kote with 5 parts portable water and mixing using a low-speed jiffy mixer (400 to 600 rpm) until uniform (3-5 300 5 [Type here]
Advantage System Specification
minutes). Spread the mixed primer on the substrate using a 36” 55 durometer squeegee to achieve a total coverage of approximately 0.02 gal/yd2 (0.09 kg/m2 – 450ft2/gal). Allow to fully dry before
proceeding.
If the concrete substrate tests with an RH of 75% or greater or a MVER (Anhydrous Calcium Chloride) or greater than 3 lbs./1000 sqft/24 hours, more cure time is required or Laykold Epoxy VTB Primer can be used. Laykold Epoxy VTB Primer is mixed by premixing the A for 1 minute, then pouring the B component into the A component and mixing using a low-speed jiffy mixer (400 – 600 rpm) for 2 minutes. Do not incorporate air when mixing. Spread Laykold Epoxy VTB Primer on the substrate using a 36” 55 durometer squeegee and high-quality, 18” medium nap roller to achieve a total coverage of 0.12 gal/yd2 or 75 ft2
/gal. The working time for Laykold Epoxy VTB Primer is approximately 40-50 minutes once on the ground and is reduced in high temperatures. Allow 8 to 10 hours drying time before proceeding.
Note: Only use material that naturally flows out of the pail. Do not scrape, bang, or place pail upside down to force additional materials out of the pail.
B. Patching: Once the surface has been thoroughly cleaned and is free of all loose material, dirt, or dust, the court shall be flooded and allowed to drain a minimum of 30 minutes and a maximum of 1 hour. Any area that holds water (birdbaths) in a depth greater than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm or the thickness of a nickel) shall be outlined and patched.
1. Surface Leveling: Birdbaths shall be leveled using a Laykold Acrylic Deep Patch court patch binder slurry. Prime area with a 50/50 mixture of Laykold Acrylic Deep Patch and water. Primer shall be brushed into place and allowed to dry prior to patching. Patch mix shall consist of Laykold Acrylic Deep Patch, 50-mesh sand, and Type 1 Portland cement. Mix as per manufacturer directions.
Note: Laykold Poly Primer (Patch Mix) is an acceptable substitute for leveling materials.
2. Crack Filling: Cracks shall be cleaned, primed, and filled using Laykold Acrylic Resurfacer if cracks are 1/16 inch or less. If greater than 1/16 inch, Laykold Acrylic Deep Patch court patch binder slurry should be used to fill cracks. Mix as per manufacturer’s directions.
Note: Laykold Crack Filler and QualiCaulk are acceptable substitutes for crack filling materials.
3. All areas that are repaired/leveled/corrected using a court patch binder mixture shall be allowed to fully cure and then ground smooth and level with the substrate by stone or an acceptable mechanical method.
C. Filler Coat(s): Apply one coat of Laykold Acrylic Resurfacer using a 24”, 30” or 36” wide 70 Durometer flexible rubber squeegee. Batch mix shall consist of 55 gallons (260 kg) of Laykold Acrylic Resurfacer, 30 to 40 gallons (115-130 kg) of potable water, and 600 to 900 pounds (270-400 kg) of clean, bagged silica sand (60 to 80 mesh). The application rate shall be 0.05-0.07 gal/yd2 (0.29-0.40 kg/m2 - 129-180 ft2/gal) of
undiluted Laykold Acrylic Resurfacer per coat.
D. Textured Color Coats:
Laykold M3 – ITF Classification 3
Apply two coats of Advantage Laykold factory textured color using a 24”, 30” or 36” 50 Durometer flexible rubber squeegee. Batch mix shall consist of 30 gallons (170 kg) of Advantage Laykold 60 and 6.5-8.5 gallons (25 to 32 kg) of potable water. The application rate shall be 0.06-0.07 gal/yd2 (0.41-0.47 kg/m2 -
130-150 ft2
/gal) of undiluted Advantage Laykold per coat. Each layer should be completely dry before applying subsequent layers.
301
6 [Type here]
Advantage System Specification
Laykold MF4 – ITF Classification 4
Apply two coats of Advantage Laykold factory textured color using a 24”, 30” or 36” 50 Durometer flexible rubber squeegee. Batch mix shall consist of 30 gallons (170 kg) of Advantage Laykold and 6.5-8.5 gallons (25 to 32 kg) of potable water. The application rate shall be 0.06-0.07 gal/yd2 (0.41-0.47 kg/m2 - 130-150
ft2
/gal) of undiluted Advantage Laykold per coat.
Apply one coat of Laykold ColorCoat Concentrate finish batch mixture using a 24”, 30” or 36” 50 Durometer flexible rubber squeegee. Batch mix shall consist of 55 gallons (260 kg) of Laykold ColorCoat Concentrate and 55 gallons (210 kg) of potable water. The application rate shall be 0.03-0.04 gal/yd2 (0.17-
0.23 kg/m2
- 225-300 ft2/gal) of undiluted Laykold ColorCoat Concentrate per coat.
Each coat should be completely dry before applying subsequent coats. Allow topcoat to cure a minimum of 24 hours before applying game lines.
E. Game Lines:
1. Wait a minimum of 24 hours after final color coat before applying line paint.
2. All lines are to be applied by painting between masking tape with a paintbrush or roller according to U.S.T.A. and A.S.B.A. specifications.
3. Prime masked lines with Laykold Line Prime and allow a minimum drying time of 1-hour.
4. Apply 1 to 2 coats as needed of Laykold Textured White Line Paint with a brush or roller.
5. Remove masking tape immediately after lines are dry.
6. Allow lines to dry a minimum of 24 hours before allowing play on court.
F. Remove all excess and waste materials from the area of work. Dispose of empty containers in accordance with federal and local statutes.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Cure Time. No traffic or other trades shall be allowed on the surface for a period of one week following completion to allow for complete and proper cure of the finish.
B. Other Trades. It is the responsibility of the general contractor to protect the surface from damage by other trades before acceptance by the owner or the owner’s authorized agent.
C. Do not allow surrounding sprinkler systems to spray water on the newly applied court surface for a period of one week after completion.
D. Do not place any benches, chairs, ball baskets, or any other type of court equipment on the newly applied court surface for a period of one week after completion.
E. Do not allow black soled shoes, bicycles, rollerblades, etc. on the court surface. Black scuff marks cannot be removed!
Acrylic, all-weather tennis and athletic surfacing systems are designed and used to visually enhance asphalt and concrete substrates while providing a desired surface texture, surface pace and/or speed of play. Laykold systems and system components may be used to level surface depressions, fill substrate cracking, smooth surface roughness and make other such adjustments to a new or existing surface/substrate. However, acrylic all-weather tennis and athletic surfacing systems are NOT capable of solving the problems and/or forces associated with cracked, deteriorating, or damaged substrates. 302
7 [Type here]
Advantage System Specification
Please read all safety data sheets and technical data sheets before using any of the Laykold/Laykold Masters Primers.
For complete and latest warranty and product information, please visit www.sportgroup.com/laykold.
ADVANCED POLYMER TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION believes the information herein to be true, accurate and reliable. However, recommendations or suggestions are made without guarantee. Since conditions and disposal are beyond our control, ADVANCED POLYMER TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION disclaims any liability incurred in connection with the use of our products and information contained herein; no warranty, express or implied is given nor is freedom from any patent owned by ADVANCED POLYMER TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION or others to be inferred.
Rev 11 WAB 08.07.23
advpolytech.com
303
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 11-68-00 September 2024 Playground Equipment
SECTION 11 68 00
PLAYGROUND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
B. Playground Equipment coordination and installation.
1. Playground Equipment will be Owner-provided and installed by Contractor except where noted.
2. Contractor is responsible for scheduling the delivery and the off-loading of the equipment.
3. Contractor is responsible for coordinating with the Manufacturer on all required submittals and shop drawings and processing those submittals with the Owner and the Owner’s Representatives.
4. Contractor is responsible for coordinating the work with all related trades and materials suppliers, including site elements, safety surfacing, and utilities.
5. Contractor will select and pay for Playground Safety Inspector prior to layout of play area and installation. Contractor is responsible for scheduling the reviews and inspections. Related Sections include the following:
a. Section 32 18 16.13 "Playground Protective Surfacing" for protective surfacing under and around playground equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Fall Height: According to ASTM F 1487, "the vertical distance between a designated play surface and the protective surfacing beneath it." 304
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 11-68-00 September 2024 Playground Equipment
B. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.
C. IPEMA: International Play Equipment Manufacturers Association.
D. LLDPE: Linear low-density polyethylene.
E. MDPE: Medium-density polyethylene.
F. Use Zone: According to ASTM F 1487, "the area beneath and immediately adjacent to a play structure that is designated for unrestricted circulation around the equipment and on whose surface it is predicted that a user would land when falling from or exiting the equipment."
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Safety
1. Installation of playground equipment, including any specialty concrete, shall meet the safety requirements of the current CPSC and ASTM F 1487 and Title 22. Social Security; Division 4. Environmental Health; Chapter
22. Safety Regulations for Playgrounds.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 013300. Contractor shall provide submittals in a timely manner to facilitate the ordering of equipment and to allow installation in accordance with the approved construction schedule.
B. Installer Qualifications
1. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements.
2. Provide evidence the installer of the play equipment possesses liability insurance of at least $1,000,000 from a reputable insurance company covering defects in materials, workmanship, and installation. This liability shall cover any bodily harm resulting from a failure of play equipment due to installation defects.
3. Qualification Data:
a. For Installer: Submit a listing of at least five installations where the brand of play equipment with similar units to those proposed has been installed and has been in successful service for at least five years. This list shall include owner or purchaser; address of installation; service or maintenance organization; date of 305
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 11-68-00 September 2024 Playground Equipment
installation; and contact person and phone number.
b. For Manufacturer: Submit documentation that the Playground Equipment Manufacturer is ISO 9001 certified (Quality
Management Standard) and ISO 14001 certified (Environmental Management Standard)
C. Product Data: For each type of product indicated submit two bound copies of play equipment product data, catalog cuts, photo brochures, specifications, and installation procedures, (including diagrams, instructions, scale models) or other printed information in sufficient detail and scope to verify compliance with requirements of the contract documents
D. Provide a Certificate of Insurance from the manufacturer, covering both product and general liability, of not less than $1,000,000. The issuing underwriter shall be AA rated.
E. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Extent of surface systems and use zones for equipment.
2. Critical heights for playground surface or fall heights for equipment.
3. Minimum dimensions from all obstructions, such as curbs and paving, to extent line of fall zones.
F. Product Certificates: For each type of playground equipment, signed by product manufacturer.
G. Material Samples for Final Color Selection: For each type of material incorporated within the selected play equipment configuration.
H. Manufacturer Compliance Letter: Play Equipment Manufacturer shall provide Contractor and Owner a letter stating that the equipment design and detailing meets all professional standards of care for playground equipment, including compliance with ASTM, USCPSC Guidelines for Public Playground Safety, I.Material Certificates: For the following items, signed by manufacturers:
1. Shop finishes.
2. Recycled plastic.
J. Submit a statement by the material supplier or equipment manufacturer asserting that the supplied material or equipment meets and is installed according to the specified requirements.
K. Maintenance Data: For playground equipment and finishes to include in 306
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 11-68-00 September 2024 Playground Equipment
maintenance manuals.
1. Submit two bound copies of procedures and instructions pertaining to frequency of preventive maintenance, inspection, adjustment, lubrication, and cleaning necessary to minimize corrective maintenance and repair for play equipment. A list of all parts and components for the system, by manufacturer's name, part number, and nomenclature, shall be attached.
2. Supply a maintenance kit with each custom play structure that shall include wrenches for tamper-proof hardware, one (1) can of graffiti remover, primer, and spray paint to match the color of the structure, sandpaper, and a comprehensive maintenance manual. The maintenance manual shall include a complete plan drawing of the structure, inspection procedures, inspection report forms, and installation instructions and parts list. The entire kit is to be sent directly to the Owner’s representative.
L. Field quality-control test reports.
M. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for playground equipment.
N. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Spec section, See 1.7.
1. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty against all defects in materials and workmanship for the installed play equipment.
O. Testing Agency Qualifications: Contractor shall provide an independent agency qualified according to ANSI Z34.1 for testing indicated.
1. Submit IPEMA certification showing compliance with all applicable portions of the current ASTM F-1487 Standard.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Equipment shall be delivered and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Protect materials from adverse weather.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace playground equipment components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
307
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 11-68-00 September 2024 Playground Equipment
a. Structural failures including chipping, breaking or bending. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Play Equipment Warranty Period:
a. 3 YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY for all moving parts; swing
seats and hangers; track ride trolleys and bumpers; spring assemblies for all rocking equipment and any other equipment not included above against failure due to corrosion, deterioration or workmanship.
b. 10 YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY for all aluminum; posts,
clamps, beam, and caps, against structural failure due to corrosion, deterioration or workmanship. This warranty does not include any cosmetic issues.
c. 15 YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY for all plastic and steel
components, against structural failure due to corrosion, deterioration or workmanship. This warranty does not include any cosmetic issues.
d. 15 YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY for protective plastic coating against structural failure due to corrosion, deterioration or workmanship. This warranty does not include any cosmetic issues.
3. General Warranty:
a. Manufactured playground equipment shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship, materials, or installation for a minimum period of one year after Substantial Completion. Warranty shall include but not be limited to such defects as bubbling, delamination, peeling, loss of integrity, poor ultraviolet stability, lack of permeability, or general deterioration due to weather. All posts shall be guaranteed against deterioration for ten years. All rotationally molded components shall be guaranteed for five years.
1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Contractor shall coordinate and install the play equipment shown on the drawings and described in this section. Substitutions can be approved by the client and the landscape architect on items that haven’t been pre-purchased by the client.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES (Contractor
Furnished, Contractor Installed except where noted)
A. Custom Play Structure (Owner Supplied, Contractor installed) B. Acorn Tower Water Dump (Owner Supplied, Contractor installed) C. KLD-03-Rope Sinner (Owner Supplied, Contractor installed) D. Dorothy Johnson Custom Shade Structure (Owner Supplied, Contractor installed) E. Large Cantilever Shade Structure (Owner Supplied, Contractor installed) 308
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 11-68-00 September 2024 Playground Equipment
F. Small Cantilever Shade Structure (Owner Supplied, Contractor installed) G. Prefabricated Restroom (Owner Supplied, Contractor installed) H. Kompan Multi-Use Goal/Hoop Structures (2) (Owner Supplied, Contractor installed)
I. Basketball Pole/Hoops
J. Concrete Animal Climber Structures
K. Park Planet Fitness Elements (2)
L. Custom Play Structure/KLD Rope Spinner/Fitness Elements
1. Manufacturer/Supplier Information:
a. Playcraft Systems
b. Kyle Knox, Park Planet, 530-244-6116 Email:
[email protected]
M. Prefabricated Restroom
1. Manufacturer/Supplier Information: Berliner Paly Equipment Corporation a. Romtec Inc.
b. Contact: Cody Dooley, (541) 496-3541 Email:
[email protected]
N. Shade Structures
1. Manufacturer/Supplier Information:
a. Icon Shelter Systems Inc.
b. Kyle Knox, 530-244-6116 Email:
[email protected]
O. Multi-Use Goal/Hoop Structures
1. Manufacturer/Supplier Information:
a. Kompan Inc.
b. Mark Wills, (916) 319-9663 Email: [email protected]
P. Acorn Tower Water Dump
1. Manufacturer/Supplier Information:
a. Rain Drop Products
b. Steven Bearden, 419-207-1229 Email: [email protected] Q. Concrete Animal Climber Structures
1. Manufacturer/Supplier Information:
a. Themed Concepts or Approved Equal
b. Kyle Knox, 530-244-6116 Email: [email protected]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Cast aluminum: ASTM B 179
309
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 11-68-00 September 2024 Playground Equipment
B. Steel: Comply with the following:
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36, hot-dip galvanized.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 135, standard-weight, hot-dip galvanized.
3. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 or ASTM A 513, cold formed, hot-dip galvanized.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666; Type 304.
D. Fittings: ASTM A 467, Class CS, 4/0 or 5/0, commercial-quality, hot-dip galvanized steel connectors and swing or ring hangars.
E. Castings and Hangers: Malleable iron, ASTM A 47, Grade 32510, hot-dip galvanized.
F. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard; commercial-quality; corrosion-resistant; hotdip galvanized steel and iron, stainless steel, or aluminum; of a secure and vandalresistant design.
G. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard; corrosion-resistant; hot-dip galvanized or plated steel and iron, or stainless steel; permanently capped, and theft resistant.
H. Opaque Plastic: Color impregnated, UV stabilized, and mold resistant.
1. Polyethylene: Fabricated from 96 percent recycled, purified, fractionalmelt plastic resin; rotationally molded HDPE, LLDPE, or MDPE with not less than 1/4-inch wall thickness.
I.Rotationally Molded Poly Parts: These parts shall be molded using prime compounded linear low-density polyethylene with a tensile strength of 2500 psi per ASTM D 638 and with color and UV stabilizing additives. Wall thickness varies by product from .187 inches (3/16 inch) to .312 inches (5/16 inch). Color shall be specified (four standard colors are available).
J. Permalene Parts: These parts shall be manufactured from .75 inches thick highdensity polyethylene that has been specially formulated for optimum UV stability and color retention. Compression-molded products shall meet or exceed density of. 933 G/cc per ASTM D 1505, tensile strength of 2400 psi per ASTM D 638.
Color shall be specified (standard solid colors are tan, red, blue, green, and yellow). Some permalene parts are available in two-color laminate product with (2) .070 inches thick exterior layers over a .610 inches interior core of contrasting color. Color shall be specified (eight standard two-color options are available). 310
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 11-68-00 September 2024 Playground Equipment
K. Custom Components: These parts shall be manufactured in sizes and shapes as shown on the drawings and as required to complete the play equipment layout.
Custom components shall meet or exceed ASTM standards as set forth in the General Requirements section. All custom components must be approved by the Owner’s Representative.
L. Stepped Play Surfaces: Provide stepped platforms where indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, site surface and sub-grade drainage, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Do not begin installation before final grading required for placing protective surfacing is completed, unless otherwise permitted by the Owner’s representative.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prior to start of excavation, Contractor shall lay out the entire outdoor play area and stake location of all elements, including playground equipment, use zones, pathways, planters, and hard surfaces, based on actual playground equipment supplied to be installed. Use zones shall not overlap hard surfaces, and shall meet criteria of current releases of CPSC, ASTM F 1292 and ASTM F 1487. The Owner’s representative reserves the right to adjust the equipment locations and other elements to meet field conditions and use zone safety requirements.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Anchor playground equipment securely, positioned at locations and elevations indicated.
1. Maximum Equipment Height: Coordinate installed heights of equipment and components with finished elevations of protective surfacing. Set equipment so fall heights and elevation requirements for age group use and accessibility are within required limits. To meet the impact attenuation requirements of the playground safety surface in accordance with ASTM F1292 and Section 32 18 16 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE
311
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 11-68-00 September 2024 Playground Equipment
SURFACES, the maximum accessible height of playground equipment shall be as specified by the manufacturer. Verify that playground equipment elevations comply with requirements for each type and component of equipment.
2. All components of the equipment shall be installed accurately to produce true plumb and level installation.
B. Post and Footing Installation
1. Excavation: Excavate holes for posts and footings as indicated in firm, undisturbed or compacted sub-grade soil.
2. Post Set on Sub-grade: Level bearing surfaces with drainage fill to required elevation.
3. Post Set with Concrete Footing: Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, forming, and placing concrete. a. Set equipment posts in/on concrete footing. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set plumb or at the correct angle, alignment, height, and spacing. 1) Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation.
Hold posts in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.
b. Embedded Items: Use setting drawings and manufacturer's written instructions to ensure correct installation of anchorages for equipment.
c. Concrete Footings: Smooth top, and shape to shed water.
3.4 PLAY AREA LAYOUT REVISIONS
A. The play area equipment layout, as shown on the Drawings, is based on the use of specific equipment designed for specific aesthetic character, play value and activities. The use of other equipment suppliers with different configurations, if approved, will require the Contractor to provide a revised play equipment layout and obtain approval of both the equipment and the play area layout from the Owner’s Representative. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs to revise the layout including review of the layout and documentation of the revised layout by Owner’s consultant. The revised play equipment layout shall include appropriate safety use zone clearances for the equipment selected.
3.5 LEVEL OF SAFETY SURFACING
A. All play equipment located in areas of sand, wood fiber, or other loose fill surfacing shall be clearly marked to indicate the finished level of safety surfacing material to meet impact- attenuating requirements. All metal posts, springs or supports shall be as marked by the manufacturer. Those items not marked by the 312
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 11-68-00 September 2024 Playground Equipment
manufacturer shall be marked with a 3/4" circle painted with black epoxy paint.
3.6 QUALITY CONTROL, INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Arrange for playground equipment manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect playground and playground equipment and components during installation and at final completion and to certify compliance with the following:
1. ASTM F 1487.
2. CPSC No. 325.
B. Notify the Owner’s representative at least 48 hours in advance of date and time of final inspection.
C. Replace all defective or damaged play equipment prior to acceptance.
D. Prior to final inspection and acceptance, remove all rubbish and excess material for disposal as approved, and leave area in a neat, satisfactory condition.
E. CERTIFICATION INSPECTION
1. All play equipment shall be inspected by a Playground Safety Inspector with a valid certification from the National Playground Safety Institute (NPSI) for compliance in accordance with ASTM F 1487-98 and the USCPSC Handbook for Public Playground Safety. Contractor to provide a signed documentation of compliance certification.
END OF
SECTION
313
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02970 September 2024 Landscape Maintenance
02970 - 1
SECTION 02970
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 CONDITIONS
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements (if any) apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services required to maintain landscape in a healthy growing condition and in a neat and attractive appearance throughout the maintenance period.
B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections:
1. SECTION 02811 - IRRIGATION SYSTEM
2. SECTION 02905 - LANDSCAPE INSTALLATION
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Maintenance Contractor shall be experienced in horticulture and landscape maintenance, practices, and techniques, and shall provide sufficient number of workers with adequate equipment to perform the work during the maintenance period.
1.04 MAINTENANCE PERIOD
A. Continuously maintain the entire project area during the progress of the work and during the sixty (60) calendar-day, maintenance period or until final acceptance of the project by the Landscape Architect.
B. Sections of the project may begin the maintenance period before others if project schedule is divided into thirds or an alternate schedule that is accepted by the Architect. A prime requirement is that lawn and landscape areas shall be planted and that lawn areas shall show an even, healthy stand of grass seedlings or sod, either of which shall have been mown twice. If such criteria are met to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect, a written notification shall be issued to establish the effective beginning date of maintenance period for each section of the project.
C. Any day of improper maintenance, as determined by the Landscape Architect, shall not be credited as an acceptable maintenance period day. The maintenance period shall be extended on a daily basis if the work is not in accordance to the Plans and Specifications. Project shall not be segmented into maintenance areas or phases unless authorization of the Landscape Architect is obtained. 314
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02970 September 2024 Landscape Maintenance
02970 - 2
D. Maintenance shall continue beyond the sixty (60) day maintenance period, as required, until final acceptance is given by the Landscape Architect.
1.05 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT
A. Guarantee: All plant material and other materials installed under the Contract shall be guaranteed for one (1) year from time of final acceptance against any and all poor, inadequate or inferior materials and/or workmanship or improper maintenance, as determined by the Landscape Architect, shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
B. Replacement: Any materials found to be dead, missing, or not in a satisfactory or healthy condition during the maintenance period shall be replaced immediately. The Landscape Architect shall be sole judge as to the condition of material. Material to be replaced within the guarantee period shall be replaced by the Contractor within five (5) days of written notification by the Landscape Architect. All replacement materials and installations shall comply to the Plans and Specifications. Any plant missing due to suspected theft shall be replaced by the Contractor. If the Contractor suspects that theft may be a problem, the Contractor shall provide written documentation to the Landscape Architect that security on this site needs to be intensified. The Contractor may relieve himself of theft responsibility if after the security notice, with no result, a written notice to the Landscape Architect shall be given that plant material will not be replaced for theft or vandalism due to lack of site security being maintained. This procedure may take place only during the Landscape Maintenance Period.
1.06 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE
Normal progress observations shall be requested by the Contractor from the Landscape Architect as per observations listed in specifications SECTION 02905 - LANDSCAPE INSTALLATION.
1.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT
A. Upon completion of all project work, including maintenance period, the Landscape Architect will, upon proper request, make an observation to determine final project acceptability.
B. Where observed work does not comply with the Plans and Specifications, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance period until re-inspected by the Landscape Architect and determined to be acceptable. All replacement materials and installations shall be in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Remove rejected work and materials immediately from project. Prior to the date of final observation, Contractor shall provide the Owner with all Record Drawings and written Guarantee Statement in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 315
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02970 September 2024 Landscape Maintenance
02970 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All materials used shall either conform to Specifications in other sections or shall otherwise be acceptable to the Landscape Architect. The Landscape Architect shall be given a monthly record of all herbicides, insecticides and disease control chemicals used.
B. Fertilizer – Ammonium sulfate (21-0-0)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MAINTENANCE
A. General: Proper maintenance, including watering, weeding, mowing, edging, fertilization, repairing and protection shall be required until entire project is finally accepted, but in any event for a period of not less than the specified maintenance period after planting.
B. Watering: Thoroughly water to insure vigorous and healthy growth until work is accepted. Water in a manner to prevent erosion due to application of excessive quantities of water. When hand watering use a water wand to break the water force.
C. Weeding: Keep plant basins and areas between plants free of weeds. Control weeds with pre-emergent herbicides. If weeds develop, use legally approved herbicides.
Avoid frequent soil cultivation that destroys shallow roots. Weeding also shall be included in all paved areas including public or private sidewalks.
D. Pruning
1. Trees: Prune trees to select and develop permanent scaffold branches; to eliminate narrow V-shaped branch forks that lack strength; to reduce toppling and wind damage by thinning out crowns; to maintain a natural appearance and to balance crown with roots. Prune only as directed by the Landscape Architect.
2. Shrubs: Same objectives as for trees. Shrubs shall not be clipped into balled boxed forms unless such is required by the landscape plans. All pruning cuts shall be made to lateral branches, buds or flush with the trunk. "Stubbing" and "heading" shall not be permitted.
3. Only skilled workmen shall perform pruning work in accordance with standard horticultural pruning practices. Remove from the project all pruned branches and material. Remove and replace any plant material excessively pruned or malformed resulting from improper pruning practices at no additional costs to the Owner.
E. Staking and Guying: Stakes and guys shall remain in place through 316
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02970 September 2024 Landscape Maintenance
02970 - 4
the guarantee period (one year) and shall be inspected and adjusted to prevent rubbing that causes bark wounds.
F. Insect, Animal, Rodent and Disease Control: Maintain proper control with legally approved materials as required as part of the Contract.
G. Protection: The Contractor shall maintain protection of the planted areas. Damaged areas shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense.
H. Trash: Remove trash weekly in all planted areas, pedestrian walkways, and plazas.
I. Replacement: As per Guarantee and Replacement Specifications of this Section.
3.02 MAINTENANCE FERTILIZER
Fertilization: During maintenance period an application of Maintenance Fertilizer (21-0-0), shall be made at thirty (30) days and again at sixty (60) days from the date of landscape installation at a rate of five (5) pounds per 1,000 square feet, or as per manufacturer's recommendations.
3.03 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. System Observation: The Contractor shall check all systems for proper operation.
Lateral lines shall be flushed out after removing the last sprinkler head or two at each end of the lateral. All heads are to be adjusted as necessary for unimpeded coverage.
B. Controllers: Set and program automatic controllers for seasonal water requirements.
Give the Town's representative instructions on how to turn off system in case of emergency.
C. Repairs: Repair all damages to irrigation system at the Contractor's expense. Repairs shall be made within twenty-four (24) hours.
END OF SECTION
317
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-1
SECTION 03 00 00
CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, and equipment for the construction of reinforced cast-in-place concrete.
B. This section includes basic finishing and curing methods, accessory control, and expansion and contraction joint devices.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. The following is a list of specifications which may be related to this section:
1. Section 01 31 00, Project Management and Coordination.
2. Section 03 11 00, Concrete Forming. (ACI 347)
3. Section 03 15 00, Construction Joints.
4. Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel. (ASTM A615) (ACI 315-65)
5. Section 03 35 00, Concrete Finishing.
6. Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing.
7. Section 07 92 00, Sealants.
8. Section 31 00 00, Earthwork.
9. Section 32 16 00, Sidewalks, Curbs, and Gutters.
10. Section 32 84 00, Planting Irrigation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
318
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-2
a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. c. C150, Standard Specification for Portland cement.
d. C260, Standard Specification for Air-entraining Admixtures for Concrete. e. C494/C494M, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
f. C979, Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. g. C1059, Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete.
2. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. 211, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete. b. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete.
c. 305.1, Specification for Hot Weather Concreting.
d. 306.1, Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
e. 309, Standard Practice for Consolidating Concrete.
f. 504, Guide to Joint Sealants.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data on the following:
1. Ready-mixed concrete mix designs.
2. Fly ash.
3. Admixtures (such as air-entraining and water-reducing admixtures).
4. Form release agents.
5. Bonding agents.
6. Colorant.
7. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings that indicate formwork, dimensions, reinforcement, accessories and control and expansion joint layout.
C. Record Drawings: Provide accurate locations, measured from two permanent visible locations, all embedded utilities, sleeves, and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.
319
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-3
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
B. Verify that pipe sleeving and other conduits, of sizes and types specified, are installed as required prior to placing concrete.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and/or a supervisor who is an ACIcertified Concrete Flatwork Technician.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
D. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field-Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
E. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.
1.7 MOCK UP
A. Cast concrete mock up to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship.
B. Mock up shall be a minimum 25 sq. ft. for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Landscape Architect.
C. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Demolish and remove concrete mockups when directed by Landscape Architect. 320
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-4
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The ready-mixed concrete truck driver shall provide the batch ticket to Landscape Architect at the time of concrete delivery. The ticket shall summarize the following information legibly in an easily discernible table:
1. Weight in pounds of all materials, excepting the water reducing and air entraining agents which shall be in ounces.
2. Cubic yards batched.
3. The ratio of water to cementitious (W/C) materials ratio.
4. Temperature of the concrete at the time it was batched.
5. Time of batching.
6. Free moisture in the fine and coarse aggregates in percent of weight of aggregate.
7. Gallons of water that may be added at the site without exceeding the permissible W/C ratio.
8. Ratio of colorants to cementitious materials ratio.
9. Concrete Mix Design Number.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
321
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-5
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
C. Installation of concrete other than approved mixes shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Acquire cement and aggregate from the same source for all work.
B. Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement Type II, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
C. Aggregate:
1. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall consist of hard, strong, durable particles complying with the provisions of ASTM C33.
2. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate shall conform to the provisions of ASTM C33. Aggregate shall be crushed aggregate or angular screened natural aggregate.
Hydraulic - cement aggregate is unacceptable.
D. Water: Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic materials, or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel.
Mixing water for prestressed, pretensioned and prestressed post-tensioned concrete or for concrete which will contain aluminum embedments shall not contain deleterious amounts of chloride ion.
322
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-6
E. Admixtures: Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior acceptance by Landscape Architect. The admixture shall maintain the same composition and performance throughout the Work as the product used in the concrete proportions established in accordance with ACI 211. Admixtures containing chloride ions shall not be used.
1. Air Entrainment:
a. An air-entraining agent shall be used in all concrete. The agent used shall conform to ASTM C260.
b. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the amount of airentraining agent used in each concrete mix shall be such as will affect the entrainment of the percentage of air shown in the following tabulation in the concrete as discharged from the mixer or pumper discharge hose if applicable. Table 1 is applicable for concrete strengths less than five thousand (5,000) psi
c. The level of exposure shall be determined by Landscape Architect. d. When a batch of concrete delivered to the Project does not conform to the minimum specified air content, an air-entraining admixture may be added, one (1) time only for the batch, at Contractor’s option prior to consideration for rejection. After the admixture is added, the concrete shall be remixed for a minimum of twenty (20) revolutions of the mixer drum at mixing speed.
The concrete shall then be retested and if found acceptable, may be placed in accordance with the Specifications.
2. Water Reducing, Set-Controlling Admixture: Contractor shall use a “midrange” water reducing, set controlling admixture, Polyheed 997, or equal. The waterreducing admixture shall be used in all concrete and shall conform to ASTM C494/C494M, specifically Types A, B, C, D, and E.
Table 1
Nominal Max.
Aggregate Size (Inch)
Average Air Content
(Percent)
Severe Exposure Moderate Exposure
3/8 7-1/2 ± 1-1/2 6 ± 1-1/2
3/4 6 ± 1-1/2 5 ± 1-1/2
1-1/2 5-1/2 ± 1=1/2 4-1/2 ± 1-1/2
323
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-7
3. Finely Divided Mineral Admixtures (Fly Ash): Mineral admixtures shall be limited to fly ash conforming to ASTM C618, Class C or Class F. Class C fly ash is not permitted where sulfate resistant cement is required.
F. Evaporative Retardant: In accordance with Section 03 29 00, Concrete Curing.
G. Bituminous Coating: Bituminous Coating for aluminum pipes will be in accordance with AASHTO M-190 Type A.
H. Grout: In accordance with Section 03 60 00, Grouting.
I. Epoxy Bonding Agent:
1. Master Builders; Concresive Liquid (LPL).
2. Master Builders; Concresive Standard Liquid.
2.3 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
A. Concrete compressive strength requirements consist of a minimum strength that must be obtained before various loads of stresses are applied to the concrete and, for concrete designated by strength, a minimum strength at the age of twenty-eight (28) days. Unless otherwise shown on the DRAWINGS, the twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of structural concrete shall be a minimum of four thousand five hundred (4,500) psi.
B. The mix shall be designed for required strengths in accordance with ACI 301. The ratio of water to the sum of concrete plus pozzolan shall not exceed 0.45 by weight for durable, watertight, concrete. The amount of fly ash in the mix shall be between fifteen and twenty percent (15 and 20%) by weight of the total cementitious materials.
C. Unless otherwise permitted or specified in the DRAWINGS, the concrete shall be proportioned and produced to have a slump not to exceed four (4) inches or less than two and one-half (2-1/2) inches. Concrete not consolidated by internal vibration shall be proportioned to have a slump not to exceed five and one-half (5-1/2) inches or less than four (4) inches.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Batching:
1. Measuring and batching of materials shall be done at a batching plant.
2. Portland Cement:
324
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-8
a. Either sacked or bulk cement may be used. No fraction of a sack of cement shall be used in a batch of concrete unless the cement is weighed. Bulk cement shall be weighed on scales separate and distinct from the aggregate hopper or hoppers. Batching shall be such that the accuracy of batching shall be plus or minus one percent of the required weight.
3. Water:
a. Unless water is to be weighed, the water-measuring equipment shall include an auxiliary tank from which the measuring tank shall be filled. In lieu of the volume method, Contractor shall be permitted to use a water-metering device.
4. Aggregates:
a. Aggregates shall be handled from stockpiles or other sources to the batching plant in such a manner as to secure a uniform grading of the material.
Aggregates that have become segregated, or mixed with earth or foreign material, shall not be used. Batching shall be so conducted as to result in the weights of material required for each type aggregate within a tolerance of two percent (2%).
b. Free water contents of the coarse and fine aggregates shall be continuously tested and concrete mixture adjusted for moisture conditions of the aggregate in order to meet the designated water/cement ratio.
5. Fine Aggregate:
a. The proportion of fine aggregate shall be between thirty-six and forty-four percent (36 and 44%) by volume of the total aggregates in the concrete.
B. Mixing:
1. Ready-mixed concrete shall be either “central mixed” or “shrink mixed” concrete as defined in ASTM C94/C94M. “Truck mixed” concrete as defined in ASTM C94/C94M shall not be permitted. Mixing time shall be measured from the time water is added to the mix, or cement contacts the aggregate. All concrete shall be homogeneous and thoroughly mixed, and there shall be no lumps or evidence of undispersed cement. Mixers and agitators, which have an accumulation of hard concrete or mortar, shall not be used. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.
2. The temperature of mixed concrete, immediately before placing shall not be less than fifty degrees Fahrenheit (50°F) or more than ninety degrees Fahrenheit (90°F). Aggregates and water shall be heated or cooled as necessary to produce concrete within these temperature limits. Neither aggregates nor mixing water shall be heated to exceed one hundred fifty degrees Fahrenheit (150°F). 325
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-9
3. The time elapsing from the time water is added to the mix (or the cement comes in contact with aggregate) until the concrete is deposited in place at the site of the WORK shall not exceed sixty (60) minutes when the concrete is hauled in nonagitating trucks, nor more than ninety (90) minutes when hauled in truck mixers or truck agitators.
4. The batch shall be so charged into the drum that a portion of the mixing water shall enter in advance of the cement and aggregates. The flow of water shall be uniform and all water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one-quarter (1/4) of the specified mixing time.
5. Cement shall be charged into the mixer by means that will not result in loss of cement because of the effect of wind, or in accumulation of cement on surfaces of hoppers or in other conditions which reduce or vary the required quantity of cement in the concrete mixture.
C. Transporting Mixed Concrete; Mixed Concrete or Truck Mixers:
1. Transporting of mixed concrete shall conform to ASTM C94/C94M.
2. Truck agitators shall be loaded not to exceed the manufacturer’s guaranteed capacity. They shall maintain the mixed concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass during hauling.
3. No additional mixing water shall be incorporated into the concrete during hauling or after arrival at the delivery point, unless approved by Landscape Architect. If additional water is to be incorporated into the concrete at the site, the drum shall be revolved not less than thirty (30) revolutions at mixing speed after the water is added and before discharge is commenced. One (1) addition of water at the site to adjust mix workability is permitted but the maximum water cement ratio shall not be exceeded.
4. Contractor shall furnish a water-measuring device in good working condition, mounted on each transit mix truck, for measuring the water added to the mix on the site. All water tanks on transit mix trucks shall be filled prior to being batched and arrive at the construction site one hundred percent (100%) full.
5. Each load of ready mixed concrete delivered at the job shall be accompanied by the ticket in accordance with Article Delivery, Storage, and Handling. 326
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prior to placing concrete, Contractor shall remove all debris and thoroughly dampen the surfaces that may be in contact with the concrete to be placed.
B. Contractor shall use compressed air from an air compressor to blow out construction debris and dirt at the bottom of members to be placed such as walls, beams, and columns, prior to final placement of forms that may obscure any joint. Contractor shall demonstrate to Landscape Architect that all debris, such as concrete particles, saw dust, loose tie wire, bar tags, tape, trash and dirt, have been thoroughly removed.
C. All surfaces of forms and embedded materials that have become encrusted with dried mortar or grout from concrete previously placed shall be cleaned of all such mortar or grout before the surrounding or adjacent concrete is placed.
D. No concrete shall be placed until all formwork, reinforcement, installation of parts to be embedded, bracing of forms, and preparation of surfaces involved in the placing have been reviewed by Landscape Architect.
E. Immediately before placing concrete, all surfaces upon or against which the concrete is to be placed shall be free from standing water, mud, debris, or loose materials.
F. No concrete shall be placed when form surfaces that may be in contact with the concrete, reinforcement, embedded items or sub-base is less than thirty-two degrees Fahrenheit (32°F). When the mean daily outdoor temperature is less than forty degrees Fahrenheit (40°F), the temperature of the concrete shall be maintained between fifty degrees Fahrenheit (50°F) and seventy degrees Fahrenheit (70°F) for the required curing period. When necessary, arrangements for heating, covering, insulating, or housing the concrete work shall be made in advance of placement and shall be adequate to maintain the required temperature without injury as a result of concentration of heat.
Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first twenty-four (24) hours unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide.
G. Concrete shall not be placed against forms exposed to heating unless the temperature of the forms is first cooled to less than or equal to ninety degrees Fahrenheit (≤90°F).
3.2 PLACEMENT
A. Placement shall conform to ACI 301, Chapter 8, ACI 304, ACI 306.1, ACI 305.1, and ACI 309. No concrete shall be placed in water except with the written permission of Landscape Architect. The surfaces of absorptive materials against or upon which 327
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-11
concrete is to be placed shall be moistened thoroughly so that moisture will not be drawn from the freshly placed concrete. The concrete shall be placed by equipment that will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. The stream of concrete shall not be allowed to separate by permitting it to fall freely over rods, spacers or other embedded materials.
B. Unless otherwise called out in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings, the placement lift depth of concrete in walls shall be limited to two (2) feet or less to minimize surface defects such as air voids that can form on concrete surfaces. Lift depths shall be limited to one (1) foot if, in the opinion of Landscape Architect, the quality of the finish is unacceptable at the two- (2- ) foot lift depth.
C. Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the materials and the displacement of the reinforcement.
D. Concrete shall not be dropped more than five (5) feet unless confined by closed chutes or pipes. Care shall be taken to fill each part of the form by depositing the concrete as near final position as possible. The coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the forms and worked around the reinforcement without displacing the bars. After initial set of the concrete, the forms shall not be jarred and strain shall not be placed on the ends of projecting reinforcement.
E. Where steep slopes are required, the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or be in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement.
F. Concrete shall not be pumped through aluminum alloy pipe.
G. All chutes, troughs, and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete.
3.3 CONSOLIDATION
A. Concrete vibrators for consolidating concrete shall be two and one-half inch (2-1/2") diameter “high cycle” vibrators with a frequency under load of eight thousand (8,000) to ten thousand four hundred (10,400) vibrations per minute (vpm). Concrete vibrators of lesser capacity are unacceptable for use in any part of the construction. Contractor shall have at least one standby concrete vibrator ready for use for every two (2) concrete vibrators in use during a concrete placement.
B. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated with internal vibrators as recommended in ACI 309 immediately after deposition. The concrete shall be thoroughly worked around the reinforcing steel, around embedded items and into corners of forms. Vibration shall be supplemented by spading, rodding, or forking to eliminate all honeycomb and voids around embedded items.
328
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-12
C. The vibrator shall be inserted vertically, allowing it to penetrate rapidly to the bottom of the lift and at least six (6) inches into the previous lift. The vibrator shall be held at the bottom of lift for five to fifteen (5 - 15) seconds. The vibrator shall be pulled up at a rate of about three (3) inches per second.
D. The vibrator shall be inserted so that the fields of action overlap. The field of action is approximately eight (8) times the vibrator’s head diameter. Thus for a two and one-half (2-1/2) inch diameter vibrator, the spacing of each insertion shall be approximately twenty (20) inches.
E. Vibration shall be stopped when the concrete surface takes a sheen and large air bubbles no longer escape.
F. Do not use a vibrator to move concrete horizontally.
3.4 OPENINGS AND INSERTS
A. Pipe sleeves, inserts for pipe connections, anchors, and forms for pipe holes shall be accurately placed and securely fastened to the forms in such a manner that the placing of concrete shall not alter their alignment or location. In the event that openings are inadvertently omitted or improperly placed, Landscape Architect may require the concrete to be cored at the proper location. Filling of improperly placed openings shall be done with expansive grout or dry pack or mortar applied with an accepted epoxy adhesive. The surfaces of the opening shall be roughened prior to filling.
3.5 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. At the time of concrete placement, embedded items shall be clean and free from mud, oil, and other coatings that may adversely affect bonding capacity. Aluminum embedments shall be coated with a bituminous material to prevent electrolytic action between the embedded item and reinforcing steel that results in concrete deterioration.
Embedment items shall be accurately placed and securely fastened to the forms in such a manner that the placing of concrete shall not alter their alignment or location. Contact between embedded items and reinforcing steel or tendon ducts is unacceptable and is not permitted.
3.6 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. The location of all construction joints shall be subject to the acceptance of Landscape Architect. The surface of all construction joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and all laitance and standing water removed. Clean aggregate shall be exposed by abrasive blast cleaning. Wire brushing and air water jets may be used while concrete is fresh provided results are equal to abrasive blast cleaning. Construction joints shall be keyed 329
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 03 00 00 September 2024 Concrete
030000-13
at right angle to the direction of shear. Except where otherwise shown on the Drawings, keyways shall be at least one and one-half (1-1/2) inch in depth over at least twenty five percent (25%) of the area of the section.
3.7 EVAPORATIVE RETARDANT
A. The use of an evaporative retardant is required to assist in proper placement of concrete in accordance with Section 03 29 00, Concrete Curing. Apply two (2) times; after screeding and after the first floating operation. The retardant should be applied at a rate of one (1) gallon of sprayable solution per two hundred to four hundred (200 - 400) square feet by spraying with an industrial type sprayer. If the nozzle of the sprayer becomes plugged, Contractor shall clean, or replace, the nozzle. Under no circumstances shall the retardant be used except by spraying a mist with a nozzle. The retardant shall be applied in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and precautions. In no case shall the retardant be used as a finishing agent. The use of an evaporative retardant requires review and approval by Landscape Architect.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor shall assist Owner or the concrete testing consultant as requested during the performance of quality control testing. When concrete is placed using a concrete pumper, concrete for testing will be taken from the pumper discharge hose.
END OF SECTION 03 00 00
330
334000 - 1
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 321223 September 2024 Pavement Markings and Signs
SECTION 321223
PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Section Includes
A. Furnish materials and install painted parking stalls, pavement markings, crosswalk striping.
B. Furnish and paint curbs.
C. Furnish materials and install signs and posts.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Asphalt Concrete Paving and Base – Section 321216
2. Concrete Sidewalk and Curbs – Section 321600
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 013300, SubmittalRequirements:
1. Paint product data.
2. Sign product data.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. California Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), latest edition.
B. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2 – California Building Code (CBC), latest edition.
C. American with Disabilities Act (ADA), latest edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRIPING PAINT
A. The paint to be used on striping shall be commercial quality paint and be applied in two coats to achieve the designed coverage. Thinner shall not be mixed with paint.
B. White paint shall be used on all parking stall, pavement markings and crosswalk striping.
C. Blue paint shall be used on ADA parking stalls where indicated on thedetails.
D. Red paint shall be used on curbs where indicated on the drawings.
E. Refer to Architectural drawings for color(s) of playground striping.
2.2 SIGNS
A. Accessible signs shall also comply with the applicable sections of California Title 24 331
334000 - 2
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 321223 September 2024 Pavement Markings and Signs
regulations and the ADA.
B. Signs shall be mounted at standard heights on 2” diameter steel posts set in concrete as detailed on the plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 STRIPING
A. No striping shall be started until all paving work on the entire job has been completed, and the various finished surfaces are sufficiently cured to prevent undue tracking onto new striping.
B. All stripes for parking spaces shall have a width of four inches. All widths shall be within 1/4-inch of the specified widths.
C. All lines and other shapes shall be clean and sharp as to dimensions and shall be painted in the locations shows on the plans. Ragged ends of segments, fogginess along the sides, or objectionable dribbling along the unpainted portions of the stripe shall not be permitted.
D. The finished product shall have an opaque, well painted appearance with no black or other discolorations showing through. Any smears shall be painted out with black paint to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.
E. The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to protect the paint during drying time and may be required to paint out all objectionable tracking. Appropriate traffic control necessary to insure non-tracking as well as reasonable traffic flows shall be the Contractor’sresponsibility.
F. Painted stripes shall receive two coats of paint to achieve the desired coverage.
G. No work shall be done when the pavement is appreciably damp.
3.2 SIGNS
A. Signs shall be installed in the locations shown on the plans and in accordance with the referenced standards for height, setbacks, and embedment.
B. Signs for disabled accessibility shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the California Building Code.
3.3 CLEAN UP
A. Remove all debris and stains resulting from the work of thissection.
END OF SECTION
332
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 321541 October 2024 Permeable Decomposed Granite Paving
100% Construction Documents Summary of Work
October 03, 2024 01 11 00-1
SECTION 321541
PERMEABLE DECOMPOSED GRANITE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Section includes:
Permeable Decomposed Granite (DG) Paving
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section Work included: All service, labor, materials, transportation and equipment necessary to perform the Work indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Decomposed Granite paving locations are per plan.
Compacted base depth to be per geotechnical recommendation, unless otherwise indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Comply with Section 013300- Submittal Procedures, unless otherwise indicated.
Submit product data and manufacturer’s instructions for:
1. Decomposed granite
2. Metal header
3. Geotextile fabric
Samples:
Contractor shall provide a material sample consisting of 1/2 pint container of decomposed granite (DG) to the Owner’s representative for approval prior to installation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE/FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
333
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 321541 October 2024 Permeable Decomposed Granite Paving
100% Construction Documents Summary of Work
October 03, 2024 01 11 00-1
Installer qualifications: Installer to provide evidence to indicate successful commercial installations of decomposed granite surfacing. Contact manufacturer for certified installers. If product is installed by a non-certified installer, Contractor to coordinate review of installation process by Manufacturer personnel. Failure to coordinate this oversight will void the manufacturer warranty. If the warranty is voided by the manufacturer due to lack of Contractor coordination, the Contractor will repair or replace unsatisfactory product at his or her own expense.
1.5 MOCK UP
Construct a 20-sf mock-up of the aggregate paving, including edging material and base course, at an owner-approved location, 5 days prior to installation. If approved, this mock-up will be the basis to demonstrate color, texture and standard of workmanship for the remainder of the project.
Notify the Owner’s Representative 3 days prior to placing mock up.
Obtain approval of the mock-up prior to completing aggregate paving, the mock-up may remain as part of the project.
1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Contractor shall be responsible for damages caused by his operations.
Metal Header and geotextile fabric shall be in place before installation of DG.
Scaled dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, the Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions.
Contractor shall acquaint himself with all site conditions prior to submitting bid proposal.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer’s identification.
Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
Store in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight.
Protect from damage by the elements and construction procedures.
Store at temperature above 40 degrees F.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
334
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 321541 October 2024 Permeable Decomposed Granite Paving
100% Construction Documents Summary of Work
October 03, 2024 01 11 00-1
Do not install crushed aggregate blended with Manufacturer admixture surfacing when sub-base is wet at saturated field capacity.
Do not install Manufacturer materials during rainy conditions or below 40 degrees Fahrenheit.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
The Maintenance Period begins on the day the Owner’s Representative has given notice of substantial completion and shall continue thereafter for no less than ninety (90) continuous calendar days
The Contractor shall continuously maintain and repair all involved areas of the Contract during the progress of the work an during the Maintenance Period until the Final Acceptance of the work.
The Contract completion date of the Maintenance Period will be extended, when in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, improper maintenance is evident at the termination of the scheduled Maintenance Period. The Contractor shall be responsible for additional maintenance of the work at no charge in Contract price until all of the work is completed and acceptable.
The contractor shall be responsible for maintaining adequate protection of the areas.
Damaged areas shall be repaired immediately at the Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall physically remove any and all weed growth from DG areas.
1.10 WARRANTY
Contractor shall provide warranty for performance of product. Contractor shall warranty installation of product for the time of one year from completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Decomposed granite:
Description: Shall be 3/8-inch maximum gradation, produced from naturally friable rock/granite with enough fines to produce a smooth walking surface. Materials should be free from clay lumps, organic matter and deleterious material. Blends of coarse sand and rock duct are not acceptable. Color to be natural sand/golden.
Use a single supply source for the entire quantity required.
Gradation:
335
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 321541 October 2024 Permeable Decomposed Granite Paving
100% Construction Documents Summary of Work
October 03, 2024 01 11 00-1
Sieve Sizes % Passing
3/8” 100
#4 85-100
#8 70-80
#16 50-65
#30 40-50
#50 25-35
#100 15-25
#200 10-15
Geotextile Fabric:
Description: Product: Non-woven geotextile with 3 oz/sy minimum weight.
Product: 140 N (135 gal/ min flow rate)
Aggregate Base
Class II Permeable Base Rock, see aggregate base specification
EXCESS MATERIAL
Provide Owner with excess materials for use in future maintenance- provide at minimum 1/2 yard of aggregate in 50 lb sacks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for product installation.
Layout decomposed granite paved areas(DG) per Drawings. Owner’s Representative to approve layout prior to excavation.
Do not proceed with installation of DG until all walls, curbs, headers, and paving and utility 336
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 321541 October 2024 Permeable Decomposed Granite Paving
100% Construction Documents Summary of Work
October 03, 2024 01 11 00-1
work in the area has been installed.
Excavate and compact the subgrade to depths, slopes and widths as shown on the Drawings.
Do not over- excavate compacted subgrades of adjacent pavement or structures.
Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and compacted as required. Subgrade elevations slope parallel to the finished grade and/or as shown on the Drawings to provide positive drainage.
Set metal landscape edging per drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. Headers shall be set and staked to provide tight, clean lines, both vertically and horizontally. Set top of steel edging to provide positive drainage.
Install geotextile fabric per drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
Compact per manufacturer recommendations. Do not use a vibratory plate. Roll and compact within 3 to 48 hours after placement. Product can be compacted up to 48 hours afterplacement.
Upon final compaction – finished surface of walkway shall be smooth, uniform, and solid. There shall be no evidence of chipping or cracking. Cured and compacted pathway shall be form throughout profile with no spongy areas. Loose material will not be present on the surface after installation but may appear after use and according to environmental conditions. Pathway should remain stable underneath the loose granite on top. It is a natural looking pathway, yet stable throughout. Any significant irregularities in path surface shall be repaired to the uniformity of entire installation.
Saw Cut/trowel/install expansion joints every 12’ and at every engineered stress area (vertical change)
Completed finished surface shall be consistent quality and free of deleterious materials such as organic materials, stones and loose material. Surface shall not have depressions or humps greater than 1/4" in ten feet. Cold joints, if any, should be inconspicuous.
Protect adjacent walls, walks and utilities from damage or staining by DG. Any damage to paving or architectural work caused by DG installation shall be repaired by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.
3.3 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE
The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying Owner’s Representative 72 hours (3 working days) in advance for the following observations:
Layout of areas to receive DG
Preparation of subgrade, prior to placing geotextile fabric Upon final compaction
337
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 321541 October 2024 Permeable Decomposed Granite Paving
100% Construction Documents Summary of Work
October 03, 2024 01 11 00-1
3.4 CLEAN-UP
As project progresses, Contractor shall maintain all areas in a neat manner and remove unsightly debris as necessary. After completion of project, Contractor shall remove all debris and containers used in accomplishing work, and clear paving and planting areas of DG.
END OF SECTION
338
SpectraPour Poured-in-Place Specification
SpectraTurf
555 South Promenade Avenue #103
Corona, CA 92879
Phone: (951) 736-3579
Fax: (951) 734-3630
E-mail: [email protected]
www.spectraturf.com
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: SpectraPour Poured-in-Place Playground Surfacing System.
B. Related Sections: Sitework Sections: Materials and Methods, Excavation, Asphalt Paving, Concrete Paving, Sub-Drainage, Storm Drainage, Fencing, Playground Equipment and Structures.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension.
2. ASTM D624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.
3. ASTM D2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.
4. ASTM D2859 Standard Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials.
5. ASTM E303 Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester.
6. ASTM F1292 Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment.
339
7. ASTM F1951 Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Provide a 2 layer rubber-urethane playground surfacing system which has been designed, manufactured and installed to meet the following criteria:
1. Shock Attenuation (ASTM F1292):
a. Gmax: Less than 200.
b. Head Injury Criteria: Less than 1000.
2. Flammability (ASTM D2859): Pass.
3. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 60 psi (413 kPa).
4. Tear Resistance (ASTM D624): 140%.
5. Water Permeability: 0.4 gal/yd2/second.
6. Accessibility: Comply with requirements of ASTM F1951.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.
C. Verification Samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard verification samples of 6" x 6" minimum.
D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Certificate of qualifications of the playground surfacing installer.
E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Warranty documents specified herein.
340
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Utilize an installer approved and trained by the manufacturer of the playground surfacing system or a direct employee of the manufacturer’s installation division, having experience with other projects of the scope and scale of the work described in this section.
B. Certifications: Certification by manufacturer that installer is an approved applicator of the playground surfacing system.
C. International Play Equipment Manufacturers Association (IPEMA) certified.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.
B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and a maximum temperature of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C).
1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Install surfacing system when minimum ambient temperature is 40 degrees F (1 degree C) and maximum ambient temperature is 95 degrees F (32 degrees C). Exception to the temperature requirements can be made by the manufacturer of the surfacing system. Do not install in steady or heavy rain.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.
B. Proper drainage is critical to the longevity of the SpectraPour Poured-in-Place surfacing system. Inadequate drainage will cause premature breakdown of the poured system in affected areas; and void the warranty.
1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of completion of work. 341
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SPECTRAPOUR PLAYGROUND SURFACING SYSTEM
A. Manufacturer: SpectraTurf, Inc.
1. Contact: 555 South Promenade Avenue, #103, Corona, CA 92879; Telephone: (800) 875-5788; Fax: (951) 734-3630;
E-mail: [email protected] website: http://www.spectraturf.com.
B. Proprietary Products/Systems. SpectraPour Poured-in-place playground surfacing system, including the following:
1. SpectraPour Poured-In-Place Primer:
a. Material: Urethane.
2. SpectraPour Poured-in-Place Basemat:
a. Material: 100% recycled blend of shredded SBR (styrene butadiene rubber) and urethane.
The type of playground equipment determines the required basemat thickness, and the basemat thickness may be different at various locations on the playground site. Depending on ASTM F1292 requirements for critical fall height (5’, 6’, 7’, 8’, 10’, or 12’), select basemat thickness from options provided in subparagraph below ( 1-1/2", 2”, 2 1/2", 3", 4" or 4 1/2" respectively). Specify project requirements below and coordinate with working drawings.
b. Basemat Thickness: [1 1/2"] [2"] [2 1/2"] [3"] [4"] [4 1/2"]
3. SpectraPour Poured-In-Place Top Surface:
a. Material: Blend of recycled EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer) rubber and aromatic or aliphatic urethane binder.
b. Top Surface Thickness: minimum 1/2", maximum 5/8".
c. Color: [Terra Cotta] [Bright Red] [Orange] [Bright Yellow] [Earth Yellow] [Beige] [Sand] [Eggshell] [Brown] [Bright Green] [Army Green] [Green] [Teal] [Sky Blue] [Light Purple] [Dark Purple] [Gray] [Charcoal] [Black] [Custom color mix (specify requirements)].
342
Aliphatic urethane is recommended for the following colors: Bright Yellow, Bright Green, Teal, Bright Red, Orange, Light Purple, Dark Purple, Sky Blue, Sand & Eggshell. Standard aromatic binder “yellows” slightly upon exposure to ultraviolet rays. Most of this thin layer of urethane wears off with foot traffic and weathering typically within two to six months. This characteristic applies industry-wide.
The following colors are recommended for indoor use only due to their high tendency for fading: Bright Yellow, Bright Red, Orange, Light Purple, Dark Purple.
d. Dry Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): 1.0. e. Wet Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): 0.9. f. Dry Skid Resistance (ASTM E303): 89.
g. Wet Skid Resistance (ASTM E303): 57.
2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.
2.03 MIXES
A. Required mix proportions by weight:
1. Basemat: 16% urethane (as ratio: 16% urethane divided by 84% rubber). 16% urethane, 84% rubber (based on entire rubber & urethane mix).
2. Top Surface: 22% urethane (ratio: 22% urethane divided by 78% rubber). 22% urethane, 78% rubber (based on entire rubber & urethane mix).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the playground surfacing manufacturer.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Substrate preparation must be in accordance with surfacing manufacturer’s specification. New asphalt must be fully cured – up to 30 days. New concrete must be fully cured – up to 7 days.
343
B. Proper drainage is critical to the longevity of the SpectraPour Poured-in-Place surfacing system. Inadequate drainage will cause premature breakdown of the poured system in affected areas; and void the warranty.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Using a brush or short nap roller, apply primer to the substrate perimeter and any adjacent vertical barriers such as playground equipment support legs, curbs or slabs that will contact the surfacing system at the rate of 300 ft2/gal.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Do not proceed with playground surfacing installation until all applicable site work, including substrate preparation, fencing, playground equipment installation and other relevant work, has been completed.
B. Basemat Installation:
1. Using screeds and hand trowels, install the basemat at a consistent density of 29 pounds, 1 ounce per cubic foot to the specified thickness.
2. Allow basemat to cure for sufficient time so that indentations are not left in the basemat from applicator foot traffic or equipment.
3. Do not allow foot traffic or use of the basemat surface until it is sufficiently cured.
C. Primer Application: Using a brush or short nap roller, apply primer to the basemat perimeter and any adjacent vertical barriers such as playground equipment support legs, curbs or slabs that will contact the surfacing system at the rate of 300 ft2/gal (7.5 m2/L).
D. Top Surface Installation:
1. Using a hand trowel, install top surface at a consistent density of 58 pounds, 9 ounces per cubic foot to a nominal thickness of 1/2".
2. Allow top surface to cure for a minimum of 48 hours for aromatic resin / 72 hours for aliphatic resin.
3. At the end of the minimum curing period, verify that the top surface is sufficiently dry and firm to allow foot traffic and use without damage to the surface.
4. Do not allow foot traffic or use of the surface until it is sufficiently cured. 344
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect the installed playground surface from damage resulting from subsequent construction activity on the site.
345
Playground Protective
Surfacing Submittal
346
Advancing Fun Play
& Healthy Recreation
for Every Age and All
Abilities.
347
SpectraPour Supreme:
High Density Rubber Playground Surfacing
6 | 800.875.5788 • spectraturf.com Visit spectraturf.com for product specifications, technical data, and installation details. | 7 SpectraPour Supreme safety playground surfacing
is the highest quality product on the market, using
a higher density, smaller particle size (0.5-1.5 mm
Spectra TPV granule) in the top layer with our high
quality UV stable aliphatic binder, all over a shockabsorbing rubber base pad. This increases the playground surface's expected life and decreases
overall maintenance costs.
SpectraPour Supreme is mixed on-site. This gives you
flexibility in the colors, designs, and shapes added
to your safety surface. It can also be used to provide
ADA access to existing playgrounds, to retrofit
existing play areas, or to fill entire new playgrounds
with quality rubber surfacing that stays in place
during use.
SpectraPour Supreme is the safety playground
surface system of choice for critical fall areas in areas known for extreme weather conditions, sunshine, and
outdoor activities.
SpectraPour Supreme System Data
– 2-layer system – mixed, poured & troweled on-site
• Base layer of shock-absorbing rubber material
• Half-inch-thick wearing surface of rubber granules
– Available in 4 standard colors (other TPV colors available as custom colors, with 6-8 week lead-time)
– Create custom shapes and designs
– Porous system may be installed over Type 2 road base, concrete, or asphalt surfaces
– Typically used outdoors
– Conforms to ADA requirements
– IPEMA Certified
• ASTM F1292 for head impact protection
• ASTM F1951 for wheelchair accessibility
– Available for LEED® credits
348
555 S Promenade Ave, Suite 103, Corona, CA 92879 Ph: 800-875-5788 Fax: 951-734-3630 www.spectraturf.com
SPECTRATURF COLOR CHART
AVAILABLE IN 1-4mm & 0.5-1.5mm GRANULE SIZES
Standard Colors
Premium Colors
Colors may differ slightly from above due to photo reproducƟon process.
All 0.5-1.5 Granule Size’s must use AliphaƟc Binder. AliphaƟc binder HIGHLY recommended for all Lighter shades of color in 1-4mm Granule Size.
All Premium Colors have addiƟonal costs and potenƟal long lead Ɵmes Some Premium Colors may have minimum order requirements SEPTEMBER 2023
Shamrock Green Cobalt Blue Inferno Red Sandstone Beige Sky Blue Pewter Grey Jet Black
Ash Grey Charcoal Grey Ivy Green Lime Green Agave Teal Chestnut Brown Honey Gold Canary Yellow Citrus Orange ScarleƩ Red Cherry Red Raspberry Pink Lilac Purple Plum Purple Sapphire Blue Aquamarine Pampus Ivory Sand 349
H3168
Product Data Sheet
H3168 is a high-performance 100% solids, architectural-grade aliphatic polyurethane resin binder. Used in a variety of applications, H3168 may be used in poured-in-place playground surfacing, jogging paths and athletic court surfacing. Exhibiting superior bonding strength, H3168 is also a favorite for splash pads and waterplay use.
H3168 has a crystal-clear consistency which makes it a popular upgrade over standard resin binders, especially useful when mixed with lighter color EPDM rubber granules - which could be tinted by standard MDI based aromatic polyurethane binders. H3168 may also be used to increase seam strength on systems requiring color changes, when standard aromatic polyurethane resin binders are being used.
H3168 is an upgrade over the standard aromatic binder used for playgrounds, and as such, must be specified on projects.
Specifications
Appearance Water clear viscous fluid % Free NCO 6.8-7.2% Tensile Strength 3,000 +/- psi ASTM D412 % Solids by weight >99% Enlongation 500 +/- 50% ASTM D412 Boiling Range 401 F
Die C Tear 260 +/- 26 pli ASTM D624 Evaporation Rate Not applicable Split Tear 55 +/- pli Solubility in water Reacts
Density 8.5 – 8.7 lbs / gal Flash point 335 F Method PMCC Viscosity 3,500 – 4,000 cps Vapor Density (Air=1) Heavier than air Flammability limits in air by volume Lower - n/a Upper - n/a Specific Gravity (H20 = 1) 1.03 555 S. Promenade Ave #103, Corona, CA 92879
(800) 875-5788 (951) 734-3630 (fax) www.spectraturf.com 350
351
SPECTRAPOUR: BEVEL CUT FOR WEAR LAYER
SPECTRAPOUR POUR-IN-PLACE
SPECTRATURF
555 SOUTH PROMENADE AVE.,
Ste. 103, CORONA, CA 92879
TOLL FREE: 1-800-875-5788
www.spectraturf.com
NOTES:
1. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS.
2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING.
3. THIS DRAWING IS INTENDED FOR USE BY ARCHITECTS, ENGINEERS, CONTRACTORS, CONSULTANTS AND DESIGN PROFESSIONALS FOR PLANNING PURPOSES ONLY. THIS DRAWING MAY NOT BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
4. ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN WAS CURRENT AT THE TIME OF DEVELOPMENT BUT MUST BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE PRODUCT MANUFACTURER TO BE CONSIDERED ACCURATE.
5. CONTRACTOR'S NOTE: FOR PRODUCT AND COMPANY INFORMATION VISIT www.CADdetails.com/info AND ENTER REFERENCE NUMBER 092-010
PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT ©2019 CADDETAILS.COM LTD. CADdetails.com 092-010 REVISION DATE 29/05/2019
SBR CUSHION LAYER
1/2" MINIMUM SPECTRAPOUR
COURSE, FIRST COLOR
PRIME WITH URETHANE PRIMER
1/2" MINIMUM SPECTRAPOUR
WEAR COURSE, SECOND
COLOR
352
MAINTENANCE GUIDELINES
Addendum A (1 of 2)
The following maintenance guidelines are hereby noted as an attachment to the SpectraTurf Statement of Warranty and are so noted in the report of Warranty as Addendum A.
SpectraTurf is under no obligation to repair or replace any of its Playground safety Surfacing Systems that are damaged by improper maintenance; vandalism; product misuse, abuse or alteration; improper drainage; normal wear and tear; damage from sharp objects; unapproved cleaning materials; or Acts of God.
Recommended Monthly Maintenance:
1. Power Wash the entire Playground Safety Surfacing to remove surface dirt, food, drink, sand, and various contaminants. Use an air blower to remove loose debris before Power Washing the Playground Safety Surface.
2. On heavily stained isolated areas, after wetting, apply a sufficient amount of all‐purpose cleaner and scrub with a 10” minimum bristle brush. Rinse thoroughly and repeat as necessary. Perform hand cleaning early in the morning or late afternoon so that the cleanser will have time to work before evaporating in high temperature conditions.
3. Power Washing can be performed any time during the day. Please refer to Addendum A (2 of 2) for illustrated procedures for power washing the Playground Safety Surfacing.
Other Recommended Maintenance:
1. Every 2 to 3 years, depending upon the amount of use the play area receives, an application (roll coat) of aliphatic resin should be applied to the Playground Safety Surfacing. Aliphatic resin should be applied by rollers (NOT air sprayers) at a rate of approx. 60 sq ft per gallon over the entire wear layer of the Playground Safety Surfacing and allowed to cure for a minimum 72 hours before use of the play area.
NEVER USE A STEEL OR HARD PLASTIC BRUSH ON MANUAL OR ELECTRIC CLEANING UNITS.
CONSULT WITH SPECTRATURF AT (800) 875‐5788 BEOFRE COMMENCING ANY CLEANING
OPERATION THAT MAY BE HARMFUL TO THE PLAYGROUND SURFACING SYSTEM 353
MAINTENANCE GUIDELINES
555 S. Promenade Ave. #103, Corona, CA 92879-1352
(951) 736-3579 Fax (951) 734-3630 www.spectraturf.com CA #854429 354
MAINTENANCE GUIDELINES
Addendum A (1 of 2)
The following maintenance guidelines are hereby noted as an attachment to the SpectraTurf Statement of Warranty and are so noted in the report of Warranty as Addendum A.
SpectraTurf is under no obligation to repair or replace any of its Playground safety Surfacing Systems that are damaged by improper maintenance; vandalism; product misuse, abuse or alteration; improper drainage; normal wear and tear; damage from sharp objects; unapproved cleaning materials; or Acts of God.
Recommended Monthly Maintenance:
1. Power Wash the entire Playground Safety Surfacing to remove surface dirt, food, drink, sand, and various contaminants. Use an air blower to remove loose debris before Power Washing the Playground Safety Surface.
2. On heavily stained isolated areas, after wetting, apply a sufficient amount of all‐purpose cleaner and scrub with a 10” minimum bristle brush. Rinse thoroughly and repeat as necessary. Perform hand cleaning early in the morning or late afternoon so that the cleanser will have time to work before evaporating in high temperature conditions.
3. Power Washing can be performed any time during the day. Please refer to Addendum A (2 of 2) for illustrated procedures for power washing the Playground Safety Surfacing.
Other Recommended Maintenance:
1. Every 2 to 3 years, depending upon the amount of use the play area receives, an application (roll coat) of aliphatic resin should be applied to the Playground Safety Surfacing. Aliphatic resin should be applied by rollers (NOT air sprayers) at a rate of approx. 60 sq ft per gallon over the entire wear layer of the Playground Safety Surfacing and allowed to cure for a minimum 72 hours before use of the play area.
NEVER USE A STEEL OR HARD PLASTIC BRUSH ON MANUAL OR ELECTRIC CLEANING UNITS.
CONSULT WITH SPECTRATURF AT (800) 875‐5788 BEOFRE COMMENCING ANY CLEANING
OPERATION THAT MAY BE HARMFUL TO THE PLAYGROUND SURFACING SYSTEM 355
SpectraTop Specification
SpectraTurf
555 South Promenade Avenue #103
Corona, CA 92879
Phone: (951) 736-3579
Fax: (951) 734-3630
E-mail: [email protected]
www.spectraturf.com
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: SpectraTop Surfacing System for recreational and high traffic applications
Specifier Note: Site materials and methods, drainage, playground equipment, fencing, substrate preparation and similar work is provided by other contractors and is described in other sections. Consult manufacturer for specific substrate preparation requirements. Edit, retain or delete paragraph below to suit project requirements and specifier practice.
B. Related Sections: Sitework Sections: Materials and Methods, Excavation, Asphalt Paving, Concrete Paving, Sub-Drainage, Storm Drainage, Fencing, Playground Equipment and Structures.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension.
356
2. ASTM D624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.
3. ASTM D2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.
4. ASTM D2859 Standard Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials.
5. ASTM E303 Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester.
6. ASTM F1951 Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Provide a 1 layer rubber-urethane playground surfacing system which has been designed, manufactured and installed to meet the following criteria:
1. Flammability (ASTM D2859): Pass.
2. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 60 psi (413 kPa).
3. Tear Resistance (ASTM D624): 140%.
4. Water Permeability: 0.4 gal/yd2/second.
5. Accessibility: Comply with requirements of ASTM F1951.
Specifier Note: Article below includes submittal of relevant data to be furnished by Contractor before, during or after construction. Coordinate this article with Architect’s and Contractor’s duties and responsibilities in Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
357
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.
C. Verification Samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard verification samples of 6" x 6" minimum.
D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Certificate of qualifications of the playground surfacing installer.
E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Warranty documents specified herein.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Utilize an installer approved and trained by the manufacturer of the playground surfacing system or a direct employee of the manufacturer’s installation division, having experience with other projects of the scope and scale of the work described in this section.
B. Certifications: Certification by manufacturer that installer is an approved applicator of the playground surfacing system.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.
B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and a maximum temperature of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). 358
1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Install surfacing system when minimum ambient temperature is 40 degrees F (1 degree C) and maximum ambient temperature is 95 degrees F (32 degrees C). Exception to the temperature requirements can be made by the manufacturer of the surfacing system. Do not install in steady or heavy rain.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.
B. Proper drainage is critical to the longevity of the SpectraTop surfacing system.
Inadequate drainage will cause premature breakdown of the poured system in affected areas; and void the warranty.
Specifier Note: Coordinate subparagraph below with manufacturer’s warranty requirements.
1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of completion of work. 359
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SPECTRATOP SURFACING SYSTEM
A. Manufacturer: Spectra Systems, Inc. dba SpectraTurf
1. Contact: 555 South Promenade Avenue, #103, Corona, CA 92879; Telephone: (800) 875-5788; Fax: (951) 734-3630;
E-mail: [email protected] website: http://www.spectraturf.com.
B. Proprietary Products/Systems. SpectraTop surfacing system, including the following:
1. SpectraTop Primer:
a. Material: Urethane.
2. SpectraTop Surface:
a. Material: Blend of recycled EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer) rubber and urethane (aromatic or aliphatic)
b. Thickness: minimum 1/2", maximum 5/8".
c. Color: [Terra Cotta] [Bright Red] [Orange] [Bright Yellow] [Mustard Yellow] [Beige] [Sand] [Eggshell] [Brown] [Bright Green] [Army Green] [Green] [Teal] [Sky Blue] [Light Purple] [Dark Purple] [Gray] [Charcoal] [Black] [Custom color mix (specify requirements)].
Specifier Note: Aliphatic urethane is recommended for the following colors: Bright Yellow, Bright Green, Teal, Bright Red, Orange, Light Purple, Dark Purple, Sky Blue, Sand & Eggshell. Standard aromatic binder “yellows” slightly upon exposure to ultraviolet rays. Most of this thin layer of urethane wears off with foot traffic and weathering typically within two to six months. This characteristic applies industry-wide.
Specifier Note: The following colors are recommended for indoor use only due to their high tendency for fading: Bright Yellow, Bright Red, Orange, Light Purple, Dark Purple. 360
d. Dry Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): 1.0. e. Wet Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): 0.9. f. Dry Skid Resistance (ASTM E303): 89.
g. Wet Skid Resistance (ASTM E303): 57.
2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.
2.03 MIXES
A. Required mix proportions by weight:
a. Top Surface: 20 - 22% urethane (ratio: 18% urethane divided by 82% rubber). 18% urethane, 82% rubber (based on entire rubber & urethane mix).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the playground surfacing manufacturer.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Substrate preparation must be in accordance with surfacing manufacturer’s specification. New asphalt must be fully cured – up to 30 days. New concrete must be fully cured – up to 7 days.
361
B. Proper drainage is critical to the longevity of the SpectraTop surfacing system.
Inadequate drainage will cause premature breakdown of the poured system in affected areas; and void the warranty. The entire area shall be 1.5% Min-2% Max slope for drainage and ADA compliance. Note: Spectraturf does not provide drainage systems.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Using a brush or short nap roller, apply primer to the substrate perimeter and any adjacent vertical barriers such as playground equipment support legs, curbs or slabs that will contact the surfacing system at the rate of 300 ft2/gal.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Do not proceed with playground surfacing installation until all applicable site work, including substrate preparation, fencing, playground equipment installation and other relevant work, has been completed.
B. Primer Application: Using a brush or short nap roller, apply primer to the basemat perimeter and any adjacent vertical barriers such as playground equipment support legs, curbs or slabs that will contact the surfacing system at the rate of 300 ft2/gal (7.5 m2/L).
C. Surface Installation:
1. Using a hand trowel, install top surface at a consistent density of 58 pounds, 9 ounces per cubic foot to a nominal thickness of 1/2".
2. Allow top surface to cure for a minimum of 72 hours for aliphatic resin.
3. At the end of the minimum curing period, verify that the top surface is sufficiently dry and firm to allow foot traffic and use without damage to the surface.
4. Do not allow foot traffic or use of the surface until it is sufficiently cured.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect the installed playground surface from damage resulting from subsequent construction activity on the site.
362
Playground Protective
Surfacing Submittal
363
Advancing Fun Play
& Healthy Recreation
for Every Age and All
Abilities.
364
SpectraPour safety playground surfacing has
been our flagship poured-in-place system since its
inception in 1986. SpectraPour has been used on
thousands of projects throughout the US at parks,
schools, daycare centers, and other applications
requiring a high quality, poured rubber safety surface.
SpectraPour’s pour-in-place installation and wide
variety of colors allows us to create intricate and
visually pleasing designs. This enhances any gathering
space – hotel play areas, playgrounds, shopping
centers, community centers – into a welcoming and
friendly location. SpectraPour’s shock-absorbing
qualities make it ideal for safety surfaces at critical fall heights as well as comfortable for any walking or
standing application.
SpectraPour is mixed on-site, and may be used to
provide ADA access to existing playgrounds, to retrofit existing play areas, or to fill entire new playgrounds
with quality rubber surfacing that stays in place
during use.
SpectraPour System Data
– 2-layer system – mixed, poured & troweled on-site
• Base layer of shock-absorbing rubber material
• Half-inch-thick wearing surface of rubber granules
– Available in 20 colors (colors can be mixed)
– Create custom shapes and designs
– Porous system may be installed over Type 2 road base, concrete, or asphalt surfaces
– Typically used outdoors
– Conforms to ADA requirements
– IPEMA Certified
• ASTM F1292 for head impact protection
• ASTM F1951 for wheelchair accessibility
– Available for LEED® credits
SpectraPour:
Pour-in-Place Rubber Playground Surfacing
4 | 800.875.5788 • spectraturf.com Visit spectraturf.com for product specifications, technical data, and installation details. | 5 365
IPEMA ASTM F1292-13 (SECTION 4.2) CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE ISSUE DATE: December 18, 2017
Requested By: Alex Stout
Project: Sample
In the interest of public playground safety, IPEMA provides a thirdparty certification service whereby TÜV SÜD America validates a manufacturer's certification of conformance to ASTM F129213 Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surfacing Materials Within the Use Zone of Playground Equipment Standard, Section 4.2, Performance Criterion.
The manufacturers listed below have received written validation from TÜV SÜD America that the products listed conform with the requirements of ASTM F1292-13, Section 4.2.
The validation is made by testing at the specified fall height rating requested by the manufacturer, based upon its experience and knowledge of its products, instead of the "critical fall height" used in ASTM F129213. TÜV SÜD America validates that the impact attenuating performance criterion specified by ASTM F129213 (Section 4.2) has been met or exceeded.
PRODUCT PRODUCT LINE THK/HT MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION
SP5 SpectraPour Safety Surfacing 2" / 5' SpectraTurf SpectraPour SP6 SpectraPour Safety Surfacing 2.5" / 6' SpectraTurf SpectraPour SP7 SpectraPour Safety Surfacing 3" / 7' SpectraTurf SpectraPour SP8 SpectraPour Safety Surfacing 3.5" / 8' SpectraTurf SpectraPour SP10 SpectraPour Safety Surfacing 4.25" / 10' SpectraTurf SpectraPour SP12 SpectraPour Safety Surfacing 5" / 12' SpectraTurf SpectraPour 366
555 S Promenade Ave, Suite 103, Corona, CA 92879 Ph: 800-875-5788 Fax: 951-734-3630 www.spectraturf.com
SPECTRATURF COLOR CHART
AVAILABLE IN 1-4mm & 0.5-1.5mm GRANULE SIZES
Standard Colors
Premium Colors
Colors may differ slightly from above due to photo reproducƟon process.
All 0.5-1.5 Granule Size’s must use AliphaƟc Binder. AliphaƟc binder HIGHLY recommended for all Lighter shades of color in 1-4mm Granule Size.
All Premium Colors have addiƟonal costs and potenƟal long lead Ɵmes Some Premium Colors may have minimum order requirements SEPTEMBER 2023
Shamrock Green Cobalt Blue Inferno Red Sandstone Beige Sky Blue Pewter Grey Jet Black
Ash Grey Charcoal Grey Ivy Green Lime Green Agave Teal Chestnut Brown Honey Gold Canary Yellow Citrus Orange ScarleƩ Red Cherry Red Raspberry Pink Lilac Purple Plum Purple Sapphire Blue Aquamarine Pampus Ivory Sand 367
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PIP BUFFINGS BLEND
Packaging
50LB Bags or 2,000LB Sacks
√ Non Toxic: Certified Safe by UC Berkeley
and The Corporation for Manufacturing
Excellence
√ Environmentally Friendly: reduces the
number of waste tires disposed in land fills
√ Locally Produced: Reduces green house
gas emissions through reduced
transportation and reduces freight costs.
√ Quality: Consistent quality delivered
through state of art recycling process
Benefits
PIP BUFFINGS BLEND is used in the construction of the cushion layer in unitary safety surfacing systems as well as the bottom layer in factory molded rubber safety tiles.
PIP BUFFINGS BLEND consists of these materials: recycled styrene butadiene rubber (SBR), and/or cryogenic crumb rubber, and/or pre-consumer post-industrial reclaimed scrap rubber adhered with a 100% solids polyurethane binder to form a resilient porous material.
PIP BUFFINGS BLEND is produced through a state of the art recycling process that removes contaminants and produces a mixture of controlled sizes that are ideal for field manufactured poured in place rubber surfac-ing as well as compression molded rubber tiles produced in a factory environment. - 368
SpectraPour Binder
Product Data Sheet
SpectraPour Binder is a high-performance 100% solids, aromatic, single component, moisture-curing, MDI based prepolymer polyurethane resin binder designed for use with rubber granules. It is specifically designed for application of poured-in-place playground and other sports surfacing using appropriate recycled rubber and EPDM granules. SpectraPour Binder does not support fungal growth.
SpectraPour Binder requires surface and ambient temperatures must be at least 45 deg. F. Do not apply over wet or damp surface. Do not mix or apply when rain is imminent or falling. Substrate must be free of dust, oil and grease. Ambient temperature and relative humidity are critical to product reaction. Consult SpectraTurf whenever conditions of very high or very low temperatures and/or very high or low relative humidity are present of anticipated.
Specifications
Appearance Amber Visual Free NCO Content 7.5 / 8.5%
Density approx. 1.1 g.cm3 @ 20 degrees C % Solids by weight >99% Viscosity , 25 deg. C approx. 2,000 / 2,300 PH value n/a Setting point -18 degrees C Evaporation Rate Not applicable Initial Boiling Point 260 degrees Vapor Density (Air=1) Heavier than air Solubility in water Reacts Explosive limits n/a
Flash point > 200 degrees C Thermal decomposition n/a
Flammability limits in air by volume Lower - n/a Upper - n/a Specific Gravity (H20 = 1) 1.00-1.102 555 S. Promenade Ave., #103, Corona, CA 92879
(800) 875-5788 (951) 734-3630 (fax) www.spectraturf.com
TOP & BOTTOM LAYERS
369
SPECTRAPOUR: STANDARD CURB - FLUSH TO CONCRETE CURB OR WALL
SPECTRAPOUR POUR-IN-PLACE
SPECTRATURF
555 S. PROMENADE AVE., #103
CORONA, CA 92879
TOLL FREE: 1-800-875-5788
www.spectraturf.com
NOTES:
1. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS.
2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING.
3. THIS DRAWING IS INTENDED FOR USE BY ARCHITECTS, ENGINEERS, CONTRACTORS, CONSULTANTS AND DESIGN PROFESSIONALS FOR PLANNING PURPOSES ONLY. THIS DRAWING MAY NOT BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
4. ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN WAS CURRENT AT THE TIME OF DEVELOPMENT BUT MUST BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE PRODUCT MANUFACTURER TO BE CONSIDERED ACCURATE.
5. CONTRACTOR'S NOTE: FOR PRODUCT AND COMPANY INFORMATION VISIT www.CADdetails.com/info AND ENTER REFERENCE NUMBER 092-030
PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT ©2019 CADDETAILS.COM LTD. CADdetails.com 092-030 REVISION DATE 29/05/2019
SECTION
SPECTRAPOUR
SUB-BASE
(SEE SPECIFICATIONS
FOR OPTIONS)
CONCRETE CURB
(NOT SPECTRA TURF)
370
SPECTRAPOUR: INSTALLATION AT POST LOCATIONS
SPECTRAPOUR POUR-IN-PLACE
SPECTRATURF
555 S. PROMENADE AVE., #103
CORONA, CA 92879
TOLL FREE: 1-800-875-5788
www.spectraturf.com
NOTES:
1. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS.
2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING.
3. THIS DRAWING IS INTENDED FOR USE BY ARCHITECTS, ENGINEERS, CONTRACTORS, CONSULTANTS AND DESIGN PROFESSIONALS FOR PLANNING PURPOSES ONLY. THIS DRAWING MAY NOT BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
4. ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN WAS CURRENT AT THE TIME OF DEVELOPMENT BUT MUST BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE PRODUCT MANUFACTURER TO BE CONSIDERED ACCURATE.
5. CONTRACTOR'S NOTE: FOR PRODUCT AND COMPANY INFORMATION VISIT www.CADdetails.com/info AND ENTER REFERENCE NUMBER 092-011
PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT ©2019 CADDETAILS.COM LTD. CADdetails.com 092-011 REVISION DATE 29/05/2019
EXISTING COMPACTED NATIVE SOIL
SPECIFICATIONS
SUB-BASE OPTIONS:
COMPACTED AGGREGATE: 4" MINIMUM THICKNESS OF TYPE II ROAD BASE COMPACTED TO 95% IN 2" WATERED LIFTS.
CONCRETE: 4" MINIMUM THICKNESS OF MINIMUM 2500 PSI. MUST CURE FOR 7 DAYS* PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF SAFETY SURFACING. (REQUIRES DRAINAGE DESIGN)
ASPHALT: 3" MINIMUM THICKNESS MUST CURE A MINIMUM OF 14 DAYS*, PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF SAFETY SURFACING. (REQUIRES
DRAINAGE DESIGN)
* MUST CURE MINIMUM OF 28 DAYS FOR WEAR LAYER ONLY INSTALLATIONS
CONCRETE FOOTING
SPECTRAPOUR - 1/2" MINIMUM THICKNESS
(MATERIAL MAY VARY BASED ON
REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFIED SYSTEM)
SBR "CUSHION" LAYER (DEPTHS VARY BASED
ON THE CRITICAL FALL HEIGHT
REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFIED SYSTEM) 1.5" THICKENED SURFACE AT 45°
BEVEL AGAINST POST
SUB-BASE
(SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPTIONS)
371
SPECTRAPOUR: TURNDOWN TO LOOSE FILL (45 DEGREE EDGE TYPICAL)
SPECTRAPOUR POUR-IN-PLACE
SPECTRATURF
555 S. PROMENADE AVE., #103
CORONA, CA 92879
TOLL FREE: 1-800-875-5788
www.spectraturf.com
NOTES:
1. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS.
2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING.
3. THIS DRAWING IS INTENDED FOR USE BY ARCHITECTS, ENGINEERS, CONTRACTORS, CONSULTANTS AND DESIGN PROFESSIONALS FOR PLANNING PURPOSES ONLY. THIS DRAWING MAY NOT BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
4. ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN WAS CURRENT AT THE TIME OF DEVELOPMENT BUT MUST BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE PRODUCT MANUFACTURER TO BE CONSIDERED ACCURATE.
5. CONTRACTOR'S NOTE: FOR PRODUCT AND COMPANY INFORMATION VISIT www.CADdetails.com/info AND ENTER REFERENCE NUMBER 092-031
PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT ©2019 CADDETAILS.COM LTD. CADdetails.com 092-031 REVISION DATE 29/05/2019
SECTION
SPECTRAPOUR
SUB-BASE
(SEE SPECIFICATIONS
FOR OPTIONS)
45° EDGE TYPICAL
CONCRETE CURB
(NOT SPECTRATURF)
LOOSE FILL
SAND/WOOD CHIP
372
SPECTRAPOUR: BEVEL CUT FOR WEAR LAYER
SPECTRAPOUR POUR-IN-PLACE
SPECTRATURF
555 SOUTH PROMENADE AVE.,
Ste. 103, CORONA, CA 92879
TOLL FREE: 1-800-875-5788
www.spectraturf.com
NOTES:
1. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS.
2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING.
3. THIS DRAWING IS INTENDED FOR USE BY ARCHITECTS, ENGINEERS, CONTRACTORS, CONSULTANTS AND DESIGN PROFESSIONALS FOR PLANNING PURPOSES ONLY. THIS DRAWING MAY NOT BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
4. ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN WAS CURRENT AT THE TIME OF DEVELOPMENT BUT MUST BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE PRODUCT MANUFACTURER TO BE CONSIDERED ACCURATE.
5. CONTRACTOR'S NOTE: FOR PRODUCT AND COMPANY INFORMATION VISIT www.CADdetails.com/info AND ENTER REFERENCE NUMBER 092-010
PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT ©2019 CADDETAILS.COM LTD. CADdetails.com 092-010 REVISION DATE 29/05/2019
SBR CUSHION LAYER
1/2" MINIMUM SPECTRAPOUR
COURSE, FIRST COLOR
PRIME WITH URETHANE PRIMER
1/2" MINIMUM SPECTRAPOUR
WEAR COURSE, SECOND
COLOR
373
MAINTENANCE GUIDELINES
Addendum A (1 of 2)
The following maintenance guidelines are hereby noted as an attachment to the SpectraTurf Statement of Warranty and are so noted in the report of Warranty as Addendum A.
SpectraTurf is under no obligation to repair or replace any of its Playground safety Surfacing Systems that are damaged by improper maintenance; vandalism; product misuse, abuse or alteration; improper drainage; normal wear and tear; damage from sharp objects; unapproved cleaning materials; or Acts of God.
Recommended Monthly Maintenance:
1. Power Wash the entire Playground Safety Surfacing to remove surface dirt, food, drink, sand, and various contaminants. Use an air blower to remove loose debris before Power Washing the Playground Safety Surface.
2. On heavily stained isolated areas, after wetting, apply a sufficient amount of all‐purpose cleaner and scrub with a 10” minimum bristle brush. Rinse thoroughly and repeat as necessary. Perform hand cleaning early in the morning or late afternoon so that the cleanser will have time to work before evaporating in high temperature conditions.
3. Power Washing can be performed any time during the day. Please refer to Addendum A (2 of 2) for illustrated procedures for power washing the Playground Safety Surfacing.
Other Recommended Maintenance:
1. Every 2 to 3 years, depending upon the amount of use the play area receives, an application (roll coat) of aliphatic resin should be applied to the Playground Safety Surfacing. Aliphatic resin should be applied by rollers (NOT air sprayers) at a rate of approx. 60 sq ft per gallon over the entire wear layer of the Playground Safety Surfacing and allowed to cure for a minimum 72 hours before use of the play area.
NEVER USE A STEEL OR HARD PLASTIC BRUSH ON MANUAL OR ELECTRIC CLEANING UNITS.
CONSULT WITH SPECTRATURF AT (800) 875‐5788 BEOFRE COMMENCING ANY CLEANING
OPERATION THAT MAY BE HARMFUL TO THE PLAYGROUND SURFACING SYSTEM 374
MAINTENANCE GUIDELINES
500 E. Rincon Street #100, Corona, CA 92879-1352
(951) 736-3579 (800) 875-5788 Fax (951) 734-3630 www.spectraturf.com CA #854429 375 SpectraPour Poured-in-Place Specification
SpectraTurf
555 South Promenade Avenue #103
Corona, CA 92879
Phone: (951) 736-3579
Fax: (951) 734-3630
E-mail: [email protected]
www.spectraturf.com
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: SpectraPour Poured-in-Place Playground Surfacing System.
B. Related Sections: Sitework Sections: Materials and Methods, Excavation, Asphalt Paving, Concrete Paving, Sub-Drainage, Storm Drainage, Fencing, Playground Equipment and Structures.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension.
376
2. ASTM D624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.
3. ASTM D2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.
4. ASTM D2859 Standard Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials.
5. ASTM E303 Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester.
6. ASTM F1292 Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment.
7. ASTM F1951 Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Provide a 2 layer rubber-urethane playground surfacing system which has been designed, manufactured and installed to meet the following criteria:
1. Shock Attenuation (ASTM F1292):
a. Gmax: Less than 200.
b. Head Injury Criteria: Less than 1000.
2. Flammability (ASTM D2859): Pass.
3. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 60 psi (413 kPa).
4. Tear Resistance (ASTM D624): 140%.
5. Water Permeability: 0.4 gal/yd2/second.
6. Accessibility: Comply with requirements of ASTM F1951. 377
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.
C. Verification Samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard verification samples of 6" x 6" minimum.
D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Certificate of qualifications of the playground surfacing installer.
E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Warranty documents specified herein.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Utilize an installer approved and trained by the manufacturer of the playground surfacing system or a direct employee of the manufacturer’s installation division, having experience with other projects of the scope and scale of the work described in this section.
B. Certifications: Certification by manufacturer that installer is an approved applicator of the playground surfacing system.
C. International Play Equipment Manufacturers Association (IPEMA) certified. 378
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.
B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and a maximum temperature of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C).
1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Install surfacing system when minimum ambient temperature is 40 degrees F (1 degree C) and maximum ambient temperature is 95 degrees F (32 degrees C). Exception to the temperature requirements can be made by the manufacturer of the surfacing system. Do not install in steady or heavy rain.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.
B. Proper drainage is critical to the longevity of the SpectraPour Poured-in-Place surfacing system. Inadequate drainage will cause premature breakdown of the poured system in affected areas; and void the warranty.
1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of completion of work. 379
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SPECTRAPOUR PLAYGROUND SURFACING SYSTEM
A. Manufacturer: Spectra Systems, Inc. dba SpectraTurf
1. Contact: 555 South Promenade Avenue, #103, Corona, CA 92879; Telephone: (800) 875-5788; Fax: (951) 734-3630;
E-mail: [email protected] website: http://www.spectraturf.com.
B. Proprietary Products/Systems. SpectraPour Poured-in-place playground surfacing system, including the following:
1. SpectraPour Poured-In-Place Primer:
a. Material: Urethane.
2. SpectraPour Poured-in-Place Basemat:
a. Material: 100% recycled blend of shredded SBR (styrene butadiene rubber) and urethane.
Specifier Note: The type of playground equipment determines the required basemat thickness, and the basemat thickness may be different at various locations on the playground site. Depending on ASTM F1292 requirements for critical fall height (4’, 5’, 6’, 7’, 8’, 10’, or 12’), select basemat thickness from options provided in subparagraph below (1-1/4 ", 1-1/2", 2”, 2 1/2", 3", 4" or 4 1/2" respectively). Specify project requirements below and coordinate with working drawings. b. Basemat Thickness: [1 1/4"] [1 1/2"] [2"] [2 1/2"] [3"] [4"] [4 1/2"]
3. SpectraPour Poured-In-Place Top Surface:
a. Material: Blend of recycled EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer) rubber and aromatic or aliphatic urethane binder.
b. Top Surface Thickness: minimum 1/2", maximum 5/8".
380
c. Color: [Terra Cotta] [Bright Red] [Orange] [Bright Yellow] [Earth Yellow] [Beige] [Sand] [Eggshell] [Brown] [Bright Green] [Army Green] [Green] [Teal] [Sky Blue] [Blue] [Light Purple] [Dark Purple] [Gray] [Charcoal] [Black] [Custom color mix (specify requirements)].
Specifier Note: Aliphatic urethane is recommended for the following colors: Bright Yellow, Bright Green, Teal, Bright Red, Orange, Light Purple, Dark Purple, Sky Blue, Sand & Eggshell. Standard aromatic binder “yellows” slightly upon exposure to ultraviolet rays. Most of this thin layer of urethane wears off with foot traffic and weathering typically within two to six months. This characteristic applies industry-wide.
Specifier Note: The following colors are recommended for indoor use only due to their high tendency for fading: Bright Yellow, Bright Red, Orange, Light Purple, Dark Purple. d. Dry Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): 1.0. e. Wet Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): 0.9. f. Dry Skid Resistance (ASTM E303): 89.
g. Wet Skid Resistance (ASTM E303): 57.
2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.
2.03 MIXES
A. Required mix proportions by weight:
1. Basemat: 16+% urethane (as ratio: 14% urethane divided by 86% rubber). 14% urethane, 86% rubber (based on entire rubber & urethane mix).
2. Top Surface: 22% urethane (ratio: 18% urethane divided by 82% rubber). 18% urethane, 82% rubber (based on entire rubber & urethane mix). 381
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the playground surfacing manufacturer.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Substrate preparation must be in accordance with surfacing manufacturer’s specification. New asphalt must be fully cured – up to 30 days. New concrete must be fully cured – up to 7 days.
B. Proper drainage is critical to the longevity of the SpectraPour CA Poured-in-Place surfacing system. Inadequate drainage will cause premature breakdown of the poured system in affected areas; and void the warranty. NOTE: Spectraturf does not provide drainage systems.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Using a brush or short nap roller, apply primer to the substrate perimeter and any adjacent vertical barriers such as playground equipment support legs, curbs or slabs that will contact the surfacing system at the rate of 300 ft2/gal.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Do not proceed with playground surfacing installation until all applicable site work, including substrate preparation, fencing, playground equipment installation and other relevant work, has been completed.
B. Basemat Installation:
1. Using screeds and hand trowels, install the basemat at a consistent density of 29 pounds, 1 ounce per cubic foot to the specified thickness. 382
2. Allow basemat to cure for sufficient time so that indentations are not left in the basemat from applicator foot traffic or equipment.
3. Do not allow foot traffic or use of the basemat surface until it is sufficiently cured.
C. Primer Application: Using a brush or short nap roller, apply primer to the basemat perimeter and any adjacent vertical barriers such as playground equipment support legs, curbs or slabs that will contact the surfacing system at the rate of 300 ft2/gal (7.5 m2/L).
D. Top Surface Installation:
1. Using a hand trowel, install top surface at a consistent density of 58 pounds, 9 ounces per cubic foot to a nominal thickness of 1/2".
2. Allow top surface to cure for a minimum of 48 hours for aromatic resin / 72 hours for aliphatic resin.
3. At the end of the minimum curing period, verify that the top surface is sufficiently dry and firm to allow foot traffic and use without damage to the surface.
4. Do not allow foot traffic or use of the surface until it is sufficiently cured.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect the installed playground surface from damage resulting from subsequent construction activity on the site.
383
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323113 September 2024 Chain Link Fence and Gates
323113 - 1
SECTION 323113
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to furnish and install chain link fencing and gates per Plans and these specifications.
B. Related Work:
1. SECTION 31 22 00 – SITE GRADING
2. SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE PAVING.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Erector Qualifications:
1. Minimum of two years experience installing similar fencing.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements.
3. Shop Drawings with sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the District Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures use on the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DIMENSIONAL DATA
A. General:
1. Pipe sizes indicated are commercial pipe sizes.
384
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323113 September 2024 Chain Link Fence and Gates
323113 - 2
2. Tube sizes indicated area nominal outside dimensions.
3. H-section sizes indicated are normal flange dimensions.
4. Roll-formed section sizes indicated are the nominal outside dimensions.
2.02 GALVANIZING
A. On steel framework and appurtenances, provide galvanized finish with not less than the following weight of zinc per square foot.
1. Pipe: 1.8 oz., complying with ASTM A120.
2. Hardware and accessories: Comply with Table I of ASTM A153.
3. Fabric: 0.3 ox., complying with Class II of ASTM A121.
2.03 FABRIC:
A. Provide 9 gauge or as noted on plan (core diameter) 3 ½ x 5. " mesh, with top and bottom selvages twisted and barbed.
B. Provide fabric in one-piece widths.
C. Fabric to be Black Vinyl Finish.
2.04 POSTS, RAILS, AND ASSOCIATED ITEMS:
A. End, corner, pull posts, and line posts: Provide at least the following minimum sizes and weight:
Pipe, 2-7/8 " outside dimensions Schedule 40 steel pipe.
B. Gate Posts: Provide gateposts for supporting single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double gate installation, for nominal gate widths as follows:
Pipe, 4" outside dimension Schedule 40 steel pipe
C. Top rails and intermediate horizontal rails:
1. Use 1.660" outside diameter Schedule 40 steel pipe.
2. Provide intermediate horizontal rails as shown on plans.
3. Provide in manufacturer's longest lengths, with expansion type couplings approximately 6" long for each joint.
4. Provide means of attaching top rail securely to each gate, corner, pull, slope, and end post.
385
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323113 September 2024 Chain Link Fence and Gates
323113 - 3
D. Tension cable: Provide number 7 gage galvanized coiled spring wire at bottom of fabric.
E. Post tops:
1. Provide steel, wrought iron, or malleable iron, designed as weather tight closure cap.
2. Provide on cap for each post.
3. Provide caps with openings to permit through passage of top rail.
F. Stretcher bars:
1. Provide one-piece lengths equal to full height of fabric, with a minimum crosssection of 3/16" x 3/4".
2. Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner, slope, and pull post, except where fabric is woven integrally into the post.
G. Stretcher bar bands:
1. Provide steel, wrought iron, or malleable iron, spaced not over 15" on centers, to secure stretcher bars to end, corner, pull, slope, and gate posts.
2. Bands may be used also with special fittings for securing rails to end, corner, pull, slope, and gate posts.
2.05 GATE
A. General:
1. Fabricated gate perimeter frames of pipe members.
2. Provide additional horizontal and vertical members to assure proper operation of the gate, and for attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories.
4. Fabricate gate frames from:
Pipe 1.90" outside diameter Schedule 40 steel pipe.
B. Fabrication
1. Assemble gate frames by welding with special malleable or pressed steel fittings and rivets for rigid connections.
2. Use same fabric as used in the fence.
386
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323113 September 2024 Chain Link Fence and Gates
323113 - 4
3. Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges as a minimum.
4. Attach stretchers to gate frame at not more than 15" on centers.
5. Attach hardware with rivets or by other means which will provide security against removal and breakage.
6. Provide diagonal cross-bracing consisting of 3/8" diameter adjustable length truss rods on gates where required to provide frame rigidity without sage or twist.
D. Gate Hardware: As noted on plans
E. All items in this section are to have Black Vinyl Finish PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS:
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. General:
1. Verify areas to receive fencing are completed to final grades and elevations.
2. Ensure property lines and legal boundaries of work are clearly established.
3. Install chain link fence in accordance with ASTM F 567 and manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Install posts at a maximum spacing of 8 feet on centers.
B. Excavating:
1. Drill holes for post footings in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil, strictly adhering to the dimensions and spacing shown on plans.
2. Concrete set all posts: Drill holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Holes shall have diameter 4 times greater than outside dimension of post, and depths approximately 6” (152 mm) deeper than post bottom. Excavate deeper as required for adequate support in soft and loose soils, and for posts with heavy lateral loads.
Set post bottom 36” (914 mm) below surface when in firm, undisturbed soil.
Place concrete around posts in a continuous pour. Trowel finish around post.
Slope to direct water away from posts.
387
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323113 September 2024 Chain Link Fence and Gates
323113 - 5
2. Spread soils from excavations uniformly adjacent to the fence line, or on adjacent areas of the site if as directed by the project District Representative.
3. When solid rock is encountered near the surface, drill into rock at least 12" for line posts and at least 18" for end, pull, gate, and corner post. Drill hole at least 1" greater diameter than the largest dimension of the post to be placed.
4. If solid rock is below soil overburden, drill to full depth required, except penetration into rock need not exceed minimum depths specified above.
C. Setting posts:
1. Remove loose and foreign materials from sides and bottoms of holes and moisten soil prior to placing concrete.
2. Center and align posts in holes.
3. Place concrete around posts in a continuous pour and vibrate or tamp for consolidation.
4. Check each post for vertical and top alignment and hold in position during placement and finishing operations.
5. Set keeps, stops, sleeves, and other accessories into concrete as required.
6. Keep exposed concrete surfaces moist for as least seven days after placement, or cure with membrane curing material or other curing method approved by the District Representative.
7. Grout-in those posts which are set into sleeved holes, concrete constructions, or rock excavations, using non-shrink Portland Cement grout or other grouting material approved by the District Representative.
D. Concrete strength:
1. Allow concrete to attain at least 75% of its minimum 28-day strength before rails, tension wires, and/or fabric is installed.
2. Do not, in any case, install such items in less than seven days after placement of concrete.
3. Do not stretch and tension fabric and wire, and do not hang gates, until concrete has attained its full design strength.
E. Rails and bracing:
388
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323113 September 2024 Chain Link Fence and Gates
323113 - 6
1. Install fencing with a top rail, intermediate rail and bottom rail.
2. Bracing: Install horizontal pipe brace at mid-height for fences 6’ (1829 mm) and over, on each side of terminal posts. Firmly attach with fittings. Install diagonal truss rods at these points. Adjust truss rod, ensuring posts remain plumb.
2. Install top rail continuously through post caps or extension arms. Install lengths, 21’ (6400 mm). Connect joints with sleeves for rigid connections for expansion/contraction.
3. Tension Wire: Install Tension Wire between posts with fittings and accessories.
4. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by the fencing manufacturer.
F. Installing fabric:
1. Leave approximately 2" between finish grade and bottom selvage.
2. Excavated high points in the ground to clear the bottom of the fence.
3. Place and compact fill to within 1" of the bottom of the fabric in depressions.
4. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires.
5. Install fabric on outward side facing side of fence, and anchor to framework so that the fabric remains in tension after pulling force is removed.
6. Attach fabric with wire ties to line posts at 15” (381 mm) on center and to rails, braces, and tension wire at 24” (600 mm) on center.
6. Tension (stretcher) bars: Pull fabric taut; thread tension bar through fabric and attach to terminal posts with bands or clips spaced maximum of 15” (381 mm) on center.
G. Installing gates:
1. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference.
2. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage in accordance with the fence manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the District Representative.
3. Lubricate and adjust the hardware for smooth operation.
H. Miscellaneous:
1. Use U-shaped tie wires, conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least two full turns. 389
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323113 September 2024 Chain Link Fence and Gates
323113 - 7
2. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazards to persons and clothing.
3. Fasteners:
a. Install nuts for tension band and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side.
b. Peen the ends of bolts to prevent removal nuts.
3. Repair galvanized coatings damaged in the shop or field erection, using a hotapplied repair compound applied in accordance with its manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the District Representative.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean up debris and unused material and remove from the site.
END OF SECTION
390
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323300 September 2024 Site Furnishings and Equipment
323300-1
SECTION 323300
SITE FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 CONDITIONS
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, operation or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the Contract Documents and/or herein specified in this Section.
2. Although such Work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
3. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All products or items described herein shall be new, unless otherwise specified, and shall be from the specified manufacturer or approved equal. Products shall be complete in all respects, properly installed, and in perfect working order.
1.04 QUALIFICATION OF INSTALLER
A. Installer shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, and shall be completely familiar with the products and their installation as specified on the Contract Documents and in this Section. Installer shall be present at all times during progress of Work of this Section and shall direct all work performed.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall be charged with the responsibility of making arrangements for the coordination of his construction operations with those of all others on the job, and he shall permit other forces so engaged to accomplish their portion of the Work without undue interference or delay.
391
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323300 September 2024 Site Furnishings and Equipment
323300-2
B. Contractor shall place order for all site furnishings and equipment immediately after award of bid to ensure adequate time for manufacturing, shipping and installation. If any materials or equipment are not ordered in time, additional costs made by equipment manufacturer's to their equipment in time to meet construction schedule together with any special handling costs, shall be borne by the Contractor. NO project extension shall be granted due to improper lead time in ordering.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit one (1) electronic copy (preferred) or one (1) hard copy of manufacturer's catalog cuts off all products to the Owners Representative for approval. Catalog cuts shall clearly identify product, finishes, color, schedule and installation.
B. Submit one (1) electronic copy (preferred) or one (1) hard copy of the play equipment shop drawings to the Owner's Representative approval. Shop drawings shall clearly identify product, materials, connections, equipment, safety railings, finishes, color, schedule and installation.
C. All approvals must be granted prior to ordering product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PARK SIGNS
2.01 Submit shop drawings for approval prior to ordering signs. Refer to construction plans for design; all products shall be as specified or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Work shall be set true to line and shall present a neat and finished appearance.
Includes setting each item in its correct place, fastening it, connecting it, or incorporating it into other portions of work, as each item may require; testing and operating equipment to assure proper functioning. Furnish anchors and adhesives required for installing and attaching the equipment specified herein.
B. Install per manufacturer’s instructions and specifications. 392
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323300 September 2024 Site Furnishings and Equipment
323300-3
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PARK SIGN
A. Park sign shall be located as indicated on the Contract Documents for Owner’s Representative approval prior to installation.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for installation any footing, as detailed by the manufacturer, onsite for signs with base
3.03 INSTALLATION OF BENCHES
A. Locate benches as indicated on Contract Documents for Owner's Representative approval prior to installation.
B. Install items level and plumb.
C. Surface mount in conformance with manufacturer's specifications.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PICNIC TABLES
A. Locate picnic tables as indicated on Contract Documents for Owner's Representative approval prior to installation.
B. Install items level and plumb.
C. Surface mount as detailed on the Contract Documents and in conformance with manufacturer's specifications.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRASH RECEPTACLE
A. Install as detailed on the Contract Documents and in conformance with the manufacturer's specifications.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF PLAY EQUIPMENT
A. Install as detailed on the Contract Documents and in conformance with the manufacturer's specifications. Equipment shall be composed of such material and constructed as specified by the individual manufacturer’s specifications. All posts shall be steel. The contractor will be responsible for receiving and storing the play equipment until it is installed. Manufacturer to provide repair kit with paint, details, specifications and all necessary tools.
B. Coordination of all play equipment components in relation to the depth of components within the specified play area surfacing material and drainage items will be required to be verified prior to placement of order of play equipment. Verify 393
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323300 September 2024 Site Furnishings and Equipment
323300-4
specific play components with the type of surfacing material(s) to ensure required depths are achieved.
C. Contractor shall assemble and install playground equipment, required signs and labels in compliance with the written instructions of the manufacturer. The playground equipment shall be assembled and installed by or under the direct supervision of an individual who is authorized by the manufacturer to assemble and install the equipment.
D. Prior to final project approval and acceptance, the playground equipment shall be inspected by a Certified Playground Safety Inspector who shall certify in writing that the equipment, insofar as it can be seen without disassembling it or digging into the surfacing, is in compliance with ASTM F-1487-98 and CPSC Handbook Publication number 325.
E. Install in conformance with all applicable playground accessible requirements and consumer Product Safety Commission Guidelines for public playground safety.
F. The Contractor shall install a 6’-0” high temporary barrier fence around the play area, until final acceptance has been granted.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF PLAYGROUND RESILIENT SURFACING
A. Refer to Section 32 18 16.13
3.08 INSTALLATION OF STEEL BASKETBALL HOOPS/MULTIGOALS
A. Install as detailed on the Contract Documents and in conformance with the manufacturer's specifications.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Adequately protect all work form damage by subsequent construction operations.
Damaged work shall be replaced by Contractor and at Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION
394
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 1
SECTION 02811
IRRIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 CONDITIONS
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Special Provisions (if any) apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, processes, and equipment necessary to complete the irrigation system work as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
B. Test the entire irrigation system to assure proper operation.
C. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to restore all disturbed areas resulting from the work as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
D. All incidental parts, which are not shown on the plans or specified herein and are necessary to complete or modify the existing system shall be furnished and installed as though such parts were shown on plans or specifications. All systems shall be in satisfactory operation at the time of completion.
1. Related work specified in other sections:
a. Section 01600 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
b. Section 01780 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
c. Section 02100 - DEMOLITION
d. Section 02905 - LANDSCAPE INSTALLATION
e. Section 02970 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE & REQUIREMENTS
A. Permits and Fees: The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and all observations as required.
B. Manufacturer's Directions: Manufacturer's directions and detailed Drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used in this Contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the Drawings and Specifications C. Ordinances and Regulations
395
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 2
A. All local, municipal and state laws, rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these Specifications and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor.
B. All rules and regulations governing or relating to the California Code of Regulations, Title 23, Division 2, Chapter 2.7, 2015 Updated Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these Specifications and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor.
C. The materials and work of this section shall conform to all applicable provisions of the latest editions of the Uniform Plumbing Code, the National Electrical Code, and all codes properly governing the materials and work at the project site.
D. All electrical materials and work shall conform to California Administrative Code, Title 23, Part 3, Basic Electrical Regulations, and Article 18 E 110-16.
E. Anything contained in these Specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and regulations or requirements of the same. However, when these Specifications and Drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, the provisions of the Specifications and Drawings shall take precedence.
D. Explanation of Drawings
1. Not all offsets, fittings, sleeves, main line, lateral, etc., which may be required are shown on plans. Carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all the work and plan the work accordingly furnishing such fittings; etc., as may be required to meet such conditions. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. Due to the scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc., which may be required to complete the irrigation system.
2. Before proceeding with any work, the Contractor shall check and verify all dimensions, quantities, pressures and flows and shall immediately inform the District of any discrepancy between the drawing and/or the Specifications and actual conditions. No work shall be done in any area where there is such a discrepancy until the District has given written approval for the same. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for work installed without approval.
3. The materials and work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation system and planting, existing or proposed utilities, and all other construction features.
4. Contractor shall verify prior to and during construction, that his contract documents reflect the latest revisions and change orders. Contractor shall be able to produce such documents at the request of the District.
5. Pipe sizes indicated on the Drawings are minimum allowable.
1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS
396
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 3
A. The Contractor shall exercise due care to protect all existing facilities, structures and utilities both above ground and underground on the site.
B. The contractor shall also exert every effort to maintain amenities, including specimen tress and natural areas integral to the aesthetic of the park design.
C. Information on the Drawings, relative to existing conditions, is approximate only.
Deviations found necessary during construction to conform to actual conditions, as approved by the District, shall be made without additional cost.
D. Where it is necessary to excavate in areas of existing utilities, the contractor shall pothole to confirm exact locations of existing utilities. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to existing utilities that are caused by his operation or neglect. In case of interruption of utilities caused by the contractor’s operations or neglect, the contractor shall be responsible to have the utilities in service as soon as possible and in no case shall the interruption be longer than a twenty-four (24) hour period. In such case that the contractor needs more than a twenty-four (24) hour period, prior approval shall be acquired from the District in writing.
E. Excavation in proximity to existing trees shall conform to the Tree Protection Measures per Contract Documents.
1.05 EXISTING IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. All existing sprinklers, rotors, controllers, quick coupler valves, undamaged utility boxes, remote control valves, isolation valves shall be removed and salvaged by the Contractor. Deliver only salvageable items to District maintenance yard in stackable plastic bins. All salvaged products shall be inventoried by Contractor prior to delivery. All other items shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
B. Existing pipelines shall be abandoned in place except in those areas designated to retain and protect. If an existing irrigation pipe is encountered during the installation of new pipe, a section of the existing pipe shall be cut and removed. Remove two (2) feet of the existing pipeline on both sides of the new pipe and/or to a depth of eighteen (18) inches, whichever comes first.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Material List
1. Contractor shall furnish the articles, equipment, materials, or processes specified by name in the Drawings and Specifications. Product names are used as standards only; other materials or methods shall not be used unless approved in writing by the District. Burden of proof as to equality of proposed material shall be on the Contractor; the District's decision is final. Only one request for substitution shall be considered for each item. Equipment capacities specified are minimum acceptable.
397
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 4
2. A complete material list (6 copies) shall be submitted to the District for approval prior to performing any work. The material list shall clearly identify the manufacturer, model number and description of materials and equipment to be used, including but not limited to the following:
a. Irrigation Controller and Accessories
b. Hand Held Remote Control
c. Isolation Valves
d. Master Valve and Flow Sensor
e. Remote Control and Drip Valves
f. 2-Wire Valve and Sensor Decoders
g. Concrete Valve Boxes and Security Lids
h. Gear Drive Rotors
i. Pop Up Sprinklers and Nozzles
j. Bubblers and Riser Assemblies
k. Drip Irrigation Tubing and Fittings
l. Swing Joint Assemblies
m. PVC Gasketed Main Line Pipe
n. Main Line Fittings and Joint Restraints
o. PVC Solvent Weld Lateral Pipe and Fittings
p. PVC and HDPE Sleeves
q. PVC Conduit
r. PVC Solvent Cement and Primer
s. 2-Wire Decoder Cable
t. Water Proof Wire Connectors
u. Controller and Decoder Earth Ground Systems
3. The contractor shall provide additional submittals as required for products not listed above but which are used on site. Approval of submittals is required before installation.
4. Equipment or materials installed or furnished without prior approval of the District shall be rejected and the Contractor shall be required to remove such materials from the site at his own expense.
5. Approval of any item, alternate or substitute indicates only that the product or products apparently meet the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications based on the information or samples submitted.
B. Record Drawings
1. The Contractor shall dimension from two (2) permanent points of reference, building corners, sidewalks, or road intersections, etc., the location of the following items:
a. Connection to Irrigation and Potable Water Lines (Note Depth) b. Electrical Power Connection and Conduits (Note Depth) c. Irrigation Controller
d. Main Line Valves – Isolation, Quick Coupler and Air Release e. Master Valves and Flow Sensors
398
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 5
f. Remote Control and Drip Valves
g. Routing of irrigation pressure lines; dimension maximum 100' along routing and at turns in direction and utility crossovers. (Note Depth) h. Routing of conduit and 2-wire decoder cable when not adjacent to main line. i. Main Line, Lateral and Electrical Sleeves at both ends (Note Depth) j. Electric pull/splice boxes (note decoder identification addresses) k. Other related equipment as directed by the District.
2. Two (2) weeks prior to the date of the final observation, the Contractor shall deliver reproducible record drawings and digital media to the Landscape Architect for review. Delivery shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing required information that may be omitted from the plans or digital media or from the requirements of the Close Out Documents.
C. Controller Charts
1. The District shall approve record Drawings before controller charts are prepared.
2. Provide one (1) controller chart for each controller supplied.
3. The chart shall show or explain the area controlled by the automatic controller and shall be the maximum size that the controller door will allow.
4. The chart shall be either a reduced drawing or a written description of the actual record drawing system. In the event the controller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, it shall be enlarged to a size that is readable.
5. When completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically sealed between two (2) pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum ten (10) mils thick.
6. These charts shall be completed and approved prior to final observation of the irrigation system.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1. Prepare and deliver two (2) operation manuals as specified and as follows:
a. Approved irrigation material list as described in Section 1.05.A.2 b. Parts lists for approved irrigation material list.
c. Operation manuals for approved irrigation material list.
3. Guarantee Statement for Irrigation System
4. Landscape Irrigation Water Audit
E. Before final observation can occur, the above-mentioned material submittals, record drawings, controller charts, operations and maintenance manuals, guarantee statement for irrigation system, central control certificate and landscape irrigation water audit shall be turned over to the District.
399
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 6
1.06 Equipment to be Furnished:
A. Irrigation Products to be Furnished
1. Supply as a part of this Contract the following tools:
a. Two (2) key sets for locking irrigation controller.
b. Two (2) valves of each size and type used.
c. Two (2) decoders of each type used.
d. Five (5) rotors of each type used.
e. Five (5) pop up sprinklers of each type used.
f. Five (5) complete nozzle sets of each type used.
g. Five (5) bubblers of each type used.
h. One Hundred (100) feet of drip tubing for each type used. i. Ten (10) drip emitters for each type used.
j. Two (2) sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling and adjusting each type of sprinkler used
k. Two (2) sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling and adjusting each type of joint restraint used.
l. Two (2) lock and key sets for controller enclosures (keyed as per District specifications)
m. Two (2) quick coupler keys and matching hose swivels n. Two (2) 60” isolation valve opening keys
o. Four (4) Security keys for concrete valve boxes
p. Two (2) hand-held remote-control transmitters and cases q. Two (2) hand-held decoder programmers
2. The above-mentioned equipment shall be turned over to the District at the conclusion of the project. Written evidence that the District has received materials must be provided to the Landscape Architect prior to scheduling final observation.
1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Handling of PVC Pipe and Fittings: The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing of PVC pipe and fittings. All PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle that allows the length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external load at any point. Any section of pipe that has been dented or damaged will be discarded and if installed replaced with new.
1.08 GUARANTEE
1. The guarantee for the irrigation system shall be made in accordance with the form shown on the following page. A copy of the guarantee form shall be included in the operations and maintenance manual. The guarantee form shall be re-typed onto the Contractor's letterhead and contain the following information:
400
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 7
GUARANTEE FOR IRRIGATION SYSTEM
We hereby guarantee that the irrigation system we have furnished and installed is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been completed in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect excepted. We agree to repair or replace any defects in material or workmanship, which may develop during the period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance and to repair or replace with originally specified materials. Any damage resulting from the repairing or replacing of such defects shall be replaced and repaired by the contractor at no additional cost to the District. We shall make such repairs or replacements within a 48-hour period, after receipt of written notice. In the event of our failure to make such repairs or replacements within said period after receipt of written notice from the District, we authorize the District to proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense and we will pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand.
PROJECT:__________________________________________________________ LOCATION:_________________________________________________________ SIGNED:____________________________________________________________ ADDRESS:__________________________________________________________ PHONE:____________________________________________________________ DATE OF ACCEPTANCE:______________________________________________ 401
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Trench Backfill
1. Native Material
a. Native backfill material, if approved by the District, shall be used for backfill material.
b. Native Backfill: Prepared as necessary to be non-expansive, free of debris, organic material and lumps larger than three (3) inches, rocks larger than two (2) inches,
c. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, the Contractor has the option to use imported granular material for trench backfill in place of native material excavated at the work site.
1.) The optional use of imported granular material for trench backfill will be at the Contractor’s expense.
2. Imported Soil
a. Imported Backfill: Non-expansive soil, free of debris, organic material and lumps larger than three (3) inches, rocks larger than two (2) inches, with a liquid limit no greater than 40 and a plasticity index no greater than 15.
3. Graded Sand
a. Graded sand backfill must be free from vegetable matter, lumps, balls of clay, or adherent films of clay, and must have a minimum Cleanliness Value of 60 as determined by California Test 227.
b. The percentage composition by weight of graded sand must conform to the following gradations:
Sieve Size Percentage Passing by Weight
9.5 mm (3/8”) 100
4.75 mm (#4) 92-100
2.36 mm (#8) 90-100
1.18 mm (#16 80-100
600 µm (#30) 65-100
300 µm (#50) 40-80
150 µm (#100) 0-40
75 µm (#200) 0-12
4. Crushed Rock or Gravel
402
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 9
a. Crushed rock or gravel backfill material shall be graduated so that 100 percent will pass the 3/4 inch sieve and not more than 15 percent will pass the number 8 sieve.
b. Clean crushed rock must have a minimum Cleanliness Value of 60 as determined by California Test 227. At least 75 percent of the crushed rock particles must have 2 or more fractured faces.
B. Woven Geotextile Fabric
1. The woven geotextile fabric must be a high modulus woven fabric consisting of long chain polymeric monofilaments, slit film tapes, or multifilaments of tape and nonwoven yarn of polypropylene, polyester or nylon, and must be inert to commonly encountered chemicals, rotproof and resistant to ultraviolet light exposures, insects, and rodents.
2. The fabric must be woven into a stable network and the edges of the fabric must be selvedged or surged in such a way that fabric will not unravel or fray during installation or usage.
3. The geotextile must conform to the physical property requirements as below:
a. Grab tensile strength (any direction), lb. ASTM D 4632 200 lbs. b. Weight, oz/yd3 ASTM D 5261 6.0 oz/yd3
c. Permittivity, sec-1 ASTM D 4491 0.5 sec-1
d. Mullen Burst strength, psi ASTM D 3786 400 psi
e. The fabric must have an Equivalent Opening Size no larger than U.S.
Standard Sieve Number 50 as determined by U.S. Corps of Landscape Architects Specification CW-02215.
C. Irrigation Pipe Sleeve
1. Irrigation Sleeve 4” and smaller shall be PVC Schedule 40 with solvent-weld joints.
a. Pipe shall be made from NSF approved Type I, Grade I, PVC compound conforming to ASTM resin specification D1785. All pipes shall meet requirements set forth in Federal Specification PS-21-70. (Solvent-weld Pipe)
2. Irrigation Sleeve 6” and larger shall be corrugated HDPE with smooth interior wall.
a. HDPE shall be made from high-density polyethylene with an integrally formed smooth interior conforming to AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, Type S.
D. PVC Pipe and Fittings
403
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 10
1. Main Line Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
a. Pressure main line piping four (4) inch and larger shall be PVC Class 200, rubber ring joint type.
1.) Couplings with grooves for sealing rings either shall be a separate machined part with two (2) sealing rings or manufactured as an integral part at one end of each pipe length. Pipe shall be made from an NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) approved Type I, Grade I, PVC compound conforming to ASTM resin specification D2241. All pipes shall meet requirements as set forth in Federal Specification PS22-70, with an appropriate standard dimension ratio (S.D.R. Pipe).
2.) Lubricant for assembling gasketed pipe and fittings shall be as per manufacturer’s specifications.
3.) Main line fittings and valves two and one half (2-1/2) inch and larger shall be mechanically restrained using integral joint restraints or approved equal.
b. Pressure main line piping three (3) inch to two and one half (2-1/2) inch shall be PVC Class 315 and two (2) inch and smaller shall be PVC Schedule 40.
1.) Main line fittings three (3) inch and smaller shall be PVC Schedule 80 c. All PVC pipe shall be marked continuously and permanently with the following information: Manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, schedule or class of pipe, pressure rating in P.S.I. extrusion, NSF approval and date of extrusion.
d. All PVC fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable I.P.S. schedule and NSF seal of approval.
2. Lateral Non-Pressure Pipe and Fittings
a. PVC pipe 2-1/2 inch and larger shall be PVC Class 315. b. PVC pipe 2 inch and smaller shall be PVC Schedule 40. c. Pipe shall be made from NSF approved Type 1, Grade PVC compound conforming to ASTM resin specification 1785. All pipes shall meet requirements as set forth in Federal Specification PS-21-70. (Solvent-weld pipe).
d. Lateral pipe fittings downstream of remote control valves shall be solvent welded PVC Schedule 40 unless otherwise noted in details and drawings.
E. Main Line Joint Restraints
404
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 11
1. All gate valves, ductile iron bends, reducers, tees and pipe bell and gasket joints adjacent to restrained joints shall be mechanically restrained in accordance to the manufactures recommended design criteria and guide. Concrete thrust blocks are not to be used.
2. The mechanical joint restraint shall be capable of securing the PVC pipe directly to the gate valve, ductile iron bends, reducers and tees without the use of bolts, links and adapters.
3. Joint restraints shall be manufactured from ductile iron, grade 65-45-12 in accordance with ASTM A-536.
4. Bolts and nuts used on joint restraints shall be provided as part of the restraint assembly.
5. All joint restraints shall be installed using methods recommended by the manufacturer. All bolts and nuts shall be tightened as per manufacturer’s recommended torque ratings.
F. Main Line Detectable Marking Tape
1. Detectable marking tape shall consist of a 5.0 mil (0.005”) thickness, five-ply composition, ultra-high molecular weight, 100 percent virgin polyethylene and acid, alkaline and corrosion resistant.
2. The tape tensile strength is in accordance with ASTM D882-80A and will not be less than 7800 PSI. The tape will have a 2.0 mil (0.0020") solid aluminum foil core, encapsulated within 2.55 mil (0.00255") polyethylene backing.
3. Tape width shall be three (3) inch minimum width or as specified by manufacturer for pipe size.
4. Detectable marking tape for irrigation water shall be blue in color with “Caution:
Irrigation Water Line Buried Below”
G. Concrete
1. ASTM Class B concrete shall be used for fill concrete.
2. Concrete shall have a 3,500-PSI compressive strength at 28 days and shall have maximum water to cement and dispersing agent ration of 56%. Concrete shall have a minimum cement content of 470 lbs. (5 bags) per cubic yard concrete.
Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be three-quarter (3/4) inch.
H. PVC Threaded Nipples:
1. PVC Schedule 80 nipples shall be produced from extruded stock grade PVC compounds.
a. No molded nipples shall be used.
405
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 12
b. PVC Schedule 80 nipples shall be made from NSF approved PVC compound conforming to ASTM D1784, Cell Classification 12454
I. Manual Valves
1. All mainline valves shall be resilient wedge and conform to AWWA C153 standards.
a. Material shall be ductile iron per ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12. b. Epoxy coating on all interior and exterior surfaces shall be fusion bonded epoxy, 12-14 mil thickness.
c. Gate valves shall be available in spigot x bell and bell x bell models to mechanically connect to fittings or plastic pipe. Valve bell end shall be deep bell, gasket and equipped with cast joint restraint clamps to securely fasten to plastic pipe.
d. Restraints shall have blunt cast serrations. Machined threaded restraints will not be allowed.
e. Valves shall have a shroud around the 2” operating nut to accept IPS PVC sleeve which provides dirt-free access to actuate the valve.
2. Valves two (2) inch and smaller shall be bronze, full port ball valve with threaded ends.
a. Ball valves shall be equipped with a cast bronze cross or tee handle.
J. Quick Coupling Valves
1. Quick coupling valves shall have a brass two-piece body designed for working pressure of 150 P.S.I. operable with quick coupler key. Key size and type shall be as shown on the Drawings.
K. Remote Control Valve
1. Remote control valves shall be of the same type, manufacturer and model shown on drawings.
2. Remote control valves shall be operated by a 2-wire decoder with a separate decoder address for each valve station and be of the same type, manufacturer and model as shown on the drawing.
3. Remote control valves shall be labeled with a valve identification tags of the same type, manufacture and model shown on drawings.
L. Valve Identification
406
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 13
1. Remote control valve tags shall be of the same type, manufacturer and model shown on drawings.
2. Remote control valve tags shall be manufactured from polyurethane Behr Desopan, with a reinforced attachment hole and will be 2-1/4” x 2.3/4” in size. a. Remote control valve identification tags shall be yellow in color with double sided stamped controller and valve designation.
b. Manual and remote-control valve identification tags shall be blue in color with double sided stamped “Non-Potable Water” on both sides.
B. Wiring
1. Two-wire cable shall be a twisted, solid-core wire suitable for direct burial, colorcoded red and blue.
2. All connections in the two-wire path shall be made with 3M DBRY-6 waterproof connectors or approved equal.
3. Two-wire cable earth grounding shall be per manufacture’s specifications.
C. Irrigation Controller
1. The irrigation controller shall be of the same type, manufacture and size as shown on the drawing.
2. The irrigation controller shall operate the remote-control valves using a two-wire path.
3. The irrigation controller shall have a minimum of six (6) sensor outputs.
4. The irrigation controller shall be equipped with two (2) hand held remote programmers that use wireless induction to program and communicate with decoders in the field.
5. Irrigation Controller shall have a five (5) year manufacturer’s warranty.
D. Master Valve and Valve Flow Sensor Assembly
1. The master valve and flow sensor assembly shall be of the same type, manufacture and size as shown on the drawing.
2. The master valve shall be operated by a 2-wire decoder.
3. The Flow Sensor shall be connected to the controller through a 2-wire path sensor decoder as per manufacture specification.
E. Earth Ground
407
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 14
1. Earth Grounding for electronic irrigation controller shall be made in accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and manufacturer written specifications. At the very minimum, the grounding circuit shall include a copper clad steel ground rod, a solid copper ground plate and one hundred (100) pound of PowerSet earth contact material or approved equal.
2. Ground Rods shall be 5/8” diameter by 10’ length copper clad with a surface area of 238 square inches.
3. Copper Ground Plates shall be 12” by 36” by 1/16” solid copper with a surface area of 870 square inches.
a. Copper Ground Plates shall come with 25 feet of 6AWG copper wire welded to the plate.
b. Copper Ground Plates shall conform to N.E.C. requirements.
4. Bare Copper Wire shall be soft-annealed, uncoated copper, 6AWG and conforming to UL standard 719.
a. Bare Copper Wire shall be permanently welded to ground rods and ground plates, so the connection doesn’t loosen or corrode.
b. Exothermic reaction welding process shall be used and shall conform to N.E.C. requirements.
5. Earth Contact Backfills shall be superior conductive material, non-hardening or hardening such as PowerFill or PowerSet or approved equal.
F. Irrigation Heads
1. All irrigation heads shall be of the same size, type and deliver the same rate of precipitation with the diameter (or radius) of throw, pressure, and discharge as shown on the plans and/or specified herein or approved by the District.
2. Rotor heads shall be gear drive with stainless steel riser and factory installed check valve.
3. Pop Up Sprinkler bodies shall be equipped with pressure regulation, heavy-duty spring and factory installed check valve.
a. Pop Up Sprinklers shall come equipped with rotary nozzles and matched precipitation.
4. All irrigation heads of similar functions shall be of common manufacture and shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name and model identification in a position where they may be identified without being removed from the system.
G. Valve and Electric Boxes
408
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 15
1. Valve boxes installed in decomposed granite areas shall be tan colored; valve boxes installed in planter areas shall be green colored.
2. Valve boxes shall be per plans and details with bolt down kit and a skid resistant marked surface.
3. Valve box lids shall be per plans with diamond plated surface texture with a locked and secure improved wing design securely locking the cover in place from inside the enclosure.
a. Valve box lids shall come equipped with a vandal resistant security bolt and a specialized key to open.
b. Valve box lids shall have a welded identification plate attached by the manufacturer to say irrigation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Appoint a competent resident superintendent to be onsite whenever the WORK is in progress. The superintendent shall not be replaced without notice to the Landscape Architect.
B. Contractor is responsible for locating and avoiding underground utilities, for notifying all appropriate agencies prior to beginning excavation, and for any damage caused by Contractor. Contractor is required to notify Landscape Architect and the utility company should there be any damage to utilities.
3.02 SITE CONDITIONS
1. Contractor shall protect all existing site development including, but not limited to, existing buildings, equipment, underground utilities, walls, materials, etc. Any existing site development damaged by willful or negligent acts of Contractor or any of Contractor’s employees shall be replaced or repaired at no expense to District and in a manner satisfactory to Landscape Architect before Project acceptance is given. This provision applies to onsite damage as well as to that which may occur to adjacent properties
2. All scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and verify all site dimensions and notify the District if site conditions have changed from those specified in the drawings.
3. The Contractor shall check and verify all site water and electrical services and notify the District if site conditions have changed from those specified in the drawings.
4. The Contractor shall carefully check all grades to satisfy him that he may safely proceed before starting work on the irrigation system.
409
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 16
5. The contractor shall obtain permits and call for inspections as required by local codes and regulation. All installations shall conform to local codes and accepted construction practices.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Physical Layout
1. Locations on Drawings are diagrammatic and approximate only and shall be changed and adjusted as necessary and as directed by the District to meet existing conditions and obtain complete water coverage.
2. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out points of connection, power connections to controllers, location of mainlines, valve groupings and obtain review by the District before installation. The District prior to installation shall approve all layouts in writing. If equipment is incorrectly located without said approval, it is the Contractor's responsibility to relocate it as per the District’s directions without additional cost.
3. Prior to installation in Turf Fields, the Contractor shall stake out points of connection to main line, location of mainlines, valves groupings and sprinkler heads that define the layouts of the Turf Fields and obtain review by the District before installation.
4. The Contractor shall install and extend the system as shown on the Drawings, and as necessary to carry out the intent of the Drawings and Specifications.
3.03 WATER, ELECTRICAL AND TELEPHONE SERVICES
A. Water Supply
1. Coordinate with the District the irrigation water supply point of connection as indicated on the Drawings. Field verify connection location and size. The contractor is responsible for any changes caused by actual site conditions. Notify the District of any discrepancies prior to beginning construction.
B. Electrical Supply
1. Contractor shall provide all materials and connections to supply electrical power to the irrigation controller(s) and other electrical components as needed.
2. Connection shall be made at approximate location(s) as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor is responsible for minor changes caused by actual site conditions and for the coordination of all electrical service connections to the controllers.
3. A licensed Electrical Contractor shall perform electrical work. Materials and workmanship for electrical service shall conform to the latest edition of the National Electric Code and local codes, ordinances and governing authorities having jurisdiction.
410
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 17
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Trenching
1. Dig trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Lay pipe to an even grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on the Drawings and as noted.
2. Provide for twenty-four (24) inches cover for all pressure lines. Contractor shall be responsible to review Grading Plan to control depth of mainline.
3. Provide eighteen (18) inches cover for rotor and sprinklers on non-pressure lines.
4. Provide for a minimum of twelve (12) inches cover for drip manifolds on nonpressure lines.
5. Provide for twenty-four (24) inches cover for all control wiring.
6. Provide twenty-four (24) inches of cover for all pressure lines, non-pressure lines and control wiring under auto traffic areas.
7. Trench width shall be as needed to provide minimum horizontal clearance between pipes and minimum of four (4) inches of clearance between edge of pipes and edges of trench.
8. No pipe shall be laid directly over another pipe.
B. Laying and Jointing Geotextile
1. Placed geotextile directly on prepared subgrade in the trench to conform loosely to the shape of the trench. The geotextile shall be laid flat, but not stretched on the soil, avoid folds and creases.
2. Overlap geotextile side-to-side minimum one and one half (1-1/2) feet. Apart from the one longitudinal overlap no longitudinal joints shall be permitted. a. Curves may be accomplished by folding or cutting the fabric to conform to the curve.
b. Staple overlap at four (4() foot longitudinal intervals using six (6) inch galvanized U-shaped landscape pins.
3. Successive sheets shall be overlapped to form transverse field splices. The splices shall have a minimum overlap of 500 mm and shall be anchored with securing pins to ensure this required overlap is maintained. Alternatively, sewn joints will be accepted subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect.
4. Where outlet pipe passes through the geotextile, a separate piece of geotextile of sufficient size shall be wrapped around the pipe and flared against the side of the geotextile wrapped pipe.
411
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 18
C. Backfilling
1. Excavate bottom of trench to uniform grade to achieve stable trench conditions and satisfactory compaction of foundation or bedding materials. Pipes must have firm, uniform bearing for the entire length of each pipe line. Wedging or blocking of pipe will not be permitted
2. Place Geotextile to prevent particle migration from the in-situ into open graded embedment materials.
3. Place sand backfill six (6) inches in depth below the pipe and compact to 85 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698.
4. Manually spread sand backfill around the pipe to provide uniform bearing and side support when compacted. Perform placement and compaction directly against the undisturbed soils in the trench sidewalls.
5. Place sand backfill six (6) inches in depth above the pipe and compact by at least two passes manual tamping to 85% relative compaction. Ponding or jetting methods will not be permitted.
6. Backfill lateral lines with approved backfill material. Backfill material shall be free from organic materials, large clods of earth or rocks larger than three (3) inches in diameter, trash, debris, rubbish, broken cement, asphalt material or other objectionable substances.
7. If settlement occurs and subsequent adjustments in pipe, valves, sprinklers heads, lawn or planting, or other construction are necessary, the Contractor will make all the required adjustments at Contractor’s expense.
D. Trenching and Backfilling Under Paving
1. Trenches located under areas where paving, asphaltic concrete or concrete shall be installed, shall be backfilled with sand, a layer six (6) inches below the pipe and six (6) inches above the pipe and compacted in layers to 85% compaction, using manual or mechanical tamping devices. All trenches shall be left flush with the adjoining grade. The Contractor shall set in place; cap and pressure test all piping under paving prior to the paving work.
2. Generally piping under existing walks is done by jacking, boring or hydraulic driving, but where any cutting or breaking of sidewalks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done and replaced by the Contractor as part of the Contract cost. Permission to cut or break sidewalks and/or concrete shall be obtained from the District in writing. No hydraulic driving shall be permitted under concrete paving.
E. Sleeving
412
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 19
1. Sleeving shall be installed for irrigation pressure main line pipe, non-pressure lateral pipe and electrical wiring that crosses pavement, walkways, paths, mow curbs, concrete, and other hardscape elements as needed whether shown on drawing or not.
2. Install irrigation and electrical sleeving as needed whether indicated on the Drawings. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of sleeving with the work of other trades. Sleeving shall extend a minimum of six (6) inches past hardscape.
3. Sleeves shall be sized to easily accommodate piping and/or control wiring as called for in the drawings leaving a minimum of 25% void space inside sleeve. a. The contractor shall be responsible to verify sleeving sizes based on field verification of pipe and wire crossings.
4. Separate sleeves shall be provided for:
a. Main line and lateral piping.
b. 120V electric service
c. Irrigation 2-wire decoder cable
d. Irrigation ground wire.
5. Sleeves shall have both ends capped during installation to prevent dirt and debris from entering the sleeve.
6. Identify location of sleeve ends from two permanent points of reference and mark on record drawings.
7. When utilizing existing sleeving, the contractor will remove existing pipe and wire and remove debris from sleeve prior to installing new irrigation components.
F. PVC Pipe
1. Routing of irrigation pipe as indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic. Install lines, stub outs and valve manifolds to conform to the details shown on the drawings.
2. Install irrigation main line a minimum of five (5) feet from tree locations to avoid conflict with mature rooting systems.
3. Install no multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet.
4. Changes in directions and depth on irrigation main line shall be made with 45° bends. No 90° bends shall be used.
5. Install all assemblies specified herein in accordance with respective detail. In absence of detail Drawings or specifications pertaining to specific items required to complete work, provide shop drawing in accordance with best standard practice to Landscape Architect for review and approval prior to installation. 413
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 20
6. PVC pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust and moisture before installation. Installation shall be as recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer.
7. PVC pipe shall be installed so that there will be a small amount of excess length in the pipe to compensate for contraction and expansion of the pipe. This shall be accomplished by "snaking" the pipe in the trench during installation.
8. Center load pipe with small amounts of backfill to prevent arching and slopping under pressure. Leave joints exposed for inspection during testing.
9. No water shall be permitted in the pipe until inspections have been completed and a period of at least 24 hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing.
10. Plastic to metal connections shall be made with plastic male adapters and female metal adapter, hand tightened, plus one turn with a strap wrench. Teflon tape or approved equal shall be used on all threaded PVC to metal joints.
11. Gasket Joint: Use gasket lube as recommended by pipe manufacturer.
12. Solvent Weld Joint: The Contractor must make solvent weld joints with nonsynthetic bristle brush in the following sequence:
a. Apply a liberal, even coat of purple PVC primer to the pipe and fitting immediately before applying the solvent.
b. Apply a liberal even coat of solvent to the inside of the fitting and then to the outside of the pipe, making sure that the coated area is equal to the depth of the fitting socket. Section 20 - Landscaping 20.15 1/1/16 3. c. Insert the pipe quickly into the fitting and turn the pipe approximately onequarter (1/4) turn to distribute the solvent and remove air bubbles. Hold the joint for approximately fifteen (15) seconds so the fitting does not push off the pipe.
d. Use a clean rag and wipe off all excess solvent.
e. To prevent disturbing the last completed joint, the pipe must not be twisted when making subsequent joints.
f. Allow at least fifteen (15) minutes setup time for each welded joint before moving.
13. Threaded joints shall be wrapped with Teflon tape as per manufacturer’s instructions.
14. Flush all debris out of pipe prior to installing valves and heads. 414
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 21
15. Install detectable marking tape 12” above main line pipe along the entire length of the main line run, including main line branches and irrigation crossover sleeves.
16. When utilizing existing main line, make connections to new main line using longbarrel self-restraint repair couplers.
G. Line Clearance
1. Irrigation lines shall have a minimum horizontal and vertical clearance of four (4) inches from each other. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over one another.
2. Horizontal and vertical clearance of irrigation lines from lines from other trades shall be as per local codes and regulations.
3. Line clearances shall be inspected and approved by the District prior to backfilling trenches.
H. Joint Restraint System
1. Install Joint Restraint System as per details and manufacturer’s specifications.
I. Gate Valves
1. Install as gate valves as per details and manufacturer's specifications.
2. Install where shown on Drawings. Locate, in valve boxes, twelve (12) inches from walk, curb, header board, etc., for easy access unless otherwise noted on drawings.
3. Install one gate valve per valve box. Provide extension units as required as per details. Install valve boxes in shrub planting areas whenever possible.
4. Install a T. Christy I.D. water quality tag on all gate valves. Attach the identification tags to the valve stem using a nylon cable tie.
5. It is the intent of the irrigation design to minimize valve boxes within the turf field area. When valve boxes are required to be installed in the soccer field, the contractor shall submit proposed locations to Landscape Architect to review and approve prior to installation
J. Quick Coupler Valve
1. Install as quick coupler valve as per details and manufacturer's specifications.
2. Install where shown on Drawings. Locate, in valve boxes, twelve (12) inches from walk, curb, header board, etc., for easy access unless otherwise noted on drawings.
415
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 22
3. Install one quick coupler valve per valve box. Provide extension units as required as per details. Install valve boxes in shrub planting areas whenever possible.
4. Install a T. Christy I.D. water quality tag on all gate valves. Attach the identification tags to the valve stem using a nylon cable tie.
5. It is the intent of the irrigation design to minimize valve boxes within the turf field area. When valve boxes are required to be installed in the turf field, the contractor shall submit proposed locations to Landscape Architect to review and approve prior to installation
K. Electric Remote-Control Valves
1. Install with 2-wire decoder and pressure regulator as per details and manufacturer's specifications.
2. Install where shown on Drawings. Locate valve boxes twelve (12) inches from, and perpendicular to walk, curb, header board, etc., for easy access.
3. Install one (1) remote control valve per valve box as per detail. Provide extension units as required so as valve is protected by adjacent native soil.
4. Install valve boxes in shrub planting areas wherever possible.
5. Provide twenty-four (24) inch expansion loop at all electrical connections wrapped neatly along interior wall of valve boxes.
6. Install a T. Christy I.D. tags on all valves identifying the controller and station number of the valve and water quality. Attach the identification tags to the valve stem using a nylon cable tie.
7. It is the intent of the irrigation design to minimize valve boxes within the turf field area. When valve boxes are required to be installed in the turf field, the contractor shall submit proposed locations to Landscape Architect to review and approve prior to installation
L. Master Valve and Flow Sensor
1. Install shall be in accordance with the corresponding detail in the Standard Drawings.
a. Install with a minimum upstream and downstream length of straight pipe per manufacturer’s specifications
2. Install with 2-wire decoder and sensor decoder per details and manufacturer’s specifications.
3. Install a T. Christy I.D. tags on all valves identifying the controller and station number of the valve and water quality. Attach the identification tags to the valve stem using a nylon cable tie.
416
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 23
4. Contractor shall be responsible to calibrate flow sensor per manufacturer’s specifications.
a. Run flow test on each completed irrigation remote control valve to identify actual field flow using the controller learned flow system capabilities.
Contractor shall work with manufacturer’s representative as needed to perform accurate flow test.
b. Contractor shall use field flow test results to schedule flow zones on controller system as part of schedule programing.
M. Automatic Controller
1. Install as per manufacturer's specifications, drawings and details.
2. Controller shall be securely mounted in the location as indicated on the Drawings or approved by the District in such a manner that all normal operations can be conveniently made by the operator.
3. The Contractor shall properly ground the controllers per contract documents and in accordance with N.E.C and local codes and as per manufacturer’s specifications.
4. The Contractor shall take all decoder cables to the controller and make all required connections for their installation.
5. Contractor shall be responsible to program controller per contract documents. Run flow test for each control valve and use to program flow zones. Schedule remote control valves to maximize system pump efficiency and minimize system run times.
a. The irrigation schedule provided per contract documents shall be used as a guide only. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to adjust controller watering schedules based on actual site conditions including but not limited to plant species, soil conditions, slope, weather, irrigation application method, etc. b. At no time shall the contractor allow the pooling or runoff of water on the site due to length of irrigation cycle. Adjust run and soak times as needed to avoid pooling of water and runoff.
N. 2-Wire Decoder Cable
1. Install 2-wire decoder cable in conduit. Route along supply line piping wherever practical.
2. No cable splices shall be allowed between controller and valves and between valve to valve that are less than 500 feet apart.
417
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 24
3. Use one waterproof splice pack per splice. Indicate all splices on the “As-built” plan. Cable splice connections shall be per manufacture specifications.
4. Where control wires pass under paving, they shall pass through a Schedule 40 PVC sleeve.
5. Ground decoder 2-wire cable per manufacturer’s specifications.
6. Install twenty-four (24) inch service loop neatly coiled inside the perimeter of the valve box to allow for valve, decoders and splices to be pulled to surface for servicing. Coil service loop neatly along inside wall of valve box.
O. Conduit
1. PVC Schedule 40 conduit with 2-wire decoder cable shall be installed as shown on plans and adjacent to irrigation mainline wherever possible.
2. The ends of the conduits, whether shop or field cut, shall be reamed to removed burrs and rough edges. Cuts shall be made square and true.
3. Install conduit couplers onto pipe ends when in direct contact with 2-wire decoder cable.
4. The ends of the conduit shall be capped until the pulling of wiring is started.
Conduit shall be free of soil and debris.
5. Conduit bends, except factory bends, shall have a radius of not less than six times the inside diameter of the conduit.
6. Install a one-quarter (1/4) inch polypropylene pull tape in conduit. Loop pull tape into each valve box and splice box.
7. When utilizing existing conduit, the contractor will remove existing control wire, vacuum debris from conduit prior to installing new 2-wire cable through existing conduit. Install electric boxes as shown and as needed to facilitate installing new 2-wire cable in existing conduit.
P. Controller Earth Ground
1. Install earth grounding in accordance to Article 250 of the National Electrical Code and as per manufacturer’s specifications.
2. Ground rods shall be driven a minimum of ten (10) feet into the ground in a vertical or oblique position. The angle of the rod relative to the vertical shall be no more than 45-degree angle.
3. Ground plates shall be installed in a horizontal position a minimum of 30” below ground level.
418
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 25
4. Grounding conductors shall be installed to avoid sharp bends. When bends are required to pass through buildings and equipment, they must have a minimum angle of 90º and a minimum radius of 8”, which equates to a standard 1-1/2” PVC sweep conduit elbow.
5. Ground rods shall be installed in soils with minimum moisture content of 15% within the sphere of influence. Use supplemental irrigation as needed to meet this requirement.
6. Use “Earth Contact Materials” as needed and as per manufacturer’s specifications to obtain desired soil resistivity.
7. Use permanent welded connections to connect grounding conductors to ground rods. Solder shall not be used for this connection.
8. The grounding grid shall be field tested to verify that resistance readings are no more than 10 ohms.
Q. 2-Wire Decoder Earth Ground
1. Install 2-wire decoder system earth grounding in accordance manufacturer’s specifications.
R. Valve Boxes
1. Valve boxes installed in decomposed granite areas shall be tan colored; valve boxes installed in planter areas shall be green colored.
2. Install valve boxes in shrub planter areas wherever possible.
3. Install valve boxes in groupings as shown to facilitate long-term maintenance.
Contractor to stake out dimensions of each valve box bank location for review and approval by Landscape Architect prior to installation.
4. Install valve boxes as per details unless otherwise noted on plans.
5. It is the intent of the irrigation design to minimize valve boxes within the soccer field area. When valve boxes are required to be installed in the soccer field, the contractor shall submit proposed locations to Landscape Architect to review and approve prior to installation
S. Electric Pull Boxes
1. Pull boxes must be installed at the following locations:
a. At all 2wire decoder cable splices, except splices made in valve boxes. b. At every 5th bend or at intervals not to exceed one hundred and fifty (150) feet (150’) along any 2wire decoder cable path, whichever comes first. 419
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 26
c. Within five feet (5’) of irrigation controllers or within five feet (5’) of cabinets housing one (1) or more controllers.
d. At conduit stub outs.
e. At the ends of conduit crossover sleeves. Include eighteen-inch (18”) of 2wire decoder cable loop along inside of pull box.
f. At other locations shown on the Plans.
g. The tops of all pull boxes must be flush with the surrounding finished grade. h. When utilizing existing conduit to install new 2-wire decoder cable, Contractor shall be responsible to install electric pull boxes as needed to facilitate installation.
i. It is the intent of the irrigation design to minimize electric boxes within the turf field area. When electric boxes are required to be installed in the turf field, the contractor shall submit proposed locations to Landscape Architect to review and approve prior to installation.
2. When approved by the District, the Contractor may install additional pull boxes to facilitate the work. Additional pull boxes installed for the contractor’s convenience will be at the Contractor’s expense.
T. Irrigation Heads
1. Install irrigation heads as detailed on the Drawings. Irrigation heads to be installed in this work shall be as per approved submittals.
2. Irrigation heads shall be installed plumb and vertical to finish grade unless otherwise noted on plan.
3. Replace all clogged nozzles with new nozzles.
4. Adjust rotor, rotator arcs and radii as needed to prevent overspray onto hardscapes, walkways, buildings, etc.
5. Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maximum indicated on the Drawings. In no case shall the spacing exceed the maximum recommended by the manufacturer.
Adjust radii to obtain head to head coverage as per manufacturer’s specifications
6. Swing joints shall be in accordance with the details and approved submittals.
7. Swing joints for heads shall be the same size as the inlet opening of the sprinkler body.
8. Add additional heads as needed to provide head to head coverage with no additional cost to the District.
420
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 27
U. Irrigation Head Replacement – Turf Field
1. The contractor shall remove existing irrigation heads, clean and return to District per drawing notes.
2. Cap existing swing joint risers to prevent dirt and debris from entering irrigation system piping.
3. Flag or mark by approved methods location of irrigation head to be replaced.
4. After finished grade is established in soccer fields, install new rotors per contract documents.
5. Flush irrigation lines clear of dirt and debris prior to installing nozzles.
6. Install nozzles and adjust radii and arc as per plan.
7. Contractor shall be responsible to make final head layout adjustments as needed based on actual field conditions at no additional cost to District.
3.05 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
A. The Contractor shall flush and adjust all irrigation heads for optimum performance and to prevent over-spray onto walks, windows, roadways, and buildings as much as possible.
B. If it is determined that adjustments in the irrigation equipment shall provide proper and more adequate coverage, the Contractor shall make such adjustments after written approval by the District. Adjustments shall include changes in head locations, nozzle size and degrees of arc as required without additional contract costs.
C. If it is determined that any irrigation equipment is improperly installed, the contractor shall reinstall the equipment to conform to construction documents.
D. All irrigation heads shall be set perpendicular to finished grades unless otherwise designated on the Drawings.
3.06 TESTING OF THE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
The Contractor shall request the presence of the District at least two (2) working days in advance of testing or as noted below.
A. Existing Main Line Pressure Test in Turf Fields - BASELINE
1. Contractor shall perform baseline pressure test on existing main line in soccer field to be retained and protected prior to start of work.
1.) Contractor shall provide a proposed method to perform pressure test based on requirements listed here within to Landscape Architect for approval prior to start of work.
421
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 28
2.) Contractor shall comply to contract document requirements for Main Line Pressure Test.
B. Main Line Pressure Test
1. Except for non-rigid pipelines and lateral irrigation lines, pressure testing for leakage must be performed on all supply lines installed by the Contractor.
2. Pipelines must be tested in place and all open ends of the pipeline and fittings must be plugged or capped prior to testing.
3. The Contractor must notify the District at least twenty-four (24) hours prior to performing any pressure test. Pressure test must be performed only between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. except that no pressure tests shall be made on Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays unless otherwise approved in writing by the District.
4. Test all pressure lines and connections to remote control valves and gate valves under hydrostatic pressure of one hundred and twenty (120) pounds per square inch.
5. Pipelines to be tested must be filled with water, and a pressure gauge must be connected to the pipeline. The pipe must then be placed under a pressure of one hundred twenty (120) pounds per square inch, after which the source of pressure must be cut off, leaving the line under the required pressure.
6. The pressure gauge must be calibrated from zero (0) to two hundred (200) pounds per square inch (psi) in five (5) pound increments and must be accurate within a tolerance of two (2) pounds.
7. The Contractor must provide the necessary pump and equipment required for this test.
8. The pipeline must be tested under the required pressure for a period of two (2) hours. The pressure gauge must remain in place until each test period has been completed.
a. Leaks that develop in the tested portion of the system must be located and repaired after each test period when a drop of more than two (2) pounds is indicated by the pressure gauge when testing pipe over one hundred feet (100’) in length. There must be no pressure drop permitted when testing pipe from one (1) foot to one hundred feet (100’) in length. b. After such leaks have been repaired, the two (2) hour pressure test must be repeated and additional repairs made until pressure test passes.
9. If testing by means of water pressure, air must be expelled from the pipe prior to testing.
422
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 29
10. Tests on pressure lines must be completed prior to backfilling; however, sufficient backfill must be placed in trenches between fittings to insure the stability of the line under pressure.
a. In all cases, fittings and couplings must be open to visual inspection for the full period of the test. No testing shall be done until the last solvent welded joint has had twenty-four (24) hours to cure.
11. All hydrostatic tests shall be made only in the presence of the District. No pipe shall be backfilled, except for center loading, until it has been observed, tested and approved in writing by the District.
a. Should any work be covered up before such observation and tests are completed, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, uncover the work; and after it has been observed, tested and approved, he then shall make all repairs with such materials as required to restore all work disturbed to original and proper condition.
12. Contractor must disinfect potable water lines according to AWWA standards.
C. Repairs and Coverage
1. All leaks that develop and all defective material in any portion of the irrigation system installed by the Contractor must be repaired or replaced by the Contractor.
2. The entire system must be checked and, if necessary, adjusted for uniform and complete coverage after installing the sprinklers.
3. The risers for sprinklers on slopes must be set approximately perpendicular to the slope. Each series of sprinklers must be installed, and test operated. Nozzles of all sprinklers and bubblers must be adjusted for proper rate of flow and coverage.
Sprinklers and/or bubblers must be relocated as required to produce uniform coverage.
4. A coverage test shall be performed after the irrigation system is completed, an irrigation water audit has been performed and recommended adjustments to the irrigation system have been made.
5. Furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct any inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from the Drawings or where the system has been willfully installed as indicated on the Drawings, when it is obviously inadequate without bringing this to the attention of the District.
6. The sprinkler coverage test shall be completed and approved before landscape material is planted.
3.07 TEMPORARY REPAIRS
A. The District reserves the right to make temporary repairs as necessary to keep the irrigation system in operating condition. The exercise of this right shall not relieve 423
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 30
the Contractor of his responsibilities under the terms of the guarantee as herein specified.
3.08 IRRIGATION WATER AUDIT
A. The Contractor shall conduct an Irrigation Water Audit using a Certified Irrigation Auditor after the final field observation has been completed and all irrigation components are installed in accordance with the plans and specifications and the irrigation system is accepted by the District.
B. The Irrigation Water Audit shall be conducted in accordance with the latest California Code of Regulations, Title 23, Division 2, Chapter 2.7, Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance.
C. Contractor shall incorporate Irrigation Water Audit results while programing Irrigation Controller for specific control zones including but not limited calculations for Zone Flow, Precipitation Rates, Irrigation Efficiency and Distribution Uniformity.
D. The Irrigation Water Audit shall be included in a binder complete with:
1. Cover Sheet with Location, Date, Owner and Certified Irrigation Auditor contact information.
2. Irrigation System Evaluation Checklist
3. Sprinkler Evaluation Data Sheet for each zone
4. Other information as required by latest California Code of Regulations, Title 23, Division 2, Chapter 2.7, Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance.
E. Contractor shall be responsible to make recommended adjustments to the irrigation system based on Irrigation Water Audit Report, at no additional cost to owner when adjustments required are due to the Contractors installation inaccuracies of irrigation head placement.
F. Submit Irrigation Water Audit with Close Out Documents.
3.09 MAINTENANCE
Provide maintenance as per SECTION 02970 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE.
3.10 CLEAN-UP
Clean up shall be made as each portion of work progresses. Refuse and excess dirt shall be removed from site. All walks and paving shall be broomed or washed down, and any damage sustained to the work of others shall be repaired to original conditions acceptable to the District.
3.11 OBSERVATION PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. The Contractor shall operate each system in its entirety for the District at time of final observation. Any items deemed not acceptable shall be reworked to the complete satisfaction of the District.
424
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 31
B. The Contractor shall show evidence to the District that the District has received all accessories, charts, Record Drawings and equipment as required before final observation can occur.
3.12 INSPECTION SCHEDULE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect in advance for the following observations according to the time indicated:
1. Staking points of connection, power connections to controllers, location of irrigation main lines, remote control valves– two (2) working days
2. Staking of laterals and irrigation heads - two (2) working days
3. Sprinkler head coverage test and finish grade review prior to planting - two (2) working days
B. No site visits shall commence without all items noted in previous Observation Reports, either completed or remedied, unless such compliance has been waived.
Failure to accomplish punch list tasks or prepare adequately for desired observations shall make the Contractor responsible for reimbursing the Landscape Architect at his current billing rates per hour, plus transportation costs.
C. Normal progress observations shall be requested by the Contractor from the Landscape Architect as per observations listed in specifications SECTION 02905 - LANDSCAPE INSTALLATION.
D. No final observation shall commence without Record Drawings. In the event the Contractor calls for an observation without Record Drawings, without completing previously noted corrections or without preparing the system for observations, he shall be responsible for reimbursing the District at the hourly rate in effect at the time of the observation (plus transportation costs) for the inconvenience. No further observations will be scheduled until this charge has been paid.
3.13 FINAL TEST
A final test of the irrigation system shall be made in the presence of the Landscape Architect at the end of the landscape maintenance period. The system will be accepted only when the entire system performs as set forth on the drawings and specifications and all contract documentation has been received and approved.
A. CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTS
G. Record Drawings; The Contractor must maintain neat and accurate record drawings in conformance with these specifications.
1. Drawings shall be subject to the inspection of the District at all times and must be kept current with all work instructions, change orders, substitutions, and construction adjustments shown thereon and initialed by the inspector. 425
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 32
2. Immediately following the start of the Plant Establishment Period, the Contractor must submit to the District one (1) full size set of Record Drawings. a. Record drawings will be reviewed by the Landscape Architect and shall be returned to the Contractor with comments for revisions, if necessary. b. Notes and dimensions must be drafted on the record drawings in a neat and legible manner. Drawings must be of sufficient quality to allow further black and white reproduction of the original to be clear.
c. Illegible, inaccurate, or incomplete record drawings will be returned to the Contractor for revisions.
3. The work will not be formally accepted until the Record Drawings are approved by the Landscape Architect. Upon approval by the Landscape Architect, two (2) bond sets of record drawings must be delivered to the District in good and acceptable condition prior to final acceptance of the Work.
H. Controller Charts: The Contractor must provide two (2) sets of 11” x 17” charts for each controller. One copy must be placed on the inside of the controller enclosure door. The second copy must be provided to District maintenance personnel.
1. The base plan for the controller charts must be the approved irrigation Record Drawings.
2. Each controller chart must show the as-built condition of the area controlled by the automatic controller.
3. All symbols must be readable at the final reduced size.
4. The controller chart must include:
a. Connections to existing water lines (point-of-connections). b. Location of backflow preventer(s) and controller(s)
c. Routing of pressure lines and sleeves (show typical station offset and/or dimensions on record drawings)
d. Routing of irrigation conduit and pull boxes
e. Locations of remote control valves, gate valves, and quick coupling valves (show station offset and/or dimensions on record drawings) f. Other items as directed by the District.
5. The chart must be color-coded to easily identify each valve and the respective hydrozone area it irrigates.
426
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 33
6. When completed and approved, the chart must be hermetically sealed between two (2) pieces of 10 mil plastic, minimum.
7. Each chart must be completed and approved prior to final inspection of the irrigation system.
I. Operation and Maintenance Manual: The Contractor must provide two (2) binders complete with the following information for all irrigation components installed on project:
1. Operating instructions
2. Parts list and breakdown diagram
3. Complete copy of “Approved” irrigation submittals
4. Controller charts and irrigation scheduled for plan establishment and mature water requirements.
5. Irrigation audit report.
6. Acceptance letter that Owner has received “Equipment to be Furnished” and “Training” from contractor as per contract documents.
7. Certificate of Completion
8. Written guarantee and certificate of insurance from the Contractor.
D. Equipment to be Furnished: The Contractor must deliver all tools and equipment called for on the plans and described herein to the District.
1. Two (2) key sets for locking irrigation controller.
2. Two (2) valves of each size and type used.
3. Two (2) decoders of each type used.
4. Five (5) rotors of each type used.
5. Five (5) pop up sprinklers of each type used.
6. Five (5) complete nozzle sets of each type used.
7. Five (5) bubblers of each type used.
8. One Hundred (100) feet of drip tubing for each type used.
9. Ten (10) drip emitters for each type used
427
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02811 September 2024 Irrigation
02811 - 34
10. Two (2) sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling and adjusting each type of sprinkler used.
11. Two (2) sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling and adjusting each type of joint restraint used.
12. Two (2) lock and key sets for controller enclosures (keyed as per District specifications)
13. Two (2) quick coupler keys and matching hose swivels
14. Two (2) 60” isolation valve opening keys
15. Four (4) security keys for locking valve boxes
16. Two (2) hand-held remote-controls transmitters and cases
17. Two (2) hand-held 2-wire decoder programmers
E. System Walkthrough and Training with District: After the system has been installed and approved and close out documents have been received by the District, the Contractor shall schedule an onsite system walkthrough and training with the District.
The system walkthrough will be no less than 2 hours and shall cover the following:
a. Operation of controller system including programing of features and alert systems.
b. Operation of hand held remote for remote operation of field valves include testing of field valves.
c. Operation of field decoder programmer including programing sample decoder. d. Calibration of flow sensor and running flow test.
e. Maintenance requirements for valves, sprinklers and nozzles.
END OF SECTION
428
334000 - 1
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323113 September 2024 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities
SECTION 333000
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Locate and verify invert elevation of existing pipe at proposed point of connection.
B. Provide and install gravity sewer pipe.
C. Provide and install sewer cleanouts.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction - Section 312316
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with section 013300, Submittal Requirements:
1. Submit choice of pipe and appurtenances for review prior to ordering.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. California Plumbing Code (CPC), latest edition.
B. City Standards
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Sewer pipe and appurtenances shall be delivered, handled, and stored in a way that prevents damage to the pipe and prevents entry of foreign materials into the pipe.
B. Regardless of cause, damaged pipe and appurtenances shall be replaced with new products at the expense of the Contractor.
1.6 GRADE AND ALIGNMENT CONTROL
A. General
1. Necessary installation procedures, as needed to ensure pipes are installed at the location and grade staked in the field, shall be used. 429
334000 - 2
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323113 September 2024 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities
B. Method
1. One of the following methods shall be utilized to control grade and alignment:
a. Batter boards set at 25' intervals with a string line set over at least three batter boards.
b. Electronic ‘Laser’ beam set at manhole locations or grade breaks (with at least three grade points shall be checked to verify the set grade). c. Survey instrument set at cleanout to site, between cleanouts at the set grade.
C. Equipment
1. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment necessary to install and inspect the pipe installation. Grade rod shall be held to a minimum in all cases.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE AND SERVICE LATERALS
A. Sewer pipe 6 inches in diameter and smaller shall be PVC, SDR 35 with gasketed joints, or approved equal.
B. Pipe shall be green in color.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. As shown and detailed on the Drawings.
B. Lids shall be concrete, marked "sewer".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Construction of the private sewer system shall conform to the requirements of the CPC, as well as City Standards, Drawings, and Details.
3.2 VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. The exact location and depth of existing sewer lines is unknown and is shown based upon the best information available.
B. Prior to ordering any materials, Contractor shall pot hole in the vicinity of each point of connection and crossing with existing utilities to verify the exact location (horizontal and vertical) and size of the existing sanitary sewer/utilities. This information shall be presented in the form of a field sketch through the RFI process 430
334000 - 3
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323113 September 2024 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities
for review and confirmation by the Engineer that the existing line and proposed design is adequate to serve the project.
3.3 PIPE DISTRIBUTION AND HANDLING
A. Pipe distribution shall not take place too far in advance of laying operations.
B. Pipe shall be handled carefully to avoid damage. Pipe handling by mechanical equipment shall be in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations.
C. The spigot ends of pipes and fittings that utilize polyvinyl chloride or polyurethane factory applied flexible compression joints shall not rest on the ground or pavement.
D. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment, in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe materials, protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall pipe materials be dropped or dumped into the trench.
3.4 PIPE LAYING
A. No pipe shall be laid in water or when trench conditions are unsuitable to allow performing the job in a professional manner.
B. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying and shall progress uphill.
C. Pipe deflections where permitted shall not exceed that recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
D. Pipe and fittings which do not allow sufficient space for joints shall be removed and replaced with pipe and fittings of proper dimensions.
E. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe. If necessary, a heavy, tightly woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operations, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. If foreign materials do enter the pipe, they shall be removed continuously as work progresses.
F. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of laid pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug.
G. Wherever the jointing material specified is cement, two or more lengths of pipe shall be in place ahead of each joint before such joint is finished. 431
334000 - 4
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 323113 September 2024 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities
3.5 TESTING
A. All new sewer laterals shall be tested in accordance with procedures specified in the CPC, Section 712.2 (Water Test) as described herein. The tests shall be observed by the Owner's Representative.
B. The water test shall be applied to the drainage and vent systems either in its entirety or in sections. If the test is applied to the entire system, openings in the piping shall be tightly closed, except the highest opening, and the system filled with water to point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged, except the highest opening of the section under test, and each section shall be filled with water, but no section shall be tested with less than a ten (10) foot (3,048 mm) head of water. In testing successive sections, not less than the upper ten (10) feet (3,048 mm) of the next preceding section shall be tested, so that no joint or pipe in the building (except the uppermost ten (10) feet (3,048 mm) of the system) shall have been submitted to a test of less than a ten (10) foot (3,048 mm) head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for not less than fifteen
(15) minutes before inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at points.
C. A City Inspector shall witness all sewer utility testing.
3.6 CLEAN UP
A. Remove all debris and stains resulting from the work of this section.
END OF SECTION
432
311000 - 1
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 311000 September 2024 Site Preparation
SECTION 311000
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Locate and mark existing utilities within the limits ofwork.
B. Remove existing trees, including root ball, within the area of work, as indicated on plan.
C. Remove existing surface improvements within the area of work as indicated on plan.
D. Remove existing subsurface utilities, including appurtenances, within the area of work, as indicated on plan.
E. Properly dispose of all excess and unsuitable material.
F. Strip all areas within the limits of work as indicated on the plan.
G. Deploy and subsequently remove temporary construction area and tree protection fencing at completion of construction.
H. Install and maintain erosion control measures.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Earthwork - Section 312000
B. Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction - Section 312316
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Data:
1. If the year of the adoption or latest revision is omitted from the designation, it shall mean the specification, manual or test designation in effect the date the Notice to Proceed with the work is given.
B. Caltrans Standard Plans and Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TREE PROTECTION
A. Erect and maintain temporary fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. Remove fence when construction is complete.
B. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within drip line of remaining trees.
C. Do not permit vehicles or equipment within drip line of remaining trees. 433
311000 - 2
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 311000 September 2024 Site Preparation
D. Do not excavate within drip line of remaining trees, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation edge as possible.
1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.
2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil.
3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2-inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues.
4. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. Backfill with soil as soon as possible.
F. Also see Tree Protection requirements outlined on Construction Drawings.
RESTORATION
A. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to the Owner. B. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, as directed by the Owner.
1. Employ a qualified, licensed arborist, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.
2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by the Owner.
3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Install tree protective fencing around trees designated to be saved, prior to the start of demolition work. See Civil and Landscape Plans and Specifications. Install fencing as far from the trunk as possible to allow for construction of proposed improvements. Maintain fencing throughout duration of construction.
B. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees.
C. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
D. The area above the natural ground surface shall be cleared of all vegetation such as trees not designated to be saved, roots, brush, grass, weeds, and all other objectionable material including buildings (footings, slabs, etc.), asphalt, concrete, curbs, mulch, headerboard, ramps, stairs, utility piping (including appurtenances), bike racks, fences/gates, site furniture, and similar materials, within the limits of construction.
E. All concrete and asphalt pavements and other existing improvements within the areas to be developed should be removed during site demolition. At the Contractor’s option, salvaged class 2 aggregate base material may be stockpiled for reuse.
F. Existing building foundations should be entirely removed below final subgrade in the building pad areas, and to a depth of at least three feet in areas outside the building footprints. The excavations beneath the planned building area should be backfilled with engineered fill. See also Section 312000.
G. The natural ground surface within the entire site, except within the tree protection zones, shall be grubbed to a depth necessary to remove all stumps, buried logs, roots over 2-inches in diameter, and all other unsuitable material. Stumps shall be removed to a depth of at least 24” below original grade.
H. Existing utilities designated to be removed that do not conflict with proposed improvements may be 434
311000 - 3
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 311000 September 2024 Site Preparation
abandoned in place. If they are abandoned in place, the utility shall be slurried and capped. Any portions of these utilities that conflict with the new improvements shall be removed.
I. All unsuitable material shall be removed from the construction area and disposed of properly. Comply with hazardous material abatement regulations that may apply.
3.3 DEMOLITION SEQUENCING
A. Permanent and/or temporary facilities may need to be installed prior to demolition to limit utility outages. Any planned and or necessary interruption of existing utilities shall be coordinated with the Construction Manager. A minimum of one week’s notice shall be provided before any suchinterruption.
3.4 STRIPPING
A. The upper soils containing grass, small roots, and other vegetation, to a depth of 4+/- inches, shall be stripped from and removed from the site. Deeper stripping may be required in localized areas to remove roots or other concentrations of organic material.
B. Dust control shall be performed by the contractor during all phases of the construction. Payment for the dust control work involved shall be considered included in the items of work and no additional allowance will be made therefor.
C. The Geotechnical Engineer will observe the clearing and stripping operations and recommend the maximum depth of stripping required and any additional excavation necessary due to contamination of materials or concentrations of vegetation.
D. All suitable stripped material in excess of those needed to backfill landscape and/or planter areas shall be removed from the project site and disposed of properly.
3.5 CLEARED MATERIAL
A. The objectionable cleared material including buildings (footings, slabs, etc.), curbs, mulch, headerboard, ramps, utility piping (including appurtenances), bike racks, fences/gates, site furniture, etc., shall be removed from the project site and disposed ofproperly.
3.6 STRIPPED MATERIAL
A. Excess and objectionable stripped material including asphalt and concrete pavements, grass/vegetation, etc. shall be removed from the project site and disposed of properly. Contractor is encouraged to recycle the existing aggregate base materials for use in hardscape areas only (nonbuilding).
3.7 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
A. Install and maintain erosion control devices/measures, including, but not limited to drainage inlet protection, fiber rolls, silt fence, etc., until such time as all vegetative and hard surface improvements within their individual tributary areas are completed. Provide periodic maintenance of all such devices, and following completion of said improvements, remove and dispose of erosion control devices and repair surfaces to match final specified surface finishes.
B. Any areas where ground has been disturbed, and where final landscaping has not been installed by October 15, will require the installation and maintenance of erosion control devices by the Contractor, as generally noted in the Erosion Control Notes on theplans.
C. Additionally, the Contractor shall implement and adhere to the requirements of the Water Pollution Control Plan (WPCP), including, but not limited to, rain event inspections, storm water discharge sampling and analysis, vehicle/equipment maintenance, and cleaning,etc.. 435
311000 - 4
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 311000 September 2024 Site Preparation
3.8 SURFACE IMPROVEMENT AND UTILITY REMOVAL AND RELOCATION A. The Contractor shall have Underground Service Alert mark all existing public utilities as a first order of work. Additionally, the Contractor shall have a locating service mark all existing private utilities within the limits of work.
B. The Contractor shall pothole each existing utility that will be extended or reused at its point of cut and removal to confirm the actual locations and depths as well as all proposed crossings as shown on the drawings. Notify Engineer of results via the RFI process.
C. Existing water, sewer, storm drain, gas, electrical, communication (data) services and laterals to be abandoned or removed as indicated on the plans shall be provided with replacement facilities as to comply with construction sequencing requirements and limit utility/service outages as required by the Owner.
D. See Mechanical, Electrical, and Civil plans for detailed removal/replacements requirements.
3.9 CLEAN UP
A. Remove all debris and stains resulting from the work of thissection.
END OF SECTION
436
334000 - 1
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 334000 September 2024 Site Drainage
SECTION 334000 – SITE DRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide and install storm and roof drain pipe andappurtenances.
B. Provide and install subdrain pipe and appurtenances.
C. Provide and install storm and roof drain system structures, including clean-outs, drainage inlets, etc.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction - Section312316
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 013300, Submittal Requirements:
1. Submit choice of storm drain pipe and cleanouts, drainage structures, and drainage grates to Engineer for review prior to ordering.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANDHANDLING
A. Storm drain and roof drain piping and structures shall be delivered, handled, and stored in a way that prevents damage to the pipe/structures, or the entry of foreign materials into the pipe.
B. Regardless of cause, damaged pipe/structures shall be replaced with new products at the expense of the Contractor.
1.5 GRADE AND ALIGNMENT CONTROL
A. General
1. The necessary installation procedures that will insure the pipes are installed at the location and grade staked in the field shall be used.
B. Method
1. One of the following methods shall be utilized to control grade andalignment:
a. Batter boards set at 25' intervals with a string line set over at least three batter boards. b. Electronic ‘Laser’ beam set at structure locations or grade breaks. At least three grade points shall be checked to verify the set grade.
c. Survey instrument set at structure to site between structures at the setgrade.
C. Equipment
1. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment necessary to install and inspect the pipe installation.
Grade rod shall be held to a minimum in all cases.
437
334000 - 2
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 334000 September 2024 Site Drainage
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STORM DRAIN PIPE
A. Storm drain and roof pipe 8” to 12" in diameter shall be Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC), SDR 35, Series 46, High Density Polyethylene (HDPE),Type S, or approved equal.
B. Storm drain and roof pipe 4” to 6" in diameter and shall be Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC), SDR 35, Series 46, or approved equal
C. Storm and roof drain pipe 3” diameter and smaller shall be Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC), SCH 80, or approved equal.
D. Subdrain pipe shall be perforated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC), SDR 35, Series 46, or approved equal.
E. PVC pipe (SDR 35) shall be have with water tight, gasketedcouplings.
F. PVC pipe (SCH 80) shall have solvent weld couplings.
G. PVC pipe shall have fittings (ells, tees, wyes, etc.) compatible to the pipetype.
2.2 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
A. Drainage inlets (SDDI) noted on the plan as “1212”, “1818” or “2424” shall be as manufactured by Oldcastle Infrastructure, or approved equal, and shall be of the model/size indicated on the plans. Grates shall be heavy duty in hard surfaced areas with ½” maximum opening bolt down grates, and standard duty in planting areas, with bolt downgrates.
B. SDDIs placed in concrete areas shall be installed with a pavingnotch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All construction of the storm drain shall conform to the requirements of the City of EurekaStandards.
3.2 VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. The exact location and depth of the existing storm drains is unknown and is shown based on the best information available.
B. Prior to ordering of any materials, Contractor shall pot hole in the vicinity of each point of connection and crossing with existing utilities to verify the exact location (horizontal and vertical) and size of the existing storm drain/existing utilities. This information shall be presented in the form of a field sketch through the RFI process for review and confirmation by the Engineer that the proposed design is adequate to serve the project.
3.3 STORM DRAIN PIPE
A. Trenching shall be as indicated in Section 312316, Trenching, Backfilling andCompaction.
B. Pipe laying shall be as indicated in paragraph 3.05herein.
C. No pipe shall be installed which is cracked, damaged or otherwise unsuitable for use in the opinion of the Engineer.
438
334000 - 3
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 334000 September 2024 Site Drainage
3.4 STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
A. Excavation and backfill shall conform to Section 312316, Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction.
B. Joints shall be grouted to form a watertight seal. Any visible leaks shall be permanently plugged.
3.5 PIPE LAYING
A. No pipe shall be laid when trench conditions are unsuitable to allow performing the job in a professional manner.
B. Where ground water occurs, pumping shall continue until backfilling has progressed to a sufficient height to prevent flotation of the pipe. Water shall be disposed of in such a manner as to cause no property damage or be a hazard to public health in accordance with Section 31 2316, Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction.
C. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying, and shall progress uphill/upslope.
D. Pipe deflections where permitted shall not exceed that recommended by the pipemanufacturer.
E. If High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe is used, the exterior ribbed wall may be removed to avoid conflicts with other utilities. The extent of the removal shall not exceed 18” measured along the length of the pipe.
F. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe. If necessary, a heavy, tightly woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operations, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. If foreign materials do enter the pipe, they shall be removed continuously as work progresses.
G. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of laid pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug.
3.6 CLEAN UP
A. Remove all debris and stains resulting from the work of thissection.
B. Properly repair all surfaces disturbed by construction.
END OF SECTION
439
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02324 Semptember 2024 Trenching
02324-1
SECTION 02324
TRENCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary to provide all work, complete in place, as indicated on Drawings and specified herein.
Work specified in this Section includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. Section includes trenching, backfilling and compacting for water and storm drain utilities.
B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections
1. SECTION 02300 – EARTHWORK
2. SECTION 02510 – WATER DISTRIBUTION
3. SECTION 02630 – STORM DRAINAGE
C. Related Documents
1. ASTM D 1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3); 2000.
2. County of Sacramento Standard Construction Specifications.
3. Geotechnical Investigation for site is available in accordance with Information Available to Bidders.
4. Office of Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Construction Safety Orders.
5. California Code of Regulations Title 8: Construction Safety Orders.
D. Definitions
1. Bedding: Material from bottom of trench to bottom of pipe.
2. Initial Backfill: Material from bottom of pipe to 12-inches above top of pipe.
3. Relative Compaction: Ratio, expressed as a percentage of field dry density as compacted to a maximum dry density of representative sample of the same material determined by American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Test Method D1557 (c).
440
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02324 Semptember 2024 Trenching
02324-2
4. Springline of Pipe: Imaginary line on surface of pipe at a vertical distance of ½ the outside diameter measured from the top or bottom of the pipe.
5. Subsequent Backfill: Material from 12-inches above top of pipe to subgrade of surface material or subgrade of surface facility or to finish grade.
6. Trench Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and within horizontal trench dimensions.
a. Authorized Trench Over-Excavation: Excavation below trench subgrade elevations or beyond indicated horizontal trench dimensions as shown on plans or authorized by the Owner’s Representative.
b. Unauthorized Trench Over-Excavation: Excavation below trench subgrade elevations or beyond indicated horizontal trench dimensions without authorization by the Owner’s Representative. Unauthorized excavation shall be without additional compensation.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow submittal procedures outlined in Section 01330 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B. Product Data: Provide data for Products specified.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of pipe mains, valves, connections, and invert elevations. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.
F. Submit name of imported materials source.
G. Deliver samples of backfill and fill materials to Owner’s Representative in quantities sufficient for testing. Deliver at least 15 days prior to use.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform all work and materials to the recommendations or requirements of these Technical Specifications and plans and meet the approval of the Owner’s Representative.
B. Conform all work to the appropriate portion(s) of County of Sacramento Standard Construction Specifications.
441
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02324 Semptember 2024 Trenching
02324-3
C. Percentage of compaction specified shall be the minimum acceptable. The percentage represents the ratio of the dry density of the compacted material to the maximum dry density of the material as determined by the procedure set forth in ASTM D 1557.
D. The Owner’s Representative will perform observations and tests required to enable him to form an opinion of the acceptability of the trench backfill. Correct the trench backfill that, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, does not meet the requirements of these Technical Specifications.
E. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall assess and evaluate all site conditions and layout the work before any earthwork shall begin.
B. Protect open, trenches, and utility structure excavations with fences, covers and railings to maintain safe pedestrian and vehicular traffic passage.
C. Stockpile on-site and imported backfill material temporarily in an orderly and safe manner.
D. Provide dust and noise control in conformance with Division 1 General Requirements.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warrant against settlement for a period of one year after the date of final acceptance, and shall repair damage caused by settlement within that time. For the purpose of this Specification, settlement will be deemed to have occurred if on paved surfaces, the depression falls 3/8-inches below the average of the sides of the uncut portion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE BEDDING AND INITIAL BACKFILL
A. Conform to Sacramento County Standards
.
2.02 WARNING TAPE
A. See Section 33 1300 – Water Distribution.
2.03 SUBSEQUENT BACKFILL
A. Conform to on-site or imported structural backfill in Section 02300 – Earthwork. 442
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02324 Semptember 2024 Trenching
02324-4
2.04 CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL (CDF) (in trenches)
A. Provide non-structural CDF, from bottom of trench to finish subgrade of subbase or base material, that can be excavated by hand and produce unconfined compressive 28- day strengths from 50-psi to a maximum of 150-psi. Provide aggregate no larger than 3/8-inch top size. The 3/8-inch aggregate shall not comprise more than 30% of the total aggregate content.
B. Cement: Conform to the standards as set forth in ASTM C-150, Type II Cement.
C. Fly Ash: Conform to the standards as set forth in ASTM C-618, for Class F pozzolan.
Do not inhibit the entrainment of air with the fly ash.
D. Air Entraining Agent: Conform to the standards as set forth in ASTM C-260.
E. Aggregates need not meet the standards as set forth in ASTM C-33. Any aggregate, producing performances characteristics described herein will be accepted for consideration. The amount of material passing a #200 sieve shall not exceed 12% and no plastic fines shall be present.
F. Provide CDF that is a mixture of cement, Class F pozzolan, aggregate, air entraining agent and water. CDF shall be batched by a ready mixed concrete plant and delivered to the job site by means of transit mixing trucks.
G. The Contractor shall determine the actual mix proportions of the controlled density fill to meet job site conditions, minimum and maximum strengths, and unit weight.
Entrained air content shall be a minimum of 4.0%. The actual entrained air content shall be established for each job with the materials and aggregates to be used to meet the placing and unit weight requirements. Entrained air content may be as high as 20% for fluidity requirements.
H. Mix design shall meet the Owner’s Representative’s approval.
2.05 CONCRETE STRUCTURE BEDDING AND BACKFILL
A. Precast Structures: Same materials to the same heights as specified for pipe bedding and backfill, or other material approved by the Owner’s Representative.
B. Poured-in-Place Structures:
1. Bedding: Bedding shall meet the approval of the Owner’s Representative. In general, bedding is not required, pour bases against undisturbed native earth in cut areas and against engineered fill compacted to 90% relative compaction in embankment areas.
2. Side Backfill: On-site or imported structural fill meeting the requirements given in Section 02300.
443
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02324 Semptember 2024 Trenching
02324-5
2.06 FILTER FABRIC
A. Filter Fabric:
1. Mirafi 140N (Mirafi Inc., Charlotte, NC) (Tel. 800-438-1855) or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION AND EXAMINATION
A. Underpin adjacent structures, which may be damaged by excavation Work, including utilities.
B. Maintain trench crossings for vehicular and pedestrian traffic at street crossing, driveways and fire hydrants.
C. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.
D. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage.
E. See Section 02300 Earthwork for additional requirements.
3.02 TRENCHING AND EXCAVATION
A. Existing PCC or AC Areas: Cut PCC or AC to full depth at a minimum distance of 12-inches beyond the edge of the trench.
B. Excavate by hand or machine. For gravity systems begin excavation at the outlet end and proceed upstream. Excavate sides of the trench parallel and equal distant from the centerline of the pipe. Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter.
C. Excavation Depth for Bedding: Minimum of 4-inches below bottom of pipe or as otherwise allowed or required by the Owner’s Representative, except that bedding is not required for nominal pipe diameters of 2-inches or less.
D. Excavation Width at Springline of Pipe:
1. Up to a nominal pipe diameter of 24-inches: Minimum of twice the outside pipe diameter, or as otherwise allowed or required by the Owner’s Representative.
2. Nominal pipe diameter of 30-inches through 36-inches: Minimum of the outside pipe diameter plus 2-feet, or as otherwise allowed or required by the Owner’s Representative.
3. Nominal pipe diameter of 42-inches through 60-inches: Minimum of the outside pipe diameter plus 3-feet, or as otherwise allowed or required by the Owner’s Representative.
444
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02324 Semptember 2024 Trenching
02324-6
E. Over-Excavations: Backfill trenches that have been excavated below bedding design subgrade, with approved bedding material.
F. Comply with the Owner’s limitations on the amount of trench that is opened or partially opened at any one time. Do not leave trenches open overnight without the approval of the Owner.
G. Where forming is required, excavate only as much material as necessary to permit placing and removal of forms.
H. Bottoms of trenches will be subject to testing by Owner’s Representative. Correct deficiencies as directed by the Owner’s Representative.
I. Grade bottom of trench to provide uniform thickness of bedding material and to provide uniform bearing and support for pipe along entire length. Remove stones to avoid point bearing.
3.03 CONTROL OF WATER AND DEWATERING
A. Be solely responsible for dewatering trenches and excavations and subsequent control of ground and surface water. Provide and maintain such pumps or other equipment as may be necessary to control ground water and seepage to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative and the Owner until backfilling is completed.
B. Dewater during backfilling operation so that groundwater is maintained a least one foot below level of compaction effort.
C. Obtain the Owner’s Representative’s approval for proposed control of water and dewatering methods.
D. Reroute surface water runoff away from open trenches and excavations. Do not allow water to accumulate in trenches and excavations.
E. Maintain dewatering system in place until dewatering is no longer required.
3.04 BRACING AND SHORING
A. Conform to California and Federal OSHA requirements.
B. Place and maintain such bracing and shoring as may be required to support the sides of the excavations for the proper protection of workmen; to facilitate the work; to prevent damage to the pipes and appurtenances being constructed; and to prevent damage to adjacent structures or facilities. Remove all bracing and shoring upon completion of the work.
C. Be solely responsible for all bracing and shoring and, if requested by the Owner, submit details and calculations to the Owner. The Owner may forward the submittal to the Owner’s Representative, the Consulting Engineer and/or the California 445
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02324 Semptember 2024 Trenching
02324-7
Division of Industrial Safety for their review. The Contractor's submittal shall include the basic design, assumed soils conditions and estimation of forces to be resisted, together with plans and specifications of the materials and methods to be used, and shall be prepared by a civil engineer or structural engineer registered in California. No excavations in trench section or around structures shall precede a response to the submittal by the Owner.
D. Be solely responsible for installing and extracting the sheathing in a manner which will not disturb the line, grade, or backfill compaction or operation of the utility being installed or adjacent utilities and facilities.
3.05 PIPE BEDDING
A. Obtain approval of bedding material from the Owner’s Representative.
B. Pipe Bedding shall be per the City of Sacramento Standards and per the Geotechnical Investigation report.
C. Upon completion of bedding operations, and prior to the installation of pipe, notify the Owner’s Representative, who will inspect the bedding layer. Do not commence pipe laying until the Owner’s Representative has approved the bedding.
3.06 WARNING TAPE
A. Install in accordance with Section 033 1100 – Water Distribution.
3.07 BACKFILLING
A. Obtain approval of backfill material from Owner’s Representative.
B. Bring initial backfill up simultaneously on both sides of the pipe, so as to prevent any displacement of the pipe from its true alignment. Initial Backfill shall be per the City of Sacramento Standards and per the Geotechnical Investigation report. Jetting or ponding of initial backfill material will not be permitted.
C. Bring subsequent backfill to subgrade or finish grade as indicated. Subsequent Backfill shall be per the City of Sacramento Standards and per the Geotechnical Investigation report. Jetting or ponding of subsequent backfill material will not be permitted.
D. Do not use compaction equipment or methods that produce horizontal or vertical earth pressures that may cause excessive pipe displacement or damage the pipe.
E. Utility backfill shall be inspected and tested by the Owner’s Representative during placement. Cooperate with the Owner’s Representative and provide working space for such tests in operations. Backfill not compacted in accordance with these specifications shall be re-compacted or removed as necessary and replaced to meet the specified requirements, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative and the 446
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 02324 Semptember 2024 Trenching
02324-8
Owner prior to proceeding with the Project.
3.08 CLEANUP
A. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile during progress of work.
B. Remove unused stockpiled materials. Leave area in a clean and neat condition.
Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water.
C. Upon completion of utility earthwork all lines, manholes catch basins, inlets, water meter boxes and other structures shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, rubbish, debris and obstructions of any kind to the satisfaction of the Owner.
D. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water.
E. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all excess excavated material to a suitable site. The proper and legal disposal shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
447
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project SECTION 02316 September 2024 Fill and Backfill
02316-1
SECTION 02316
FILL AND BACKFILL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Filling and compacting for concrete paving and rigid concrete pavements subject to traffic loadings.
B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities to utility main connections.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions and Special Provisions for Air and Water Pollution Control and Dust Control
B. Section 02260 – Landscape Grading
C. Section 02515 – Site Concrete
D. Section 02811 – Irrigation: Trenching and Backfill
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates; 1996a.
B. ASTM D 1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN mlm3)); 1991 (Reapproved 1998).
C. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 1998.
D. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1996.
E. ASTM D 2974 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture, Ash, and Organic Matter of Peat and Other Organic Soils; 1996.
E. ASTM D 3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1996.
F. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils; 1998.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need.
B. Verify that survey benchmarks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
448
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project SECTION 02316 September 2024 Fill and Backfill
02316-2
2.01 FILL MATERIALS
A. Engineered Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site.
1. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris.
2. Conforming to ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol CL, ML, SM, SP.
B. Engineered Fill: Imported borrow.
1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C 136, within the following limits:
a. 3 inch sieve: 100 percent passing.
b. 3/4 inch sieve: 70 to 100 percent passing.
c. No. 4 sieve: 50 to 100 percent passing.
d. 40 sieve: 30 to 100 percent passing.
e. 50: 30 to 100 percent passing.
f. No. 200: 30 to 70 percent passing.
2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris.
3. Conforming to ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol CL, ML, SM, SP.
4. Liquid limit < 30. Plasticity Index < 12.
5. Organic content less than 3%.
6. Expansion potential (UBC 18-2) less than 20.
7. Maximum Dry Density more than 105 pcf.
C. Topsoil: See Section 02260.
D. Class 2 Aggregate Base: See Section 02721Aggregate Base Course.
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Where import fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site.
B. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.
B. See Section 02260 for additional requirements.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Scarify all areas to receive engineered fill and subgrade surfaces to a depth of 12 inches.
B. During wet weather or unstable soil conditions, the Contractor shall have the Landscape Architect observe all areas to receive engineered fill and subgrade surfaces prior to implementation of remedial measures.
449
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project SECTION 02316 September 2024 Fill and Backfill
02316-3
1. Upon approval of the Landscape Architect, all unstable areas to receive engineered fill and subgrade surfaces shall be disked or ripped to a minimum depth of 24 inches to allow exposed soil to dry. Depth and frequency of disking and ripping shall be determined by the Landscape Architect upon observation of the unstable soil conditions.
2. Upon approval of the Landscape Architect, all unstable areas to receive engineered fill and subgrade surfaces shall be over excavated 12 to 24 inches below existing grade and be replaced with aggregate base or coarse gravel underlain by geotextile fabric. Final depth of removal shall be determined by the Landscape Architect upon observation of the unstable soil conditions. The geotextile fabric shall be Amoco 2016 (woven) or approved equivalent, placed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. The Contractor shall have the Landscape Architect observe and probe bottom of finish subgrade for its stability within existing trench fill extending to a width of 15 feet on each side of existing sanitary sewer pipelines beneath new pavement improvements.
1. If loose or soft material is encountered, the existing trench fill shall be removed to a depth of two feet below finished subgrade elevation. The Contractor shall have the Landscape Architect observe and probe the bottom of the excavation for its stability prior to placing compacted engineered fill. If loose or soft material is encountered, geotextile/stabilizing fabric, Amoco 2016 (woven) or approved equivalent, shall be placed at the bottom of the excavation.
D. Recompact between 88 and 92 percent of maximum dry density at a uniform moisture content between 2 and 5 percent above optimum moisture content at the time of compaction.
E. Recompact to 95 percent of maximum dry density at a uniform moisture content between 2 and 5 percent above optimum moisture content at the time of compaction in the upper 6 inches of subgrade in all areas to support asphalt or rigid concrete pavements.
F. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation.
3.03 FILLING
A. Fill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials.
B. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated.
C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.
D. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.
E. Uniformly moisture-conditioned to between 2 and 5 percent above optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.
F. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches loose thickness.
G. Correct areas that are over-excavated.
H. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated:
1. Between 88 and 92 percent of maximum dry density at a uniform moisture content between 2 and 5 percent above optimum moisture content at the time of 450
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project SECTION 02316 September 2024 Fill and Backfill
02316-4
compaction.
2. At 95 percent of maximum dry density in the upper 6 inches of subgrade in all areas to support asphalt or rigid concrete pavements.
I. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to construction vehicular traffic.
3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS
A. Use engineered fill unless otherwise specified or indicated.
B. Engineered fill at areas to receive rigid concrete pavements:
1. Fill up to subgrade elevations.
2. Maximum depth per lift: 8 inches, loose thickness.
3. Between 88 and 92 percent of maximum dry density at a uniform moisture content at between 2 and 5 percent above optimum moisture content at the time of compaction.
4. Compact upper 6 inches of subgrade to minimum 95 percent of maximum dry density at between 2 and 5 percent above optimum moisture content at the time of compaction.
C. At Lawn Areas: See Section 02260 Landscape Grading
D. At Planting Areas Other Than Lawns: See Section 02260 Landscape Grading E. Trench Backfilling:
1. See Storm Drain Pipe, Potable Water Supply Specifications
2. See Section 02811 Irrigation
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of General Filling: See Section 02260 Landscape Grading B. Top Surface of Filling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 0.05 foot from required elevations.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Compaction density testing will be performed on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D2922.
B. Results will be evaluated in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 1557 ("modified Proctor" ).
END OF SECTION
451
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Asphalt Paving
32 12 16 - 1
SECTION 32 12 16
ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing asphalt paving for the parking lot, to include:
1. Asphaltic concrete paving, wearing, binder and base course.
2. Surface sealer.
3. Aggregate subbase course.
B. Related sections can include, but may not be limited to:
1. Section 33 13 13 Concrete Paving
2. Section 33 42 31 Stormwater Area Drains and Inlets
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Asphalt Institute:
1. AI MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot- Mix Types
2. AI MS-19 - Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM D946 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction.
2. ASTM D3381 - Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction.
C. Caltrans Standard Specifications:
1. Standard Specifications of the State of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department of Transportation, CALTRANS, latest edition.
D. Geotechnical Report.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Paving: Designed in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product information and mix design.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.
B. Mixing Plant: Conform to Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.
C. Obtain materials from same source throughout.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Cement: In accordance with the Geotechnical Report .
B. Aggregate for Base Course Mix: Shall be per Geotechnical Report. 452
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Asphalt Paving
32 12 16 - 2
C. Aggregate for Wearing Course Mix: Shall be 1/2” aggregate in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.
D. Tack Coat: In accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications.
E. Slurry Seal: In accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 37-3.
F. Aggregate for Slurry Seal: In accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 37-3.
2.02 ASPHALT PAVING MIX
A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly.
B. Base Course: In accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.
C. Wearing Course: In accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS
A. Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to beginning of Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify compacted subgrade subbase is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
D. Verify gutter drainage grilles and frames, manhole frames, and are installed in correct position and elevation.
3.02 SUBBASE
A. Prepare subbase in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.
3.03 PREPARATION – SURFACE
A. Clean surface free of dirt, water, and debris.
B. Fill cracks greater than 1/8 inch.
C. Correct areas of subgrade failure.
3.04 PREPARATION - PRIMER
A. Apply primer in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.
1. Immediately before applying the prime coat, all loose dirt and other objectionable material shall be removed from the full width of the surface to be primed. The bituminous material including solved shall be uniformly applied with a bituminous distributor at the rate of 0.25 to
0.50 gallon per square yard depending on the base course surface texture. The type of bituminous material and application rate shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to application.
2. Following the application, the primed surface shall be allowed to dry not less than 24 hours without being disturbed or for such additional time as may be necessary to permit the drying out of the prime coat until it will not be picked up by traffic or equipment. This period shall be determined by the Owner’s Representative. The surface shall then be maintained by the Contractor until the surfacing has been placed. Suitable precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to protect the primed surface against any damage during this interval, including supplying and spreading any sand necessary to blot up excess bituminous material.
3. The Contractor shall furnish vendor’s certified test reports for each carload, or equivalent of bituminous material shipped to the project. The report shall be delivered to the Owner’s Representative before permission is granted for use of the material. The furnishing of the vendor’s certified test report for the bituminous material shall not be interpreted as basis for final acceptance. All such test reports shall be subject to verification by testing samples of materials received for use on the project.
453
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Asphalt Paving
32 12 16 - 3
3.05 PREPARATION - TACK COAT
A. Apply tack coat in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications.
3.06 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - DOUBLE COURSE
A. Place wearing course within twenty-four hours of placing and compacting binder course. When binder course is placed more than twenty-four hours before placing wearing course, clean surface and apply tack coat before placing wearing course.
B. Compact each course by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.
C. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks.
3.07 TOLERANCES
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/8 inch measured with 10-foot straight edge, and 1/8” with an 18” straight edge.
1. Contractor shall conduct a flood test of asphalt surface in the presence of Owner’s Representative. Bird bath areas 1/16” deep or more remaining after a period of one (1) hour in 70 degrees or hotter weather shall be remediated. String line test shall help determine if a low area is simply adjacent to a high area or is indeed a low area.
2. Low areas shall be ground down and high areas shall be pathed per manufacturer.
3. Finish surface planarity shall be inspected and adjusted by the Contractor using the string line method. A mason’s line held tight between two workmen shall check for separations between the mason’s line and the finished surface that are equal to or greater than the tolerances specified. The entire finished surface shall be checked with the mason’s line in increments no greater than 5 linear feet. Areas of separation shall be identified with depth of separation indicated.
B. Maximum allowable variance of surface smoothness – crowned surfaces: plus or minus 1/4 inch.
C. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch.
D. Variation from Indicated Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for correction of defective paving and paving not meeting the above tolerances at no additional cost to the County.
3.08 PROTECTION OF FINISED WORK
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for 48 hours or until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F.
B. Comply with requirements of Division 1 Contract Closeout.
END OF SECTION
32 12 16
454
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100% Stormwater Curbside Drains and Inlets
September 2024 33 42 33 - 1
SECTION 33 42 31
STORMWATER AREA DRAINS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section includes but is not limited to the construction of stormwater area drains and inlets, playground underdrains, and associated work.
B. Scope of work: The general extent of the landscaping is shown on the Drawings and may include, but is not limited to the following:
C. Related sections can include, but may not be limited to:
1. Section 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving
2. Section 33 13 13 Concrete Paving
1.02 REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials
B. State of California Department of Transportation (Caltrans) Standard Specifications, latest edition.
C. City of West Sacramento Improvement Standards.
D. Yolo County Improvement Standards.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
C. Drain and Inlet: Include plans, elevations, invert information, sections, details, and frames and covers.
D. Field quality -control test reports
E. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.
F. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at horizontal scale of not less than 1-inch equals 50 feet and vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet.
Indicate structures and piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing system piping.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. 455
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100% Stormwater Curbside Drains and Inlets
September2024 33 42 33 - 2
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C. Handle drains and inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
D. Handle castings according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE
A. Concrete for inlets shall conform to Section 51-4.02 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Division IV Section 13 of City of West Sacramento Construction Specifications, and Yolo County Improvement Standards.
B. Concrete for encasement of area drain shall conform to the City of West Sacramento Standard Specifications and Details.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing steel shall conform to Section 52-1.02B of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.
2.03 GRATE AND FRAME
A. Grate and Frame assemblies shall conform to Division IV Section 13 of the City of West Sacramento Standard Construction Specification.
2.04 GROUT
A. Grout and cement mortar shall conform to Section 51-1.02 per the Caltrans Standard Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DRAIN AND INLET
A. Concrete box portion of the inlet shall be cast to the proper grade in a maximum of two placements of concrete. Use of grout to adjust the drop inlet frame to the proper grade will not be permitted without specific approval by the Engineer.
B. All reinforcing bar supports, or other approved means, shall be used to hold the frame at proper grade during the final placement of concrete. Broken pieces of concrete or other debris shall not be used for this purpose.
C. Concrete construction, including framework shall conform to Section 51 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications. The interior of the inlet shall be an ordinary surface finish; exposed top surfaces shall have a Class I surface finish.
D. Drain and Inlet execution shall conform to Division IV Section 13 of City of West Sacramento Construction Specifications.
456
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100% Stormwater Curbside Drains and Inlets
September 2024 33 42 33 - 3
E. A public notice shall be placed adjacent to all drain inlets in accordance with City of West Sacramento Standard Detail #306.
3.02 GRATE AND FRAME
A. Type of grates and frames shall conform to Division IV Section 13 of City of West Sacramento Construction Specifications.
B. Grates and frames shall be installed according to Division IV Section 13 of City of West Sacramento Construction Specifications.
3.03 SUBDRAINAGE CONNECTION
A. Ribbon drain shall be connected to drains and inlets per the connection detail on the Plans.
3.04 AREA DRAIN
A. Area drain shall be installed according to Division IV Section 13 of City of West Sacramento Construction Specifications.
B. Concrete encasement shall conform to Division IV Section 13 of City of West Sacramento Construction Specifications.
END OF SECTION
457
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 1
SECTION 32 13 13
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes site concrete, including but not limited to pavements, walls, footings, and sub slabs.
B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services to complete the work as indicated on the drawings, and in accordance with these specifications. Work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Concrete formwork
2. Concrete reinforcement
3. Cast-in-place concrete items:
a. Concrete paving, sidewalks, ramps, stairs, pads, curbs, mow bands, etc. b. Miscellaneous concrete.
c. All imbeds including anchor bolts, tiedowns, hold downs with bolts, straps, and sleeves.
C. Related sections can include, but may not be limited to:
1. Section 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving
2. Section 33 42 31 Stormwater Area Drains and Inlets
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Caltrans Standard Specifications - Standard Specifications of the State of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department of Transportation (Caltrans), latest edition.
B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
C. ACI - American Concrete Institute, Manual of Concrete Practice.
D. CBC – California Building Code
E. Geotechnical Report
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Percent Compaction: ASTM D1557, percentage as shown on the Drawings of the maximum inplace dry density of the same material.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1, Section 01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
B. Shop Drawings Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures.
C. Concrete Design Mixes:
1. The preparation of design mixes will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Mix designs may be prepared by the supplier and shall be certified by a Civil Engineer registered in California.
Mix designs will be designed by the supplier and approved by the Owner’s Representative.
2. Written reports will be submitted to the Owner’s Representative of each proposed mix for review. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Owner’s Representative.
3. Adjustment of Concrete Mixes:
458
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 2
a. Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results and other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Owner’s Representative. Provide submittals as in A above. Submit adjustment designs a minimum of 48 hours ahead of schedule for concrete production.
D. Product Data: Manufacturer’s current catalog cuts and specifications for the following:
1. Expansion joint filler, sealant, backer rod and bond breaker, including manufacturer’s standard color chart for sealant
2. Air-entrainment.
3. Curing Compound.
4. Fly Ash or Slag
5. MDO plywood made for forming.
E. Samples:
1. MDO plywood made for forming, one 6”x 6” piece.
2. Exposed aggregate.
F. Certificates:
1. Reinforcing Steel: Certificate of compliance
2. Concrete Mix Design: Ticket for each batch delivered showing the following:
a. Mix identification.
b. Weight of cement, aggregate, water, and admixtures, aggregate sizes/proportion, and air entrainment.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) A-615 "Standard Specifications for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement," and "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures," publication American Concrete Institute (ACI) 315-65 of the American Concrete Institute.
B. Comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in ACI, "Recommended Practice of Concrete Formwork, ACI-347", and Section 2606, 1997 California Building Code (CBC).
C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated on Drawings, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in Work. Use selected materials to obtain the required finish. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.
D. Provide complete forms of such strength and construction as to prevent any spread, shifting, or settling when concrete is deposited, and tight enough to avoid any leakage or washing out of cement mortar.
E. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in placing the types of concrete specified and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section. For finishing of exposed surfaces of the concrete, use only thoroughly trained and experienced journeymen concrete finishers.
F. Conform to Section 90 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.
G. The Contractor shall contact Owner’s Representative of any discrepancies between field conditions and plans prior to proceeding with Work. The written dimension on Drawings shall supersede the graphic presentation. Dimensions are from back of curb, center line, base lines or as noted on the plans. All field adjustments must be approved by Owner’s Representative 459
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 3
prior to installation. All walks and curbs shall be established in the field for review and approval prior to concrete pours. The Contractor shall layout the area or form work for review by Owner’s Representative. If approval is not obtained, the Contractor is responsible for removal of any unauthorized field adjustments.
H. Transitions of curves to other curves, and curves to straight line tangents, shall be smooth and continuous.
I. Place expansion joint and score joints as shown on plan. Adjustments in the field shall be made only with the approval of Owner’s Representative.
J. Where new concrete paving is placed adjacent to curbs or existing concrete paving, a doweled joint shall be provided between the new concrete paving and curbs and existing concrete paving and curbs.
K. Sleeving shall be coordinated with concrete work and between all trades. Refer to irrigation plan for sleeving location.
L. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing, at no additional cost to Owner, any disturbed existing landscape designated to remain which resulted from construction of this project.
M. Some materials may require a several-week order lead time. Contractor is responsible for determining any and all ordering lead times and providing required materials at the project site in a timely manner. No unapproved substitutions will be allowed. Contact Owner’s Representative im- mediately if a specified material is not available.
N. Mock-up:
1. One 4-foot square mockup for all poured in place finishes, including concrete paving and vertical walls, as shown on the drawings. Mock-ups shall also include finish, jointing, thickness, and edging.
2. Mock-ups shall be reviewed and approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to commencing full work. Approved mock-up shall serve as a standard of quality for judging the acceptance of paving on the Project and may remain as part of the work.
O. Lines and Levels: To be established by a licensed Surveyor or registered Civil Engineer.
P. Mix Standards: Conform to the ACI Manual and the Portland Cement Association's "Design and Control of Concrete Mixes".
Q. Design of Concrete Mix: Employ approved commercial testing laboratory to design concrete mixes as follows:
Item
Minimum
Cement
Content
28-Day
Minimum
Strength
Maximum
Slump
Aggregate
Size
Maximum
Water /
Cement Ratio
Curbs and
Footings 517 lb./cy. 3,000 PSI 4 in. ¾ in 0.55
Exterior
Walkways 517 lb./cy. 3,000 PSI 4 in. ¾ in 0.45
Walls and
Paving 564 lb./cy. 4,000 PSI 4 in. ¾ in 0.45
R. Fly Ash:
1. Source Control: The following sources of ash are not to be used:
a. Ash from a peaking plant instead of a base loaded plant. b. Ash from plants burning different coals or blends of coal. c. Ash from plants burning other fuels (wood chips, tires, trash) blended with coal. d. Ash from plants using oil as a supplementary fuel.
460
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 4
e. Ash from plants using precipitator additives, such as ammonia. f. Ash from start-up or shut-down phases of operation.
g. Ash from plants not operating at a "steady state."
h. Ash that is handled and stored using a wet system.
2. Fly ash used in concrete should be as consistent and uniform as possible. Fly ash to be used in concrete should be monitored by a quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) program that complies with the recommended procedures in ASTM C31.(6) These procedures establish standards for methods of sampling and frequency of performing tests for fineness, loss on ignition (LOI), specific gravity, and pozzolanic activity such that the consistency of a fly ash source can be certified.
1.06 QUALIFICATION OF INSTALLER
A. Installer shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required and shall be completely familiar with the products and their installation as specified on the Drawings and in this Section. Installer shall be present at all times during progress of Work of this Section and shall direct all Work performed.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivered Mixes: Coordinate delivery so that mixes may be immediately poured upon arrival at site.
B. Components and Accessories:
1. Fittings and Reinforcements: Protect from rust, soil, and oil contamination at all times.
Store on pallets above ground.
2. Templates: Protect from damage. Test accuracy prior to each use.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordination: Coordinate all items of other trades to be furnished and set in place. Coordinate proper installation of all accessories embedded in the concrete and for the provision of holes, openings, etc., necessary to the execution of the work of the trades in ample time that progress of the work is not delayed.
1.09 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Placement: comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
B. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators.
C. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.
Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor’s option.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
461
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 5
3. Fog spray form, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Secure all pipe sleeves, anchors, and bolts, including those for angle frames, inserts, ties and other materials in connection with concrete construction, in position before concrete is placed.
B. Obtain information and instructions from other Trades and suppliers in ample time to schedule and coordinate the installation of items furnished by them to be embedded in concrete so provisions for their work can be made without delaying the project.
1.11 FORM CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Set form to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of Work so that forms can remain in place for twenty-four hours after concrete placement.
B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances:
1. Top of forms not more than one-eighth inch in ten feet vertical elevation.
2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis not more than one-fourth inch in ten feet horizontal width.
3. Circular or curved formwork shall be continuous, complete radii as indicated on Drawings. No straight segments in circular/curved formwork shall be accepted.
1.12 TESTS AND OBSERVATIONS
A. The following tests shall be made by Owner’s testing laboratory or by a certified Special Inspector as determined by the Owner. Special inspections for Concrete Construction shall be in accordance with Section 1704.4 and Table 1704.4 of the 2013 CBC and as noted below:
1. Periodic Inspection of reinforcing steel and placement.
2. Cement: Mill analysis and test reports by supplier certifying cement conforms to Specifications is acceptable in lieu of tests at the discretion of Owner’s Representative.
3. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with testing laboratory.
4. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work.
5. Concrete Inspections:
a. Continuous Placement Inspection: Inspect for proper installation procedures. b. Periodic Curing Inspection: Inspect for specified curing temperature and procedures.
6. Strength Test Samples:
a. Sampling Procedures: ASTM C172.
b. Cylinder Molding and Curing Procedures: ASTM C31, cylinder specimens.
7. Concrete cylinders: Make and cure in accordance with ASTM C31. a. Record shall be made of the time cylinders were made and of locations of concrete from which the cylinders were taken.
b. Three identical cylinders shall be taken from each pour of 25 cubic yards or part thereof, being placed each day.
c. When the volume of concrete for any class of concrete would provide less than 5 sets of cylinders, take samples from five randomly selected batches, or from every batch when less than 5 batches are used.
d. Make one additional cylinder during cold weather concreting, and field cure. 462
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 6
8. Field Testing:
a. Slump Test Method: ASTM C143.
b. Air Content Test Method: ASTM C173.
c. Temperature Test Method: ASTM C1064.
d. Measure slump and temperature for each compressive strength concrete sample. e. Measure air content in air entrained concrete for each compressive strength concrete sample.
9. Cylinder Compressive Strength Testing:
a. Test Method: ASTM C39.
b. Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318.
c. Test one cylinder at 7 days.
d. Test two cylinders at 28 days.
10. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken.
11. Should tests show that concrete is below specified strength; the Contractor shall remove all such concrete. Full cost of removal of inferior concrete, its replacement with concrete of proper specified strength and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.13 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. ACI 301 "Structural Concrete for Building"
B. ACE 305 “Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting” C. ACI 306 “Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting”.
D. ACI 308 “Curing Concrete”
E. ACI 309 “Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete” F. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
G. ACI 347 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork”.
H. ACI 605 “Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting”.
I. ACI 614 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, and Placing Concrete".
J. ASTM C31 “Practices for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field”.
K. ASTM C33-86 "Specifications for Concrete Aggregate".
L. ASTM C94-89 "Specifications for Ready Mixed Concrete".
M. ASTM C143 “Test Method for Slump Portland Cement Concrete”.
N. ASTM C150 “Portland Cement”.
O. ASTM C309 “Specifications for Liquid Membrane-forming Compounds for Curing Concrete”.
P. Western Concrete Reinforce Steel Institute (WCRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice".
Q. Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with this Specification, the more stringent provisions shall govern.
R. California Building Code (CBC), latest edition.
S. Section 90 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
463
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 7
2.01 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed Billet Steel Bars, ASTM A-615, Grade 40 or 60, containing a minimum of 70% total recycled content, clean and free from rust, scale, or coating that will reduce bond.
B. Smooth Dowels for Joints: ASTM A615, Grade 40 smooth, billet-steel bars, shop painted with iron-oxide zinc-chromate primer.
C. Welded Wire Mesh: ASTM A-185 plain type and uncoated finish.
D. All reinforcement shall meet or exceed Geotechnical report requirements.
2.02 CONCRETE
A. Concrete Mix:
1. Ready-mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM C-94 and with aggregates comply with ASTM C-33 and Portland Cement ASTM C-150, Type II.
2. All mixes shall conform to applicable building code requirements listed herein or on the Drawings. All mix designs shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for approval before being used. Mix design shall show proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregate, and water and graduation of combined aggregates. Calcium chloride shall not be added to any mix.
3. Concrete shall be Class B per Caltrans Standards.
4. Cement: All cement shall be Portland cement Type II and shall be the product of one manufacturer. The temperature of cement delivered to the plant shall not exceed 150 degrees Fahrenheit.
5. Aggregates
a. Coarse aggregate shall have a minimum cleanliness value of 75. b. Fine aggregate shall have a minimum of sand equivalent of 75. c. Any suitable individual grading of coarse aggregates may be used.
6. Exposed Aggregate: Exposed hard, sound, durable, and free of all deleterious materials and staining qualities.
7. Water: All water shall be clean and free from deleterious matter.
8. Admixture: No admixture of any type shall be used without prior approval of the Owner’s Representative.
9. Concrete shall be as specified: Class B
a. 28-Day Minimum Strength: Refer to Table in Paragraph 1.5(R) above b. Concrete slump: Refer to Table in Paragraph 1.5(R) above c. Air Content: No air entrainment
B. Fly Ash: Pozzolanic admixtures, conforming to ASTM C618, Class C, with weight loss of ignition limited to not exceed 3 percent shall be used in mix designs to replace Portland Cement up to 15% by weight, unless noted otherwise on drawings.
1. Reference: ACI 211.4R-93.
C. Aggregate base for on-grade slabs:
1. Per the Standard Specifications
D. Water: Clean, potable (domestic) free from injurious amounts of salts, oils, acids, alkalis, organic materials, or other deleterious matter. Available from source determined by Owner’s Representative.
E. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.
464
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 8
F. Admixtures: Admixtures containing chlorides are not permitted. All admixtures shall be mixed in accordance with manufacture’s written recommendations.
A. All concrete mixes and related products shall meet or exceed Geotechnical report requirements.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Tie Wires: Black annealed, ASTM A-82, minimum 16 gauge.
B. Chains, Bolsters, Bar supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete.
C. Stirrup Steel: ASTM A-82.
D. Snap Ties: Snap-off metal of fixed length capable of leaving no metal within one and one-half (1 1/2) inches of surface nor causing fractures, spall or other defects larger than one (1) inch in diameter.
E. Expansion Joint Materials:
1. Premolded Joint Filler: ASTM D1751, non-extruding and bituminous type resilient filler, compatible with sealant, and having a "guide strip" removable depth gauge.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C290, non-snag sealant "Dynatred" by Pecora Corporation, (214) 278- 8158 or "Sonolastic Sealant Two-Part" by Sonneborn, (415) 889-9899, or equal. a. Color shall be selected by the Owner’s Representative from the manufacturer’s full color selection.
3. Bond Breaker: Pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
F. Forms:
1. Steel or wood of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal.
2. Use forms that are straight and free of distortions and defects.
3. Use flexible spring forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required.
G. Form Release Agent: Colorless non-staining, free from oils. Chemical agent shall not impair bonding of paint or other proposed coatings.
H. Form-Facing Materials:
1. All Surfaces: of sufficient strength to hold concrete properly in place and prevent leakage of water from forms.
2. Exposed Surfaces: Matte finish, coated, medium density overlay plywood made for forming.
No wood-textured finish will be permitted on exposed concrete unless specified as such.
3. For “Board Formed” concrete finishes rough-sawn nominal 2x6 boards shall be used, with surfaces sand-blasted to reveal natural grain. 1 x 6 may be used for gently curved faces, with sufficient bracing to prevent “pop-outs.” Texture shall be approved prior to pouring concrete.
I. Wood Headers:
1. Wood: Construction Heart grade rough Redwood header and stake or pressure-treated rough Douglas Fir stake.
2. Nails: Hot-dipped galvanized.
J. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I-D, Class A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that subgrade preparation for concrete paving has been 465
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 9
completed prior to commencement of work.
B. Surface Drainage:
1. Report in writing conflicts discovered on the site or prior work, which would prevent positive drainage. Correct prior to performing concrete work.
2. Do not permit finished paving surfaces to vary more than 1/4 in. measured with a 10 ft. metal straightedge, except at grade changes. No "birdbaths" or other surface irregularities will be permitted. Properly correct irregularities.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Templates: Use templates for all anchor plates, bolts, inserts and other items embedded in concrete. Accurately secure so that they will not be displaced during placing of concrete.
B. Piping and Conduit: Do not embed piping, other than electrical conduit, in structural concrete. Locate conduit to maintain strength of structures at maximum. Verify size, length, and location of electrical conduit.
C. Aggregate Base Course: Compact base course to thicknesses and relative compaction per Geotechnical report.
3.03 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT
A. Fabricate reinforcement in accordance with ACI-315, providing a minimum concrete cover of three inches or as specified in UBC, latest edition.
B. Place all reinforcement in the exact position shown on the Drawings and secure in position during the placing and compacting of concrete. Wire bars together with No.16-gauge wire with ties at all intersections except where spacing is less than twelve inches in each direction, in which case tie alternate intersections.
C. Place all sleeves, inserts, anchors and embedded items required for adjoining work or for its support prior to concreting. Fill voids in embedded items temporarily with readily removable material to prevent entry of concrete.
D. Give all contractors and subcontractors whose work is related to concrete or supported by it, ample notice, and opportunity to introduce and/or furnish embedded items before concrete placement.
E. Verify that concrete reinforcement may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the Shop Drawings, and the original design.
F. Bending:
1. Fabricate all reinforcement in strict accordance with the reviewed Shop Drawings.
2. Do not use bars with kinks or bends not indicated on the Drawings or on the reviewed Shop Drawings.
3. Do not bend or straighten steel in a manner that will injure the material.
4. Bend all bars cold.
5. Make all bends for other bars, including hooks, around a pin having diameter not less than six times the minimum thickness of the bar for number 8 and smaller and eight times the thickness for number 9 and larger.
G. Before the start of concrete placement, accurately place all concrete reinforcement, positively securing and supporting by concrete blocks, metal chairs or spacer, or by metal hangers.
H. Clearance:
1. Preserve clear space between bars of not less than one time the normal diameter of round bars.
2. In no case let the clear distance be less than 1 inch or less than 1-1/3 times the maximum size of aggregate.
466
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 10
3. Provide the following minimum concrete covering of reinforcement:
4. Concrete below ground deposited against forms: 3 inches.
5. Concrete deposited against earth: 3 inches.
6. Concrete elsewhere: as indicated on Drawings.
I. Splicing:
1. Horizontal bars:
2. Place bars in horizontal members with minimum laps at splices sufficient to develop the strength of the bars. Splice 40 bar diameters minimum.
3. Bars may be wired together at laps.
4. Wherever possible, stagger the splices of adjacent bars.
5. Wire fabric: Make all splices in wire fabric at least 1-1/2 meshes wide.
6. Other splices: Make only those other splices that are indicated on the approved Shop Drawings or specifically approved by Owner’s Representative.
J. Dowels/Anchor Bolts: Place all required steel dowels/anchor bolts and securely anchor them into position before the concrete is placed. Bending the dowels after placement of concrete will not be permitted.
K. Obstruction: In the event conduits, piping, inserts, sleeves, or any other items interfere with placing reinforcement as indicated on the Drawings, or as otherwise required, immediately consult Owner’s Representative and obtain review of new procedure before placing concrete.
3.04 CONCRETE FORMWORK CONSTRUCTION
A. Construct support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete.
B. Contractor assumes full responsibility in the removal of forms. The length of time forms must remain in place depends on the rate of time required for concrete to obtain a proper strength. Remove forms after the concrete is sufficiently hard to prevent damage to concrete.
C. Circular or curved formwork shall be continuous, complete radii as indicated on Drawings. No straight segments in circular/curved formwork shall be accepted.
D. Reuse of Forms:
1. Do not reuse forms if there is any evidence of surface wear or defect which would impair quality of surface.
2. Thoroughly clean and properly coat forms before reuse.
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Notification: Notify the Owner’s Representative at least 48 hours before placing concrete.
B. Placing Concrete:
1. Unless otherwise indicated or required by the Drawings, concrete paving shall be placed on compacted subgrade to thicknesses indicated on the Drawings to 95 percent compaction.
2. Place concrete in accordance with ACI-304 and Section 2605 of the California Building Code.
Immediately after depositing, compact concrete thoroughly by mechanical vibration. No vibrating of forms is allowed. Mixing shall be continuous, with no interruptions from the time the truck is filled until the time it is emptied. Concrete shall be placed within one and a half hours from the time water is first added.
3. Ensure anchors, seats, plates, and other items to be cast into concrete are placed, held securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.
4. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, etc. are not disturbed during concrete placement.
467
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 11
5. Pour concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
6. Lines and Grades: Elevations requiring accurate placement shall be set by a competent instrument man, using a professional type instrument.
7. For all concrete placed on soil, the subgrade shall be wet and compacted prior to placing.
8. Before placing concrete mixing, conveying, and finishing equipment, forms and reinforcing shall be well-cleaned. Wet form before placing concrete unless oiled forms are used.
3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, from excessively hot or cold temperatures, and from mechanical injury. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for a period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation – control material. Apply according to manufacturer’s instruction.
B. As soon as building flat work has hardened sufficiently to prevent injury to finish, apply an approved concrete curing agent in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
C. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Keep continuously moist for not less than seven (7) days.
D. Excessive cracking as determined by the Owner’s Representative which is aesthetically unacceptable or which will result in premature disintegration of paving shall result in replacement of concrete.
E. Removal of Forms: Remove no sooner than seven (7) days after each pour.
F. Conform to all applicable requirements for curing and protection of concrete, Sections 90-7 and 90-8 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.
G. Spraying: Spray concrete during the curing period as frequently as drying conditions may require.
H. Curing: Cure concrete in accordance with the ACI Manual of Concrete Practice. During curing period, maintain concrete above 70 degrees F. for at least 3 days or above 50 degrees F. for at least 5 days.
I. Damage and Defacement: Protect all concrete work against damage and defacement during subsequent construction operations until final acceptance.
3.07 CLEANING AND PATCHING
A. Removal: Remove all projecting fins, bolts, wire, nails, etc., not necessary for the work, or cut them back 1 in. from the surface and patch in an inconspicuous manner.
B. Snap Ties: Immediately after removal of forms, cut off snap ties extending from the face of concrete to at least 1 in. deep in the concrete. Fill or plug as detailed in Drawings.
C. Voids: Fill holes with a 1:3 cement/sand mortar with the same color as the adjoining concrete. Mix and place the mortar as dry as possible and finish flush with the adjacent surface.
D. Corrective Patching: See Section 3.08 below. Correct all defects in concrete work. Chip all voids to a depth of at least 1 in. with the edges perpendicular to the surface and parallel to form markings. Fill all voids, surface irregularities, or honeycombing by patching or rubbing. Ensure that all concrete surfaces repaired duplicate the appearance of the unpatched work.
E. Finishing: Work finish surface texture as specified below in Section 3.09.
3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Determination of defective concrete shall be made by the Owner or Owners Representative.
Their opinion shall be final in identifying areas to be replaced, repaired, or patched. 468
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 12
B. The Owner reserves the right to survey the flatwork if it is determined to be outside of the maximum tolerance for flatness. If the flatwork is found to be out of tolerance, then the Contractor will be required to replace concrete. The Contractor will be responsible for reimbursing the Owner for any surveying costs incurred. Determination of flatwork flatness, surveying and any remedial work must be completed far enough in advance so that the project schedule is maintained, delays are avoided, and the new flatwork or flatwork repairs are properly cured.
C. As directed by Owner, cut out and replace defective concrete.
D. All defective concrete shall be removed from the site. No patching is to be done until surfaces have been examined by the Owner and permission to begin patching has been provided.
Permission to patch any area shall not be considered waiver of right, by the Owner, to require removal of defective work, if patching does not, in opinion of Owner’s Representative, satisfactorily restore quality and appearance of surface.
E. Defective concrete is:
1. Concrete that does not match the approved mix design for the given installation type.
2. Concrete not meeting specified 28-day strength.
3. Concrete which contains rock pockets, voids, spalls, transverse cracks, exposed reinforcing, or other such defects which adversely affect strength, durability or appearance.
4. Concrete, which is incorrectly formed, out of alignment or not plumb or level.
5. Concrete containing embedded wood or debris.
6. Concrete having large or excessive patched voids which were not completed under Owner’s direction.
7. Concrete not containing required embedded items.
8. Excessive Shrinkage, Traverse cracking, Crazing, Curling; or Defective Finish. Remove and replace if repair to an acceptable condition is not feasible.
9. Concrete that is unsuitable for placement or has set in truck drum for longer than 90 minutes from the time it was batched.
10. Expansion joint felt that is not isolating the full depth of the concrete section and recessed as required for backer rod and sealant where required.
11. Concrete that is excessively wet or excessively dry and will not meet the minimum or maximum slump required per mix design.
12. Finished concrete with oil stains from equipment use, and or rust spots that cannot be removed.
13. Control joints (weakened planed joints) that do not meet the required minimum depth shown on the drawings.
F. Patching
1. Patching of concrete to repair or disguise flaws, imperfections, or other damage, shall commence only with the prior approval from the Owner and Owner’s Representative.
Patching color and finish shall conform to the original adjacent concrete color and finish, and the Owner’s Representative shall be the sole judge in this respect. 469
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 13
3.09 FINISHES
A. Medium Broom Finish:
1. Floating: Float surface once it has sufficiently stiffened. Check planeness of surface with a 10 ft. straightedge in all directions. Cut down high spots and fill lows. Immediately refloat to a uniform non-directional sandy texture.
2. Obtain by drawing a stiff bristled broom across a floated finish.
3. Direction of brooming to be perpendicular to direction of paving.
B. Exposed Aggregate Finish
1. Seeded Exposed Aggregate Finish. Immediately after floating, broadcast a single layer of aggregate uniformly onto the pavement surface. Tamp seeded aggregate into plastic concrete and float to entirely embed aggregate with mortar cover of 1/16 inch. a. Prior to the concrete placing operation, all select seeding aggregate shall be thoroughly washed so that it is free of all dust, dirt, and clay particles. The aggregate should be in a damp condition but without free surface water at the time of seeding application. There shall be sufficient select aggregate on hand to complete the seeding once it has commenced.
b. The seeding operation shall start immediately after the placement of concrete as described above. The select aggregate shall be carefully and uniformly seeded by suitable means so that the entire surface is completely covered with one layer of stone. Stacked stones and flat and slivery particles shall be removed at this time. The aggregate shall be embedded by suitable means. Care shall be taken to not over-embed and deform the surface. Under no circumstances shall areas lacking sufficient mortar be filled with small quantities of the base concrete mix.
c. Without dislodging aggregate, remove excess mortar by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon bristle broom.
d. Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing cycle until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required/ e. Work shall be planned so that the concrete placing and aggregate seeding procedures are coordinated with the capabilities of the washing and brushing crew.
3.010 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints:
1. Locate and install joints as indicated on the Drawings so they do not impair strength or appearance of slab.
2. All joints and other edges shall be formed in the fresh concrete using an edging tool to provide a smooth uniform impression.
B. Score Joints:
1. Locate and install joints as indicated on the Drawings so they do not impair strength or appearance of slab.
2. Score joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete using a jointer to cut the groove so that a smooth uniform impression is obtained. All joints shall be struck before and after finishing.
3. Locate and form joints with 1/4-inch radius edges and 1 inch to 1-1/4 inch deep score at the location as shown on the Drawings.
4. All joints and other edges shall be formed in the fresh concrete using an edging tool to provide a smooth uniform impression.
C. Expansion Joints:
1. Locate and install joints as indicated on the Drawings so they do not impair strength or appearance of slab.
470
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation
West Sacramento, CA
Issued for 100%
September 2024
Concrete Paving
32 13 13 - 14
2. Expansion joints shall be provided at the location and 20-foot maximum intervals as shown on the plans, and at all locations where concrete paving abuts buildings, curbs or other proposed or existing structures. Install as per detail on the Drawings.
3. All joints and other edges shall be formed in the fresh concrete using an edging tool to provide a smooth uniform impression.
4. Install backer-rod and joint sealant as indicated on the Drawings.
5. Sealing of Expansion Joints: After the curing period, strip out all depth gauge strips and carefully clean expansion joints. Fill with joint compound as shown on Drawings. Avoid spilling compound on paved surfaces or overflowing from joint.
6. Protect expansion joints from damage until placement of filler or caulk.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Samples: Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s Representative and provide samples for testing during the course of the work as described in Article 1.13 Tests and Observations.
B. Field inspection and testing will be performed by a qualified testing laboratory in accordance with ACI 318 and as described in Article 1.13 Tests and Observations.
C. Cost of Testing: Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with testing.
D. Rejected Materials: Remove off the site all concrete below specified strength and see Section 3.08 above.
E. Cost of Removal and Retesting: Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with removal and costs associated with retesting. See Section 3.08 above.
F. Integral color: Color shall be evenly saturated in concrete mix to provide consistent, even, and distinct color in finished installation, including after medium sandblast finish is applied.
G. Defective Work: Remove in its entirety and replace all defective concrete work which after corrective patching, rubbing, etc., fails to duplicate the appearance of unpatched work and/or conform to the standards set forth in these Specifications.
H. Observe formwork continuously while concrete is being placed to see that there are no deviations from desired elevation, alignment, plumbness or camber.
I. If during construction any weakness develops and falsework shows undue settlement or discoloration, stop work, remove affected construction if permanently damaged, and strengthen false- work.
END OF SECTION
32 13 13
471
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 10001 October 2024 Aquatic Sprayground
10001-1
SECTION 10001
AQUATIC SPRAYGROUND
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - Specification Sections, apply to the work specified in this section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services for installation of the water sprayground including splash pad areas, water features, controllers, and all sprayground recirculation mechanical and electrical system components.
B. The outdoor water sprayground shall have an approximate wet area of 1,600 square feet.
Furnish and install concrete pad structure and install final finishes to this surface.
C. Furnish and install the water sprayground system as indicated on the drawings and specifications and as necessary for proper operation including, but is not necessarily limited to:
1. All water spray features.
2. All activation devices.
3. Controllers.
4. Supply and installation of mechanical equipment, piping and reservoir as necessary for sprayground operation.
5. Operations and maintenance manuals.
6. Startup and training.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each of the products indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnish specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabricated equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, roughing-in dimensions, fabrication details, utility service requirements and attachments to other work.
C. Wiring Diagram: For power, signal, and control wiring. Provide both power and control signal line drawings and ladder diagrams. Provide interconnecting control wiring diagrams with lags and labels for each wire and termination.
D. Coordination Drawings: Indicate locations of Aquatic Playground and connections to utilities. Include plans and elevations; clearance requirements for equipment access and maintenance; details of support for equipment; and utility service characteristics. 472
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 10001 October 2024 Aquatic Sprayground
10001-2
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide all operation and maintenance manuals for all individual components and the complete system. The operation and maintenance manuals shall include all seasonal requirements of start-up and shutdown, and any other information unique to this system.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials shall be new and shall conform to applicable standards as specified herein.
B. All work shall be executed by workmen skilled in the craft that they are assigned.
C. All Aquatic Playground equipment required by the specifications and/or the drawings shall be supplied by a single Aquatic Playground Manufacturer unless otherwise specified herein.
D. The Manufacturer must currently be in the business of supplying Aquatic Playground equipment, similar in size and complexity. The Manufacturer shall provide written documentation of supplying Aquatic Playground equipment, for a minimum ten (10) years of experience and shall have previously supplied Aquatic Playground system design, drawing and equipment, similar in size and complexity to this project.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from weather, humidity, and temperature variations, dire and dust or other contaminants, and theft of vandalism. The contractor shall handle all equipment so as to prevent damage or marring, paying particular attention to any handling instructions on the equipment of packaging.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Aquatic Sprayground layout and installation with other work, including potable water distribution, electrical power, sanitary system, storm drain system, etc.
B. Coordinate location and requirements of utility service connections.
C. Coordinate size, location, and requirements of the following:
1. Overhead equipment supports.
2. Equipment bases.
3. Floor depressions.
4. Slab areas with positive slopes to drains.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Waterplay Solutions Corp.® (Waterplay) is committed to delivering the highest quality products on the market. Waterplay features are built with the best materials, to the most stringent manufacturing standards. Our personal pride and construction confidence are backed by the following warranties:
473
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 10001 October 2024 Aquatic Sprayground
10001-3
Material Warranty
1. Stainless Steel Piping & Weldments 25 years
2. Aluminum Materials 10 years
3. Acetyl Nozzles, Urethane/HDPE 5 years
4. Fiberglass, Acrylic & Polycarbonate Materials 2 years
5. Stainless Steel Hardware 2 years
6. Concrete (play features only) 1 year
7. Decals (out of reach of patrons ) 1 year
Water Distribution Warranty
1. Water Distribution Skid 10 years
2. Water Distribution & Recirculation Equipment 2 years
3. Electrical Controllers & Activator Switches 2 years
4. Kiosk Contents & Hardware 2 years
Play Feature Warranty
1. Sound Components 2 years
2. Moving Parts 2 years
3. LED Components 1 year
Play Feature Finish Warranty
1. Powder Coated 2 years
2. Painted (Airbrushed Graphics) 2 years
B. This warranty does not cover any damage caused by accident, improper care, negligence, normal wear and tear, surface corrosion on metal parts, discolored surfaces and other cosmetic issues or failures due to misuse or vandalism. Natural fading in feature finish over time are considered cosmetic issues and not covered. Features installed in indoor aquatic facilities, coastal areas and areas with high heat and humidity will encounter more discoloring and cosmetic issues. Waterplay staff and/or appointed service agents are prepared with guidelines for maintenance and rapid response assistance should anything go awry. With our reliable support and quality products, Waterplay takes pride in knowing that our customers have a quality system that runs without interruption. Waterplay offers an option to extend your standard warranty on the control panel to 3, 4 or 5 years. Extended warranty commences at expiration of the standard 2 year warranty period and must be purchased by the time the park is commissioned or within 12 months of goods received on site, whichever comes first.
C. Safety
1. In situations where Waterplay products are utilized for any purpose other than those approved by Waterplay, the customer will be held fully responsible. In addition, Waterplay will not be held responsible for the 474
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 10001 October 2024 Aquatic Sprayground
10001-4
operation, function, performance, misuse, injuries, or claims resulting from any other products installed within proximity to water structures manufactured by Waterplay.
D. Conditions
1. Park registration process must be complete prior to a warranty claim being processed http://www.waterplay.com/en/park-registration/
2. All warranties commence upon receipt of goods on site and are only valid if Waterplay equipment is installed in accordance with Waterplay specifications and installation instructions. Waterplay will not cover warranty issues resulting from installation errors.
3. Modifications to Waterplay equipment without prior written approval will void all warranties covered by this document.
4. Warranties are limited to the value of parts and components sold. The client is responsible for the cost of removing and replacing warranted parts/features, the cost for shipping of warranty items to the client site and the return of defect items to Waterplay (if required).
5. All warranty claims against shipping damages or missing parts will be in accordance with the Terms & Conditions of the Purchase Agreement.
6. It is the responsibility of the owner to inspect all aspects of their facility at regular intervals. All maintenance shall be performed in accordance with the Waterplay Owner’s Manual and documented in an approved log book.
7. Waterplay does not assume responsibility for damage resulting from extreme weather conditions such as flooding, fires, lightning or any act of force majeure. Waterplay does not warrant defects or damage caused by water supply or quality of utilities nor does it warrant landscaping, site amenities or surfacing in areas where Waterplay products are installed.
8. Any warranty issues are governed by the laws of the province of British Columbia, Canada.
9. Warranty claims will only be processed for accounts considered to be in good standing at the time the claim is made.
10. The foregoing warranties are exclusive and in lieu of all other warranties.
There shall be no liability for incidental or consequential damages.
11. Waterplay reserves the right to develop, improve, change or discontinue any product and/or specification without notice and is has no obligation to retrofit these changes into existing parks.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. This section covers Sprayground. All components described below are to be supplied by a single manufacturer. The features will be designed and manufactured by only approved manufacturers.
B. Approved manufacturer to provide all equipment and features equal to basis-of-design product as scheduled on drawings and as specified herein.
C. All equivalents or equals must be pre-approved, in writing, prior to the submission of the 475
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 10001 October 2024 Aquatic Sprayground
10001-5
bid.
D. Basis of Design: WaterPlay By Makr, 805 Crowley Ave, Kelowna, BC, Canda V1Y 7G6 (888)800-6257.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Provide all equipment as specified according to this document. All substitutions must be submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Contracting Officer or his authorized representative.
B. Provide all special tools and winterization plates or inserts for proper operation and maintenance of the equipment provided under this Section. .
2.03 SPRAYGROUND FOUNTAIN SUMMARY
A. Sprayground Features as shown on drawings.
B. PLAY PHASE BASES
1. Above ground aquatic play features shall be constructed of Stainless Steel Type A304 or A304L, schedule 40 or 10. Stainless steel base plate materials will be 2B finish at 3/8” thick. Each spray fixture shall have a 1 ½” NPT coupling water inlet.
2. In-ground aquatic play features shall be 2 ½” schedule 40 or 6” schedule 40, type A304 stainless steel canisters with a machined nozzle seat. Each fixture will have a 1” NPT coupler water inlet. Each fixture shall have mounting holes to accommodate stainless steel L-type anchor bolts to be set in a concrete footing.
3. Aquatic play features are to meet ADA compliance for handicap accessibility, and meet or exceed current ASTM playground safety standards.
4. Aquatic play features will be supplied with all necessary anchoring hardware and installation templates to accommodate site work.
5. Aquatic play features anchoring system shall provide the ability to add, remove and interchange products without having to change infrastructure and footings. The component shall be fastened directly to the base flange with an EPDM gasket to provide a water tight seal between the component flange and the base flange. The base must be flush-to-grade with no visible hardware or dome cover. The base must have the ability to attach a grounding lug.
6. All aquatic play features shall have fittings that allow for winter close off.
7. All aquatic play features of below grade design shall address winterization.
C. Nozzles
476
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 10001 October 2024 Aquatic Sprayground
10001-6
1. Aquatic play feature nozzles shall be constructed of acetal copolymer or urethane. Nozzles shall be non-corrosive, impervious to galling, precision machined. Brass and Nylon are not acceptable. A mechanical workbook must be supplied to show individual flow rates for each feature including maximum and average flow for each pre-programmed sequence step.
2. Nozzles shall be secured using stainless steel fasteners.
D. Above Ground Features - Coatings
1. Fixtures shall receive a pre-treatment stainless steel epoxy primer followed by a coat of weather-resistant super durable TGIC free polyester powder, baked application. Standard powder coatings are not acceptable. Brushed stainless finish is the exception.
2. Powder coatings shall be weather resistant and have ultraviolet inhibitors.
Coatings shall have a high gloss finish, have ultraviolet inhibitors, withstand 1/10th no removal @160 in/lb, exceed all specifications of organic coatings, and a film thickness of between 2.5 to 3.0 mils (determined by color and finish). Where theme graphics are applied, a base clear coat system will be applied. Supply aerosol primer and touch up paint, color code as specified for aquatic play features.
3. Equipment must be packaged in a three step packaging process as follows:
1. The first layer is open cell 1/8” foam wrapping.
2. The second layer is a corrugated cardboard.
3. The final layer is a waterproof polyethylene tarp wrap
4. Product must be shipped in dedicated nose load shipments secured with strapping.
E. Deck Drains
1. Deck Drains shall be factory assembled.
2. Drains shall have non-skid surface with slot openings no wider than 5/16”
3. Each drain shall flow not less than 135 GPM at a velocity of 1.5 ft/sec.
4. Drains shall have not less than a 6” diameter outlet
5. Drains shall be fiberglass composite with smooth interior gelcoat surface, and fiberglass non-skid grate.
F. Activation Devices - Electrical
1. All electronic operating systems shall be manufactured by Waterplay Solutions Corp., British Columbia Canada, or approved equal. All electrical control panels shall be UL/CUL approved specifically for aquatic play area operations and must bear certification logos.
2. All wiring to be specified by the manufacturer of the aquatic play features.
3. The actuating device shall be encapsulated within a 304 stainless steel casing and be UV, moisture, graffiti, and impact resistant. 477
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 10001 October 2024 Aquatic Sprayground
10001-7
4. All control system materials are to be of industrial grade quality and controller enclosures shall be rated @ NEMA 4.
5. All Waterplay® components shall be grounded using bare #6 AWG wire and an approved ground lug.. Consult local electrical inspector for local codes and final inspection.
6. Electrical connection shall be 1” National Pipe Thread (NPT) coupler to be located near the bottom of the component. Power supply to the Waterplay® control panel shall be 120V AC, with a 15amp GFCI dedicated breaker
7. All wire connections must be watertight.
8. Solenoid valves must be PVC, and of type having 24V AC, 0.250 mA max. holding current coil rating with flow control (Rainbird PGA series or equal).
Valve wire shall be #18 AWG type R90, one per valve, plus one common back to the controller location.
2.04 MOTORS
A. GENERAL
1. The manufacturer shall conduct a pre-shipping in-house test of the equipment to ensure a complete working system.
B. WTS CONTROLLER
1. The Park Controller shall operate on a real time clock and will control operation of the park’s valves based on time of day and day of the week.
2. The Park Controller shall be capable of remote access to the PLC program, system variables, and the Human Machine Interface (HMI) touchscreen.
The Controller must be configured to interface with a supervisory control system, such as smartACCESS, or approved alternative
3. The controller shall have a colour Human Machine Interface (HMI) touchscreen through which operators can modify park sequencing, component run times, operating days, hours of daily operation, and test mode to manually activate all valves
4. The controller shall operate the 24VAC solenoid valves on the park manifold
5. The controller includes power distribution to all necessary components, including the park manifold valves and activators
6. The controller shall have a minimum of one input channel available to connect to each park activator
7. The controller will actuate park valves as per an operator programmable, manufacturer preset, and drought control sequence upon input signal from an activator
8. The controller shall be prewired and have all inputs and outputs channels tested prior to shipping
9. The WTS controller shall be housed in a NEMA 4 enclosure 478
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 10001 October 2024 Aquatic Sprayground
10001-8
C. MANIFOLD 4”
1. The manifold shall have a 4” schedule 10 stainless steel header, pressure gauge and ½ inch (12 mm) hose bibb
2. The manifold shall have schedule 80 PVC true union ball valves plumbed off each independent leg of the header and connected to Rainbird PGA 100 series solenoid valves with 1.5” (38mm) schedule 80 PVC unions on each outlet supply to components
3. Each valve leg shall be independently removable without shutting down manifold flow to allow for servicing of solenoid valves during operational hours
4. A solenoid valve NEMA 4 wire junction box mounted to the manifold structure
5. The manifold shall be connected to a butterfly valve for shut off and servicing
2.05 EQUIPMENT
A. MECHANICAL SYSTEM
1. A Variable Frequency Drive shall be used to control pump speed. Where permitted by the AHJ, the VFD shall ramp the pump down outside of park operating hours while maintaining the tank turnover time. VFD will vary pump rpm to adjust flow to appropriate backwash setpoint.
B. WTS & CHEMICAL CONTROLLER
1. The WTS Controller shall be capable of remote access to the PLC program, system variables, and the Human Machine Interface (HMI) touchscreen.
The WTS Controller must be configured to interface with a supervisory control system, such as smartACCESS, or approved alternative
2. The WTS Controller shall log water quality data, filter train pressure drop and monitor chemical controller feed and alarm states
3. The controller shall have a colour Human Machine Interface (HMI) touchscreen through which operators can modify park sequencing, park and backwash schedules, and manually activate all pumps, valves, and secondary disinfection equipment. The screen shall display all water treatment system alarms, water quality data, pump flow rate and filter train pressure drop.
4. The controller shall operate the 24VAC solenoid valves on the park manifold
5. The controller shall have the ability to purge the water lines prior to park opening
6. The WTS controller includes power distribution to all WTS components, including the Diverter Strainer System (DSS), park manifold valves and 479
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 10001 October 2024 Aquatic Sprayground
10001-9
activators. Integral to the controller shall be a disconnect and VFD for pump motor control
7. The WTS controller shall interface with the chemical controller, secondary disinfection controller and disable water flow to the features should water chemistry alarm or secondary disinfection alarm be activated
8. The WTS controller shall operate and monitor the valve located in the Diverter Strainer System
9. The WTS controller shall accommodate 3 phase, 208 VAC, 60Hz or 1 phase, 230VAC, 60Hz
10. The WTS controller shall be housed in a NEMA 4 enclosure C. FEATURE & FILTER PUMPS
1. The WTS shall use an NSF50 listed centrifugal pump, complete with strainer basket, and the system shall be self-priming. The pump shall be capable of delivering the maximum possible park flow rate and provide a minimum 20psi to the spray park manifold. The pump shall be capable of turning over the total tank volume a minimum of once every 30 minutes. A pressure switch shall be installed on the pump discharge, disabling the pump as a result of a sustained low pressure event.
D. UV SYSTEM
1. UV System, shall be UV Swim U-150-D6 by Aquionics.
E. SAND FILTER
1. The high rate sand filters shall be NSF50 listed, and sized for a nominal filter service rate of 15 US GPM/ft2 and come complete with filter air release valves and a pressure gauge. Sand filters shall be sized to accommodate a minimum holding tank turnover of once every 30 minutes.
A balance valve shall be provided for each filter.
F. DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLD
1. The manifold shall have a 4” schedule 10 stainless steel header, pressure gauge and ½ inch (12 mm) hose bibb
2. The manifold shall have schedule 80 PVC true union ball valves plumbed off each independent leg of the header and connected to Rainbird PGA 100 series solenoid valves with 1.5” (38mm) schedule 80 PVC unions on each outlet supply to components
3. Each valve leg shall be independently removable without shutting down manifold flow to allow for servicing of solenoid valves during operational hours
480
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 10001 October 2024 Aquatic Sprayground
10001-10
4. A solenoid valve NEMA 4 wire junction box mounted to the manifold structure
5. The manifold shall be connected to a butterfly valve for shut off and servicing
2.06 RESREVOIR
A. The Reservoir must be a 4,000 gallon reservoir and be equipped with self-locking hatch and ladder
2.07 DIVERTER STRAINER SYSTEM
A. A diverter and strainer system shall house a debris screen and diverter valve in a below grade tank and allow for access via an aluminum, hinged lockable hatch. The tank body shall be constructed of corrugated HDPE with a 30” diameter.
B. The diverter valve shall be an electrically actuated butterfly valve, complete with limit switches. The valve shall be powered, actuated and monitored by the WTS controller based on park operating hours and park inactivity. The valve shall be normally closed during park use, sending all flow from the park drain to the holding tank. After park hours or after a period of park inactivity, the valve shall divert rain water from the spray pad to the sewer, thereby avoiding dilution of holding tank chemicals.
C. The DSS debris screen shall be a stainless steel screen basket with no greater than 1/8” perforated holes.
2.08 AQUATIC SPRAYOUND SURFACE AREA
A. Provide brushed concrete surface at the entire Aquatic Playground area with slopes to drains and control joints as detailed by Aquatic Playground vendor.
2.09 INSPECTION & SITE TRAINING
A. Feature manufacturer must supply site visit is to calibrate the system and train the city’s personnel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Upon equipment delivery, the Contractor shall indicate any damaged or missing items on the shipping documents. If further inspection is required, the Contractor shall indicate further inspection to follow on the shipping documents.
B. Upon equipment delivery, the Contractor shall inspect the WTS shipment and report any damaged or missing items to the manufacturer and to the shipping company within 48 hours of receipt.
481
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 10001 October 2024 Aquatic Sprayground
10001-11
3.02 COMMISSIONING
A. A manufacturer supplied and trained representative shall provide on-site start-up and training for the owner and operators of the WTS. Training shall include spring startup, weekly maintenance and operation, and winterization duties.
3.03 INSTALLATION
1. Acceptable Installers:
2. Firm with minimum of 10 aquatic play pad installations and identified as a Preferred Installer by the manufacturer.
3. Pre-approved general contractor as identified by the owner
4. The installation shall be accomplished by skilled work personnel. The installation of all water pipe and fittings, and the installation of all electrical wiring and conduit, shall be under the direct full-time supervision of a licensed corresponding trade, as approved by the owner. (See Waterplay “Inspection and Approval” section of Manufacturer’s Owner Manual for more details.
3.04 PERFORMANCE
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Examine all fixtures and components and verify that equipment is undamaged and ready for field assembly.
2. Return damaged and non-conforming products to the manufacturer.
3. Identify location of underground utility lines on surface.
B. Protection:
1. Protect adjacent facilities, plants, trees, ground covers, grass, paved surfaces, and other site improvements from damage during assembly and installation.
C. Layout and Excavation:
1. Lay out aquatic play features, components and supply and drain lines within pool areas.
2. Excavation for Foundation: All excavation shall be cut accurately to required lines and dimensions for work on drawings, and shall be large enough to provide adequate clearance for the proper execution of the work within them.
D. Concrete Placement and Cast in Place Footings:
482
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 10001 October 2024 Aquatic Sprayground
10001-12
1. Obtain approval from Owner's Representative prior to pouring concrete.
2. Inspection: When the excavation has been carried to the required depth as shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall do no more work until after the inspection by the Engineer, who shall order the foundation work to proceed, or further excavation as the conditions indicate, and no other work shall be done until the excavation has been approved by the Engineer.
E. Installation:
1. Aquatic play features shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specification, and approved by the owner. The contractor shall use extreme care when installing aquatic play features. All wrappings are to be left intact through installation and then to be removed upon completion.
2. Entire assemblies shall be installed in accurate location, square and plumb, and in required location to surrounding finished grade, on footings, as shown on the plans. Prior to park commissioning all features must be flushed with potable water and the water balanced should a water treatment system be part of the project.
3. An owner/operator training meeting must be conducted and documented prior to handoff of the project.
F. Completion:
1. Testing: All aquatic play feature lead lines shall be water pressure tested as directed by local codes and the manufacturer’s recommendations before backfilling and pouring of concrete slabs. The contractor is to ensure all water supply lines are free of debris, and flushed of any foreign material, prior to the hook-up of any aquatic play features, and the contractor shall have inspected the entire system (including all electronic systems) in the presence of the Owners Representative. The contractor is to ensure all nozzles are adjusted and secured to the owner's satisfaction. The contractor is to test all drainage systems of the aquatic play features. Refer to the Installation manual for a full description of related tasks prior to completion.
3.05 TEST AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. This Contractor shall test all equipment as necessary to show that it complies with all requirements specified. Testing shall be done in a manner approved by the Owner’s Representative.
B. All water piping systems shall be flushed free of debris and pressure tested at 150% of operating pressure or 75psi minimum for discharge lines, 30p.s.i. minimum for suction lines, and 15p.s.i. minimum for drain lines, for a period of not less than 4 hours, and proven free of leaks or other defects, prior to and after backfilling and concrete pours.
Repair leaks and repeat test as necessary until satisfactory results are obtained. 483
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 10001 October 2024 Aquatic Sprayground
10001-13
1. Sprayground flow manifold assemblies shall be pressure tested to150 PSI for 30 minutes with zero leakage. Repair any leaks and retest until acceptable results are obtained.
2. All open ended pipes and equipment, such as drain bodies, shall be left long for testing, and then cut to length before final installation of equipment C. All electrical circuits, feeders, and equipment shall be tested and proven free of improper grounds, open circuits or shorts, as required by the authorities having jurisdiction, to demonstrate compliance with codes and laws.
D. The Contractor shall place the installation in operation and make tests, adjustments, and corrections, until it is shown to be in proper operating condition.
3.06 GUARANTEE
A. In entering into a contract covering this work, each contractor accepts the specifications and drawings and guarantees that the work will be performed in accordance with the requirements of the specifications and drawings, or such modifications to said specifications and drawings, as may be made in the contract documents and applicable codes and laws.
B. Each Contractor further guarantees that the workmanship and material will be of best quality procurable, and that none but experienced workmen, familiar with each particular class of work, will be employed.
C. Each Contractor further agrees to hold himself responsible for any defects which may develop in any part of the entire system, including equipment as provided for under this specification, due to faulty workmanship, design or material and to replace and make good, without cost to the Owner, any such faulty parts or construction that may develop at any time within one year from the date of the final acceptance or longer where dictated by manufacturer’s warranty periods. Any repairs or replacements required because of defects, as outlined in this clause, are to be made promptly and approved in writing by the Owner’s Representative prior to replacement/repair of defective work.
3.07 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the work of this section, the Contractor shall remove from the sites all rubbish, trash, and debris resulting from the operations; remove all used equipment and implements of service; and leave the entire area involved in a neat, clean, and acceptable condition as approved by the Owner’s Representative.
B. All soiled, abraded or discolored surfaces of spray ground and stream feature work shall be cleaned, polished and left free from blemishes or defects. 484
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project 10430
September 2024 Sign and Sign Posts
10430-1
SIGNS AND SIGN POSTS
A. SCOPE
This section consists of furnishing and installing sign panels, sign posts, fastening hardware, back braces, straps and saddle brackets at the locations shown on the plans or as designated by the Owners Representative. All work shall conform to Section 56 of the State Standard Specifications unless otherwise stated within these specifications.
B. MATERIALS
SINGLE SHEET ALUMINUM SIGN shall be fabricated from sheet aluminum alloy 6061-T6 or 5052-H38 and shall not have a vertical splice in the sheet aluminum. Aluminum sheeting must be free of buckles, warps, dents, cockles, burrs and defects resulting from fabrication and installation. All single sheet aluminum signs shall conform to Section 56 of the State Standard Specifications.
RETROREFLECTIVE SHEETING shall be Type IV microprismatic, or approved equal.
Retroreflectivity of the sheeting for sign background and legend shall conform to the requirements in ASTM Designation D 4956. Retroreflective sheeting must have Class 1, 3, or 4 adhesive backing and shall be applied to sign panels as recommended by the retroreflective sheeting manufacturer without stretching, tearing, and damage. The orientation of the legend must comply with the retroreflective sheeting manufacturer’sinstructions. The retroreflective sheeting must be a single, contiguous sheet without splices except for the splices produced during the manufacturing process of the retroreflective sheeting. The adhesive backing shall be pressure sensitive and fungus resistant.
METAL SIGN POSTS shall be 2” diameter galvanized post and conform to the City of Oroville
Standard Detail 601. Galvanizing shall conform to the provisions in Section 75-1.05 of the State Standard Specifications. Sign posts shall be free of buckles, warps, dents, cockles, burrs and defects resulting from fabrication and installation.
SIGN PANEL FASTENING HARDWARE: Framing assemblies for multiple sign installations shall be fabricated of structural steel conforming to the requirements in ASTM A36/A36M, or of aluminum alloy as shown on the Plans. Frames fabricated of structural steel shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
Back braces for signs shall be commercial quality, mild steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
Straps and saddle brackets for mounting sign panels on electroliers, sign structure posts and traffic signal standards or where shown on the Plans shall be stainless steel conforming to the requirements in ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304. Theft-proof bolts shall be stainless steel with a chromium content of at least 16 percent and a nickel content of at least 8 percent.
Lag screws, bolts (except theft-proof bolts), metal washers and nuts shall be commercial quality steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Fiber washers shall be of commercial quality. 485
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project 10430
September 2024 Sign and Sign Posts
10430-2
Galvanizing shall conform to the provisions in Section 75-1.05 of the State Standard Specifications.
Components of bolted assemblies shall be galvanized separately before assembly.
C. WORKMANSHIP
POSTS: Excavate post holes to the depth shown. Place posts in the holes. Backfill material for posts must be Class B concrete as provided in Section TS 9, “Concrete Work”, of these Technical Specifications. Surplus excavated material shall be disposed of in a uniform manner within the project limits as directed by the Engineer. The line between the center of the top of a post and the center of a post at the ground line shall be plumb within a tolerance of not to exceed 0.02 foot in 10 feet.
SIGN PANELS: Sign information must be imprinted in 1/4-inch upper case letters and numerals. Locate this information on the back, lower right of each sign panel so that it will not be blocked by a sign post or mounting frame. Sign information must include:
1. Sign fabricator's name
2. Month and year of fabrication
3. Type of retroreflective sheeting
4. Sheeting manufacturer's identification and lot number for the retroreflective sheeting Sign information must be imprinted at the fabrication plant by die-stamping on aluminum panels or by an equivalent method for aluminum signs, such as affixing a die-stamped aluminum tag.
The information must not be painted, screened, inked, or engraved. The information must be imprinted in a way that does not damage the face of the sign.
Sign panels shall be installed by the Contractor in conformance with the details on the Plans or as directed by the Owners Representative. Any chipping or bending of sign panels shall be considered as sufficient cause to require replacement of panels at the Contractor’s expense.
All fastening hardware shall be furnished by the Contractor.
Signs shall be free from blemishes that may affect the serviceability and detract from the general sign color and appearance when viewing during daytime and nighttime from a distance of 25 feet.
The face of each finished sign shall be uniform, flat, smooth, and free of defects, scratches, wrinkles, gel, hard spots, streaks, extrusion marks, and air bubbles. The front, back, and edges of the sign panels shall be free of router chatter marks, burns, sharp edges, loose rivets, delaminated skins, excessive adhesive over-spray and aluminum marks.
D. CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE
The California Department of Transportation maintains a list of Prequalified and Tested Signing and Delineation Materials. The Engineer shall not be precluded from sampling and testing products on the list of Prequalified and Tested Signing and Delineation Materials. 486
20-30 Park 10430
May 2024 Sign and Sign Posts
10430-3
The Contractor shall work with the manufacturer of products on the list of Prequalified and Tested Signing and Delineation Materials and furnish the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance in conformance with the provisions in Section 6- 1.07, "Certificates of Compliance," of the State Standard Specificationsfor each type of traffic product supplied.
For those categories of materials included on the list of Prequalified and Tested Signing and Delineation Materials, only those products shown within the listing may be used in the work.
Other categories of products, not included on the list of Prequalified and Tested Signing and Delineation Materials, may be used in the work provided they conform to the requirements of the State Standard Specifications.
E. MEASUREMENT
Measurement of Signs and Sign Posts will be made as a field count of each sign post with sign installed as a single unit per the drawings and these technical specifications. 487
Sept 2024
written specification package -
Westacre park
488
PARKWORKS + WATERPLAY + WEKID MFG : MAKRgroup.com
PRODUCT CODE 0010-0485
Funbrella
Characteristics The Funbrella column shall be constructed of schedule 10 stainless steel structural tubing. The column shall contain a top cap at the column end and allow for the free flow of water. Water flows out of the top nozzle cap creating a cascading umbrella.
Dimensions: The overall height of the structure shall be no less than 37 inches (939mm) above final grade.
Recommended
Flow Rate:
The hydraulic requirements shall be 14 gpm @ 2 psi (53 lpm @ 14 kpa).
Anchoring/Levelling
System:
See Playphase Base Small written spec for more detail.
489
PARKWORKS + WATERPLAY + WEKID MFG : MAKRgroup.com
PRODUCT CODE 0010-0403
Splash Blaster
Characteristics The Splash Blaster column and cannon head assembly shall be constructed of schedule 10 stainless steel structural tubing. A revolving hub with no pinch points shall be
mounted in the feature base column. The revolving hub will allow for 360º rotation with a 120° spray radius. The cannon head assembly shall have a 90º bend with a urethane
nozzle cap with acetal nozzle mounted in the end. A
schedule 40 stainless steel tube shall have a diameter of 8 inches 203(mm) with a ø3.5 inch (12mm) opening which
shall be welded to the head assembly as a handle. Water flows through one (1) nozzle with seven (7) holes in an outward wave from the cannon head assembly.
Dimensions: The overall height of the structure shall be no less than 34 inches (876mm) above final grade. The overall width of the structure shall be no less than 13 x 9 inches (332 x 236mm) Recommended
Flow Rate:
The hydraulic requirements shall be 3 gpm @ 7 psi (11 lpm @ 48 kpa).
Anchoring/Levelling
System:
See Playphase Base Small written spec for more detail.
490
PARKWORKS + WATERPLAY + WEKID MFG : MAKRgroup.com
PRODUCT CODE 0010-5834
FS Water Weaver 1
Characteristics The Water Weaver 1 column shall be constructed of schedule 40 stainless steel structural tubing. The top of the main column shall house a urethane nozzle cap. The feature shall contain two (2) 3/4" acetal nozzles. An acetal spin hub with stainless steel ball bearings shall be installed in the column to allow for 360° rotation. Two (2) 3/4" acetal spray nozzles shall be installed on the rotational part of the post, allowing for an additional water effect when users spin the top of the feature. Two (2) blank acetal nozzles shall be provided for winterization.
Dimensions: The overall height of the structure shall be no less than 13 inches (330mm) above final grade.
Recommended
Flow Rate:
The hydraulic requirements shall be 2 gpm @ 2 psi (8 lpm @ 14 kpa).
Anchoring/Levelling
System:
See Playphase Base Small written spec for more detail.
491
PARKWORKS + WATERPLAY + WEKID MFG : MAKRgroup.com
PRODUCT CODE 0010-7478
GS Geyser
Characteristics Shall be constructed of schedule 40 stainless steel structural tubing with an outside diameter of 2.875 inches (73mm) with a wall thickness of 0.203 (5mm). The canister shall be a total height of 11.38 inches (289.05mm) tall with a .25 inch (6.35mm) thick X 5.5 inch diameter (139.7mm) base plate. The canister shall be secured into place by securing three (3) 3/8 inch x 11 inches (9.52 mm x 279mm) L bolts (SS) through three (3) anchor holes on the side of the canister. The Acetal spray nozzle and winter cap shall be seated into the canister with an o-ring and secured using a tamper resistant security bolt. The spray nozzle shall have an eight (8) hole spray pattern angled at 15 degrees from vertical. Tamper resistant winter caps are included.
Dimensions: Flush to grade mount.
Recommended
Flow Rate:
The hydraulic requirements shall be 6 gpm @ 5 psi (23 lpm @ 34 kpa).
492
PARKWORKS + WATERPLAY + WEKID MFG : MAKRgroup.com
PRODUCT CODE 0010-7492
GS Gusher
Characteristics Shall be constructed of schedule 40 stainless steel structural tubing with an outside diameter of 6.625 inches (168mm) with a wall thickness of 0.280 inches (7mm). The canister shall be 12 inches (305mm) tall with a .25 thick 8 inch X 4 inch (6mm X 203 X 101mm) base plate. The Acetal spray nozzle and winter cap shall be seated into the canister with an o-ring and secured using a tamper resistant security bolt. The spray nozzle shall have an eighteen (18) hole shower like spray pattern. Tamper resistant winter caps are included.
Dimensions: Flush to grade mount with an overall height of ø60 inches (1524mm)
Recommended
Flow Rate:
The hydraulic requirements shall be 10 gpm @ 2.5 psi (38 lpm @ 17 kpa).
493
PARKWORKS + WATERPLAY + WEKID MFG : MAKRgroup.com
PRODUCT CODE 0010-7491
GS Lily Pad with custom Manhole graphic
Characteristics The Lily Pad shall be constructed of .375 inch (9.5mm) thick Dimensions:
Recommended
Flow Rate:
polycarbonate plate with an outer diameter of 23.75 inches (603mm). The polycarbonate plate shall be affixed to stainless steel canister via five (5) tamper resistant security bolts. The canister shall be constructed of schedule 40 stainless steel structural tubing, 12 inches (305mm) tall with an outside diameter of 2.875 inches (73mm) with a wall thickness of 0.203 (5mm) with a .25 thick 6 inch x 4 inch (152mm x 102mm) base plate. The canister shall be secured into place by securing three (3) 3/8 inch x 11 inches (9.52 mm x 279mm) L bolts (SS) through three (3) anchor holes on the side of the canister The Acetal spray nozzle and winter cap shall be seated into the canister with an o-ring and secured using a tamper resistant security bolt. The spray nozzle shall be interchangeable with any Waterplay 2.5 inch 64.5mm) nozzle. Tamper resistant winter caps are included.
Flush to grade mount. Height is dependent on nozzle selection, see plans for nozzle selection.
The hydraulic requirements hall be dependent on nozzle
selection
494
PARKWORKS + WATERPLAY + WEKID MFG : MAKRgroup.com
PRODUCT CODE 0010-7485
GS Straight Up
Characteristics Shall be constructed of schedule 40 stainless steel structural tubing with an outside diameter of 2.875 inches (73mm) with a wall thickness of 0.203 (5mm). The canister shall be a total height of 11.38 inches (289.05mm) tall with a .25 inch (6.35mm) thick X 5.5 inch diameter (139.7mm) base plate. The Acetal spray nozzle and winter cap shall be seated into the canister with an oring and secured using a tamper resistant security bolt. The spray nozzle shall consist of 8 small orifices. Tamper resistant winter caps are included The water inlet shall be 1 inch (25mm) National Pipe Thread located 1.41 inches (35.8mm) below the base plate. The canister shall be secured into place by securing three (3) 3/8 inch x 11 inches (9.52 mm x 279mm) L bolts (SS) through three (3) anchor holes on the side of the canister.
Dimensions: Flush to grade mount.
Recommended
Flow Rate:
The hydraulic requirements shall be 6 gpm @ 6 psi (23 lpm @ 41 kpa).
495
PARKWORKS + WATERPLAY + WEKID MFG : MAKRgroup.com
PRODUCT CODE 0010-7509
Wall Spray - Mister Mister Nozzle
Characteristics Shall be constructed of schedule 40 stainless steel structural Dimensions:
Recommended
Flow Rate:
tubing with an outside diameter of 2.875 inches (73mm) with a wall thickness of 0.203 (5mm). The canister shall be 6 inches (152mm) long with a .125 inch (3mm) thick, 4 inch (101mm) angle bar located at the end of the canister with .5 inch (13mm) mounting holes. The Acetal spray nozzle and winter cap shall be seated into the canister with an o-ring and secured using a tamper resistant security bolt. The spray nozzle shall consist of four (4) brass misting nozzles angled at 15 degrees from horizontal. Tamper resistant winter caps are included. One (1) blank acetal nozzles shall be provided for winterization.
N/A
The hydraulic requirements shall be 1 gpm @ 21 psi (4 lpm @ 145 kpa).
496
PARKWORKS + WATERPLAY + WEKID MFG : MAKRgroup.com
PRODUCT CODE 0010-1854
Power Post
Characteristics The Power Post Activator column shall be constructed of schedule 10 stainless steel structural tubing measuring 42.55 inches (1081mm) tall. There shall be 1 10 inch (254mm) acrylic mounting panel on top of the column anchored at 45˚ with 1 push button activator in the centre. Tamper resistant
fasteners shall be used to hold all components together.
Dimensions: The overall height of the structure shall be no less than 42.55 inches (1081mm) above final grade. The overall width of the structure shall be no less than 8.79 inches (223mm)
Anchoring/Levelling
System:
See Playphase Base Small written spec for more detail.
497
PARKWORKS + WATERPLAY + WEKID MFG : MAKRgroup.com
PRODUCT CODE 0010-4133
DRAIN CIRCULAR STAINLESS STEEL
Characteristics The drain body shall be made from 18 inch schedule 10 stainless steel pipe. An upper flange ring shall be welded in place to accommodate for a drain grate that shall have no less than 40.47 sq inches (26109 sq mm) of open area for water flow. The max grate opening shall be no more than
0.31 inches (7.93mm). A 6 inch pipe flange shall be welded to the body. A stainless steel strainer basket shall fit inside with perforations no more than 0.125 inches (3.18mm). A 22 inch (559mm) diameter flange shall be cut from 0.1875 inch stainless steel plate and welded to the body bottom to act as a installation bolt pass through.
Dimensions: The overall height of the structure shall be no less than 18 inches (462)mm. The overall diameter of the structure shall be no less than 18 inches (457mm). The pipe flange location shall be no less than 12 inches (292mm). The mounting
flange shall be no less than 22 inches (559mm) in diameter.
Recommended
Flow Rate:
The flow capacity of the drain through the 6 inch pipe is 140 gpm (530lpm). This measurement is based on a 6 inch
drain pipe at a 2% slope.
498
PARKWORKS + WATERPLAY + WEKID MFG : MAKRgroup.com
PRODUCT CODE 0011-2156
PlayPHASE Base Small
Characteristics The playPHASE base Small shall be a fully welded assembly.
A main body shall be constructed of 4 inch (DN100) stainless steel schedule 10 pipe. A machined mounting flange will be welded to the top of the main body, and a 0.5 inch (12.7mm) thick stainless steel baseplate welded to the bottom. A 1.5- inch (40mm) F-NPT coupler shall be welded to the main
body to supply water. Eight (8) 0.5 inch (12.7mm) threaded holes shall be drilled in the top flange for feature mounting.
The backside of these holes shall be capped with laser
welded nut caps to ensure zero leak paths. The top flange shall incorporate an outer lip to ensure the aluminum cover and feature flange is recessed and flush to grade. A
Neoprene gasket and aluminum cover shall be included for winterization.
499
PARKWORKS + WATERPLAY + WEKID MFG : MAKRgroup.com
PRODUCT CODE 0011-1953
PlayPHASE Base Medium
Characteristics The playPHASE base Medium shall be a fully welded assembly. A main body shall be constructed of 8 inch
(DN200) stainless steel schedule 10 pipe. A machined
mounting flange will be welded to the top of the main body, and a 0.5 inch (12.7mm) thick stainless steel baseplate welded to the bottom. A 1.5 inch (40mm) F-NPT coupler shall be welded to the main body to supply water. Eight (8) 0.5 inch (12.7mm) threaded holes shall be drilled in the top flange for feature mounting. These holes are through holes, exiting into the main pipe body, ensuring zero leak paths. The top flange shall incorporate an outer lip to ensure the aluminum cover and/or feature flange is recessed and flush to grade. A Neoprene gasket and aluminum cover shall be included for winterization.
500
PARKWORKS + WATERPLAY + WEKID MFG : MAKRgroup.com
PRODUCT CODE 0011-1737
PlayPHASE Base Large
Characteristics The playPHASE base Large shall be a fully welded assembly.
A main body shall be constructed of 10 inch (DN250)
stainless steel schedule 10 pipe. A mounting flange with rolled outer lip will be welded to the top of the pipe body, and a 0.5 inch (12.7mm) baseplate welded to the bottom. A 1.5 inch (40mm) F-NPT coupler shall be welded to the main
body to supply water. Eight (8) 0.5 inch (12.7mm) threaded holes shall be drilled in the top flange for feature mounting.
These holes are through holes, exiting into the main pipe body, ensuring zero leak paths. The top flange shall
incorporate an outer lip to ensure the aluminum cover
and/or feature flange is recessed and flush to grade. A Neoprene gasket and aluminum cover shall be included for winterization.
501
WESTACRE SKATEPARK
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
502
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 00 45 13 – BIDDER’S QUALIFICATIONS
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
SECTION 03 10 00 – CONCRETE FORMING FOR SKATEPARKS
SECTION 03 20 00 – CONCRETE REINFORCING FOR SKATEPARKS
SECTION 03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR SKATEPARKS SECTION 03 37 13 – SHOTCRETE FOR SKATEPARKS
SECTION 03 39 00 – CONCRETE CURING FOR SKATEPARKS
DIVISION 05 – METALS
SECTION 05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATIONS FOR SKATEPARKS
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07 92 00 – JOINT SEALANTS FOR SKATEPARKS
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
SECTION 31 20 00 – EARTH MOVING FOR SKATEPARKS
503
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
SKATEPARK QUALIFICATION FORM
As part of their bid, the General Contractor must submit this form identifying the supplier and installer of the precast concrete skate elements, as well as the contractor placing, shooting and finishing the specialty skatepark concrete.
Submission of these forms does not constitute qualification. The Owner will review the firm’s project references for acceptable quality and workmanship. In the Owner’s absolute discretion, if the prior work of the firm is deemed unacceptable, the General Contractor will be declared a non-responsive bidder.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE & SHOTCRETE QUESTIONNAIRE
Does the contractor have a minimum of 5 (five) years of experience placing, shooting and finishing concrete for public skateparks? YES☐ or NO☐
Is the contractor’s shotcrete nozzleman certified by the American Concrete Institute? YES☐ or NO☐
Shotcrete Nozzleman:
• Name
• Certification ID
• Certification Expiration Date
In the past 5 (five) years has the contractor been sued for damages for breach of contract, defective construction or breach of warranty by a public entity? YES☐ or NO☐
In the past 5 (five) years has a claim or lawsuit been filed against the contractor’s performance bonding company arising from a breach of contract or defective construction? YES☐ or NO☐ List 5 (five) public projects where the contractor successfully placed, shot and finished concrete for a public skatepark within the last 5 (five) years. Projects must have been open and continuously in good operating condition for at least one year.
1. PROJECT NAME:
OWNER:
OWNER CONTACT INFORMATION:
YEAR CONSTRUCTED:
2. PROJECT NAME:
OWNER:
OWNER CONTACT INFORMATION:
YEAR CONSTRUCTED:
504
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
3. PROJECT NAME:
OWNER:
OWNER CONTACT INFORMATION:
YEAR CONSTRUCTED:
4. PROJECT NAME:
OWNER:
OWNER CONTACT INFORMATION:
YEAR CONSTRUCTED:
5. PROJECT NAME:
OWNER:
OWNER CONTACT INFORMATION:
YEAR CONSTRUCTED:
END OF SECTION
505
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
SECTION 03 10 00 – CONCRETE FORMING FOR SKATEPARKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. ALL FORMWORK IN THIS SECTION IS CONSIDERED SPECIALTY SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION. PLEASE
SEE BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS FOR CONTRACTORS ELIGIBLE TO PERFORM THIS WORK AS SPECIFIED HEREIN. BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORMS MUST BE TURNED IN WITH THE BID.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. CONSTRUCT ALL FORMWORK TO FOLLOW SKATEPARK DRAWINGS, UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. CONSTRUCT FORMWORK TO ALLOW FOR REMOVAL WITHOUT DAMAGING FINISHED CONCRETE SURFACES.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. SECTION 03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCING FOR SKATEPARKS B. SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR SKATEPARKS C. SECTION 03 37 13 – SHOTCRETE FOR SKATEPARKS
D. SECTION 03 39 00 – CONCRETE CURING FOR SKATEPARKS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. FORM MATERIALS: PLYWOOD, METAL, METAL-FRAMED PLYWOOD, OR OTHER APPROVED PANEL-TYPE
MATERIALS FREE FROM DEFECTS AND DISTORTION, AND TO PROVIDE FULL-DEPTH, CONTINUOUS, STRAIGHT, SMOOTH EXPOSED SURFACES.
B. USE FLEXIBLE OR CURVED FORMS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL RADII AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS.
C. PROVIDE 2” NOMINAL THICKNESS, SURFACED PLANK WOOD FORMS FOR STRAIGHT SECTIONS. USE FLEXIBLE METAL, 1” LUMBER, OR PLYWOOD FORMS FOR RADIUS BENDS. DO NOT OVERLAP FORMS, CREATING AN OFFSET FINISHED EDGE.
D. FORM-RELEASE AGENT: COMMERCIALLY FORMULATED FORM-RELEASE AGENT THAT WILL NOT BOND
WITH, STAIN, OR ADVERSELY AFFECT CONCRETE SURFACES AND WILL NOT IMPAIR SUBSEQUENT TREATMENTS OF CONCRETE SURFACES.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
i. SET, BRACE, AND SECURE EDGE FORMS, BULKHEADS, AND INTERMEDIATE SCREED GUIDES FOR PAVEMENT TO REQUIRED LINES, GRADES, AND ELEVATIONS. INSTALL FORMS TO ALLOW CONTINUOUS PROGRESS OF WORK.
B. DO NOT OVERLAP FORMS, CREATING AN OFFSET FINISHED EDGE.
C. CLEAN FORMS AFTER EACH USE AND COAT WITH FORM RELEASE AGENT TO ENSURE SEPARATION FROM CONCRETE WITHOUT DAMAGE.
END OF SECTION
506
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
SECTION 03 20 00 – CONCRETE REINFORCING FOR SKATEPARKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. ALL WORK IN THIS SECTION IS CONSIDERED SPECIALTY SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION. PLEASE SEE
BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS FOR CONTRACTORS ELIGIBLE TO PERFORM THIS WORK AS SPECIFIED HEREIN. BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORMS MUST BE TURNED IN WITH THE BID.
B. ALL REINFORCEMENT TO FOLLOW DRAWINGS, UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ALL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A-615 GRADE 60.
B. FOR REINFORCING THAT IS TO BE WELDED, CONFORM TO ASTM A706 GRADE 60.
C. USE ASTM A-108 GRADE 60 FOR ALL WELDED ANCHORS.
D. COMPLY WITH CRSI'S MANUAL OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT AND WITH RECOMMENDATIONS IN CRSI'S “PLACING REINFORCING BARS FOR PLACING AND SUPPORTING REINFORCEMENT.
E. LATEST ACI CODE AND DETAILING MANUAL APPLY.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMING FOR SKATEPARKS
B. SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR SKATEPARKS C. SECTION 03 37 13 - SHOTCRETE FOR SKATE ARKS
D. SECTION 03 39 00 - CONCRETE CURING FOR SKATE PARKS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. JOINT DOWEL BARS: PLAIN STEEL DOWELS, ASTM A 615/A 615M, GRADE 60. CUT BARS TRUE TO LENGTH WITH ENDS SQUARE AND FREE OF BURRS.
B. SLIP DOWELS ARE ACCEPTABLE.
C. BAR SUPPORTS: BOLSTERS, CHAIRS, SPACERS AND OTHER DEVICES FOR SPACING, SUPPORTING, AND FASTENING REINFORCEMENTS BARS, AND DOWELS IN PLACE. MANUFACTURE BAR SUPPORTS ACCORDING TO CRSI'S “MANUAL OF STANDARD PRACTICE” FROM STEEL WIRE, PLASTIC, OR PRECAST CONCRETE OR FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE OF GREATER COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH THAN CONCRETE.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. CLEAN REINFORCEMENT OF LOOSE RUST AND MILL SCALE, EARTH, ICE, OR OTHER BOND-REDUCING MATERIALS. ARRANGE, SPACE, AND SECURELY TIE BARS AND BAR SUPPORTS TO HOLD REINFORCEMENT IN POSITION DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT. MAINTAIN MINIMUM COVER TO REINFORCEMENT.
B. ALL REINFORCING BARS TO BE DEFORMED. LATEST ACI CODE AND DETAILING MANUAL APPLY. CLEAR CONCRETE COVERAGES TO ANY REINFORCING INCLUDING TIES ARE AS FOLLOWS:
i. 2" FORMED CONCRETE EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER.
ii. 1" SLABS AND JOISTS NOT EXPOSED TO WEATHER.
iii. 1-1/2" ALL OTHER.
C. SMALLER CLEARANCES PERMISSIBLE FOR PRECAST OR PRESTRESSED.
D. TENSION LAP SPLICES IN CONCRETE: UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING:
507
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
i. #3, 22"; #4, 29"; #5, 36”. MULTIPLY BY 1.3 FOR TOP BARS.
E. MINIMUM CLEAR COVER FOR SPLICED REINFORCING IS GREATER THAN ONE BAR DIAMETER, AND MINIMUM CLEAR SPACING IS GREATER THAN TWO BAR DIAMETERS. SPLICE BOTTOM BAR OVER SUPPORTS AND TOP BAR AT MIDSPAN ONLY. WHERE BARS ARE SHOWN SPLICED, THEY MAY RUN CONTINUOUS AT CONTRACTOR'S OPTION.
F. PLACE REBAR PER CRSI MANUAL. REBAR SPACINGS GIVEN ARE MAXIMUM ON CENTER WHETHER STATED AS "O.C." OR NOT, AND ALL REBAR IS CONTINUOUS WHETHER STATED AS "CONT." OR NOT. PROVIDE
BENT CORNER REBAR TO MATCH AND LAP WITH HORIZONTAL REBARS AT CORNERS AND INTERSECTION OF WALLS, BEAMS, BOND BEAMS AND FOOTINGS PER ACI MANUAL. DOWEL ALL VERTICAL REBAR TO FOUNDATIONS. SECURELY TIE ALL REBAR, INCLUDING DOWELS, IN LOCATION BEFORE PLACING CONCRETE OR GROUT.
END OF SECTION
508
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
SECTION 03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR SKATEPARKS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. ALL CONCRETE WORK IN THIS SECTION IS CONSIDERED SPECIALTY SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION.
PLEASE SEE BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS FOR CONTRACTORS ELIGIBLE FOR THE WORK AS SPECIFIED HEREIN. BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORMS MUST BE TURNED IN WITH THE BID.
B. PLACE ALL CONCRETE TO FOLLOW SKATEPARK DRAWINGS, UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. CONCRETE SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF ACI 301 WITH TYPE I/II CEMENT EXCEPT AS NOTED HEREIN.
B. SLAB CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 302.1 EXCEPT AS NOTED HEREIN.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMING FOR SKATE PARKS
B. SECTION 03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCING FOR SKATEPARKS C. SECTION 03 37 13 - SHOTCRETE FOR SKATE PARKS
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. CONCRETE CYLINDERS SHALL BE TAKEN AND TESTED PER THE ACI CODE, WHEN REQUIRED BY THE PROJECT.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. CONCRETE SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF ACI 301 WITH TYPE I/II/IL CEMENT. MINIMUM 28 DAY STRENGTH 4,000 PSI, EXCEPT AS FOLLOWS:
i. SMALL TO MEDIUM AGGREGATE (3/4” MAX.)
ii. MIX DESIGNS CONTAINING FLY ASH: THE AMOUNT OF FLY ASH USED SHALL NOT EXCEED 20% BY WEIGHT OF THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF FLY ASH PLUS CEMENT.
iii. AIR ENTRAINMENT NOT TO EXCEED 3%.
iv. WATER/CEMENT RATIO OF .45 OR LESS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. DO NOT INSTALL CONCRETE WORK OVER SATURATED, MUDDY, OR FROZEN SUBGRADE.
B. PROTECT ADJACENT WORK AND PROVIDE TEMPORARY BARRICADES AS REQUIRED FOR PROTECTION OF PROJECT WORK AND PUBLIC SAFETY.
C. ALL REINFORCING, INCLUDING DOWELS AND ANCHOR BOLTS, SHALL BE SECURELY TIED IN LOCATION BEFORE PLACING CONCRETE OR GROUT. DOWELS WILL NOT BE ALLOWED TO BE "STABBED" IN. 509
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
D. CONDUITS, PIPES, AND SLEEVES EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF ACI 6.3.
E. MECHANICALLY VIBRATE ALL CONCRETE FLATWORK WHEN PLACED, EXCEPT THAT SLABS ON GRADE AND SLABS ON DECK NEED TO BE VIBRATED ONLY AROUND EMBEDDED ITEMS.
F. CONSOLIDATE CONCRETE BY MECHANICAL VIBRATING EQUIPMENT SUPPLEMENTED BY HAND-SPADING, RODDING OR TAMPING. USE EQUIPMENT AND PROCEDURES TO CONSOLIDATE CONCRETE ACCORDING TO RECOMMENDATIONS IN ACI 309R.
i. CONSOLIDATE CONCRETE ALONG FACE OF FORMS AND ADJACENT TO TRANSVERSE JOINTS WITH AN INTERNAL VIBRATOR. KEEP VIBRATOR AWAY FROM JOINT ASSEMBLIES, REINFORCEMENT, OR SIDE FORMS. USE ONLY SQUARE-FACED SHOVELS FOR HAND-SPREADING AND CONSOLIDATION. CONSOLIDATE WITH CARE TO PREVENT DISLOCATING REINFORCEMENT,
DOWELS, AND JOINT DEVICES
G. COLD WEATHER PLACEMENT: COMPLY WITH ACI 306.1 AND AS FOLLOWS. PROTECT CONCRETE WORK
FROM PHYSICAL DAMAGE OR REDUCED STRENGTH THAT COULD BE CAUSED BY FROST, FREEZING ACTIONS, OR LOW TEMPERATURES.
i. WHEN AIR TEMPERATURE HAS FALLEN TO OR IS EXPECTED TO FALL BELOW 40 DEG F,
UNIFORMLY HEAT WATER AND AGGREGATES BEFORE MIXING TO OBTAIN A CONCRETE MIXTURE TEMPERATURE OF NOT LESS THAN 50 DEG F AT POINT OF PLACEMENT. ii. DO NOT USE FROZEN MATERIALS OR MATERIALS CONTAINING ICE OR SNOW. iii. DO NOT USE CALCIUM CHLORIDE, SALT, OR OTHER MATERIALS CONTAINING ANTIFREEZE
AGENTS OR CHEMICAL ACCELERATORS, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED AND APPROVED IN MIX DESIGNS.
H. HOT-WEATHER PLACEMENT: PLACE CONCRETE ACCORDING TO RECOMMENDATION IN ACI 305R AND AS FOLLOWS WHEN HOT-WEATHER CONDITIONS EXIST:
i. COOL INGREDIENTS BEFORE MIXING TO MAINTAIN CONCRETE TEMPERATURE AT TIME OF PLACEMENT BELOW 100 DEG FAHRENHEIT. CHILLED MIXING WATER OR CHOPPED ICE MAY BE
USED TO CONTROL TEMPERATURE, PROVIDED WATER EQUIVALENT OF ICE IS CALCULATED TO TOTAL AMOUNT OF MIXING WATER. USING LIQUID NITROGEN TO COOL CONCRETE IS CONTRACTORS OPTION.
ii. FOG-SPRAY FORMS, REINFORCEMENT STEEL, AND SUBGRADE JUST BEFORE PLACING CONCRETE. KEEP SUBGRADE MOISTURE UNIFORM WITHOUT STANDING WATER, SOFT SPOTS, OR DRY AREAS.
I. FINISH: ALL EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES ARE TO RECEIVE HARD STEEL TROWEL FINISH UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. TROWEL UNTIL ALL VISIBLE POURS ARE CLOSED. CEASE TROWELING BEFORE SURFACE BECOMES GLOSSY. DO NOT BROOM FINISH AND DO NOT TROWEL BURN SURFACE. i. ALL EDGE TOOLING SHOULD BE 1/8 INCH RADIUS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
J. COLOR: ALL CONCRETE SURFACES ARE TO BE NATURAL GRAY COLOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. MINOR VARIATIONS IN APPEARANCE OF COLORED CONCRETE, WHICH ARE SIMILAR TO NATURAL VARIATIONS IN COLOR AND APPEARANCE OF UNCOLORED CONCRETE, ARE ACCEPTABLE. DO NOT BROOM FINISH AND DO NOT TROWEL BURN SURFACE.
3.2 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES
A. CONTRACTOR MUST ACHIEVE POSITIVE DRAINAGE FOR ALL SURFACES WITHIN THE SKATEPARK AREA-- LEVEL TO A TOLERANCE OF ¼ INCH IN 10 FEET WHEN TESTED WITH A 10 FOOT STEEL STRAIGHTEDGE PLACED ON THE SURFACE. STANDING WATER WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. (REFER TO CIVIL GRADING PLAN)
3.3 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. REMOVE AND REPLACE CONCRETE PAVEMENT THAT IS BROKEN, DAMAGED, OR DEFECTIVE, OR DOES NOT MEET REQUIREMENTS IN THIS SECTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIX ALL CRACKS AND DISPLACEMENTS LARGER THAN 1/8" UP TO THE PROJECT COMPLETION.
510
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
B. PROTECT CONCRETE FROM DAMAGE. EXCLUDE TRAFFIC FROM PAVEMENT FOR AT LEAST 14 DAYS AFTER PLACEMENT. WHEN CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC IS PERMITTED, MAINTAIN PAVEMENT AS CLEAN AS POSSIBLE BY REMOVING SURFACE STAINS AND SPILLAGE OF MATERIALS AS THEY OCCUR.
C. MAINTAIN CONCRETE PAVEMENT OF FREE STAINS, DISCOLORATION, DIRT, AND OTHER FOREIGN MATERIAL.
END OF SECTION
511
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
SECTION 03 37 13 – SHOTCRETE FOR SKATEPARKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. SPECIALTY CONSTRUCTION:
i. DESCRIPTION: SHOTCRETE APPLICATION, CUTTING, SCULPTING AND FINISH WORK HAS BEEN DEEMED AS SPECIALTY CONSTRUCTION WORK WITHIN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. ALL
WORK RELATED TO THE SPECIALTY CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE COORDINATED BY THE PROJECT
ENGINEER, AND THE PRE-QUALIFIED SPECIALTY CONTRACTOR, PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. STANDARDS: COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CURRENT EDITION OF THE FOLLOWING CODES AND STANDARDS, EXCEPT AS HEREIN MODIFIED:
i. IBC: “INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE”
ii. AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI): 506, CHAPTER 13, WET METHOD. CHAPTER 5,
SHOTCRETE CREW
iii. ASTM: “AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS”
B. Contractor who places the shotcrete must also be the same contractor who installs the precast skate elements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. MANUFACTURER'S DATA: CURRENT PRINTED SPECIFICATIONS WITH APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION FOR PROPRIETARY MATERIALS INCLUDING CONCRETE ADMIXTURES.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 211.1- RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR SELECTING PROPORTIONS FOR NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE.
B. ACI 211.3- RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR SELECTING PROPORTIONS FOR LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE.
C. ACI 301- SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR BUILDINGS.
D. ACI 305- RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR HOT WEATHER CONCRETING.
E. ACI 306- RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR COLD WEATHER CONCRETING.
F. ACI 318- BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE G. ASTM C33- CONCRETE AGGREGATES
H. ASTM C94- READY-MIXED CONCRETE
I. ASTM C143- TEST FOR SLUMP OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE J. ASTM C150- PORTLAND CONCRETE
K. ASTM C260- AIR-ENTRAINING ADMIXTURES FOR CONCRETE
L. ASTM C494- CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES FOR CONCRETE
M. ASTM C618- FLY ASH AND RAW OR CALCINED NATURAL POZZOLANS FOR USE IN PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. COORDINATION:
i. COORDINATE SCHEDULES OF CONCRETE WORK TO ALLOW ADEQUATE TIME FOR INSTALLATION OF OTHER RELATED WORK.
512
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
ii. VERIFY THAT ANCHOR BOLTS AND OTHER EMBEDDED STEEL ITEMS TO BE CAST INTO CONCRETE ARE PROPERLY PLACED.
iii. COORDINATE EARTHWORK AND SOILS REPORT RECOMMENDATIONS WITH PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS.
iv. COORDINATE WITH FORM-WORK AND FINISHES SECTIONS TO PROVIDE FINISH FLOORLEVELNESS AND FLATNESS AS SPECIFIED HEREIN. SLOPE TO DRAINS AT GRADES AND PERCENT SLOPE SHOWN IN THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A.1 SHOTCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. ACI STANDARD 506, LATEST EDITION, “SPECIFICATION FOR MATERIALS, PROPORTIONING AND APPLICATION OF SHOTCRETE” AND ACI 506.2, LATEST EDITION, “RECOMMENDED PRACTICES FOR SHOTCRETING” SHALL BE FOLLOWED.
B. TYPE I/II/IL CEMENT, MINIMUM 28 DAY STRENGTH 4,000 PSI C. THE AMOUNT OF FLY ASH USED SHALL NOT EXCEED 20% BY WEIGHT OF THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF FLY ASH PLUS CEMENT.
D. AIR ENTRAINMENT NOT TO EXCEED 3%.
E. WATER/CEMENT RATIO OF .45 OR LESS
F. PROVIDE MIX DESIGNS THAT WILL MEET THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS LISTED HEREIN.
2.2 CONCRETE APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
A. FOR WET MIX SHOTCRETE:
i. MIXING EQUIPMENT: CAPABLE OF THOROUGHLY MIXING AGGREGATE, CEMENT AND WATER IN SUFFICIENT QUANTITY TO MAINTAIN CONTINUOUS PLACEMENT.
ii. READY-MIXED CONCRETE: ASTM C94, EXCEPT THAT IT MAY BE DELIVERED TO THE SITEIN THE
DRY STATE IF THE EQUIPMENT IS CAPABLE OF ADDING THE WATER AND MIXING IT SATISFACTORILY WITH THE DRY INGREDIENTS.
iii. AIR SUPPLY: CLEAN AIR ADEQUATE FOR MAINTAINING SUFFICIENT NOZZLE VELOCITYFOR PARTS
OF WORK, AND FOR SIMULTANEOUS OPERATION OF BLOW PIPE FOR CLEANING AWAY REBOUND.
iv. DELIVERY EQUIPMENT: CAPABLE OF DISCHARGING AGGREGATE-CEMENT-WATER MIXTURE ACCURATELY, UNIFORMLY, AND CONTINUOUSLY THROUGH DELIVERY HOSE.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. EXAMINATION: EXAMINE CONCRETE FORMWORK AND VERIFY THAT IT IS TRUE TO LINE AND DIMENSION,
ADEQUATELY BRACED AGAINST VIBRATION, AND CONSTRUCTED TO PERMIT ESCAPE OF AIR AND REBOUND BUT TO PREVENT LEAKAGE DURING SHOTCRETING. CORRECT DEFICIENCIES.
B. NOTIFICATION: NOTIFY OTHER TRADES INVOLVED IN AMPLE TIME TO PERMIT THE PROPER INSTALLATION OF THEIR WORK. COOPERATE IN SETTING SUCH WORK.
C. EXISTING SURFACES: EXAMINE EXISTING CONCRETE SURFACES FOR UNSOUND MATERIAL. CORRECT DEFICIENCIES.
513
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
3.2 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE
A. FORMS: USE A FORM-COATING MATERIAL ON REMOVABLE FORMS TO PREVENT ABSORPTION OF MOISTURE AND TO PREVENT BOND WITH SHOTCRETE.
3.3 CONCRETE BATCHING AND MIXING
A. PROPORTIONS: MIX PROPORTIONS SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY WEIGHT BATCHING.
B. SCHEDULING: CONCRETE SHALL NOT EXCEED A TEMPERATURE OF 100 DEGREES FAHRENHEIT AT TIME OF PLACEMENT UNLESS PRE- APPROVED BY THE PROJECT ENGINEER.
3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. PLACEMENT: USE SUITABLE DELIVERY EQUIPMENT AND PROCEDURES THAT WILL RESULT IN SHOTCRETE IN PLACE MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SPECIFICATION. DETERMINE OPERATING PROCEDURES
FOR PLACEMENT IN, EXTENDED DISTANCES, AND AROUND ANY OBSTRUCTIONS WHERE PLACEMENT VELOCITIES AND MIX CONSISTENCY MUST BE ADJUSTED.
B. PLACEMENT TECHNIQUES: DO NOT PLACE SHOTCRETE IF DRYING OR STIFFENING OF THE MIX TAKES PLACE AT ANY TIME PRIOR TO DELIVERY TO THE NOZZLE.
i. CONTROL THICKNESS, METHOD OF SUPPORT, AIR PRESSURE, AND/OR WATER CONTENT OF SHOTCRETE TO PRECLUDE SAGGING OR SLOUGHING OFF. DISCONTINUE SHOTCRETING OR
PROVIDE SUITABLE MEANS TO SCREEN THE NOZZLE STREAM IF WIND OR AIR CURRENTS CAUSE SEPARATION OF THE NOZZLE STREAM DURING PLACEMENT.
ii. HOLD NOZZLE AS PERPENDICULAR TO SURFACE AS WORK WILL PERMIT, TO SECURE MAXIMUM COMPACTION WITH MINIMUM REBOUND.
iii. IN SHOTCRETING WALLS, BEGIN APPLICATION AT BOTTOM. ENSURE WORK DOES NOT SAG. iv. LAYERING:
a. BUILD UP LAYERS BY MAKING SEVERAL PASSES OF NOZZLE OVER WORK AREA. b. MAKE SURE SURFACE IS ADEQUATELY ROUGH TO WHICH, AFTER HARDENING, ADDITIONAL LAYERS OF SHOTCRETE ARE TO BE BONDED.
c. DAMPEN SURFACE JUST PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF SUCCEEDING LAYERS. d. ALLOW EACH LAYER OF SHOTCRETE TO TAKE INITIAL SET BEFORE APPLYING SUCCEEDING LAYERS.
e. USE RADIAL TEMPLATES TO INSURE EXACT RADII FROM FLAT BOTTOM OF BOWL/PIPE TO FACE OF COPING. TEMPLATE SHALL BE FABRICATED FROM STEEL OR ¾” MINIMUM (19.05MM) PLYWOOD. CHECK EVERY HORIZONTAL FOOT (30.48CM) WHEN APPLYING SHOTCRETE FOR CONFORMANCE OF INTENDED WALL RADII. BRACE TEMPLATE AND
PLACE LEVELS AT ARC TO TANGENT CONNECTIONS TO INSURE NO KINKS WILL BE FORMED. KINKS AT THE BOTTOM OF BOWLS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. SLUMPING OF THE SHOTCRETE CAUSING COPING SETBACK WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. f. REMOVE ANY REBOUND OR ACCUMULATED LOOSE AGGREGATE FROM SURFACES TO BE
COVERED PRIOR TO PLACING THE INITIAL OR ANY SUCCEEDING LAYERS OF SHOTCRETE. REBOUND SHALL NOT BE USED AS AGGREGATE.
v. PLACEMENT AROUND REINFORCEMENT:
a. HOLD THE NOZZLE AT SUCH DISTANCE AND ANGLE TO PLACE MATERIALS BEHIND REINFORCEMENT BEFORE ANY MATERIAL IS ALLOWED TO ACCUMULATE ON ITS FACE. b. TEST TO ASCERTAIN IF ANY VOID OR SAND POCKETS HAVE DEVELOPED AROUND OR
BEHIND REINFORCEMENT BY PROBING WITH AN AWL OR OTHER POINTED TOOL AFTER
THE SHOTCRETE HAS ACHIEVED ITS INITIAL SET, BY REMOVAL OF RANDOMLY SELECTED BARS, OR CORING OR OTHER SUITABLE STANDARDS.
514
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
C. ACCESS: ALLOW EASY ACCESS TO SHOTCRETE SURFACES FOR SCREEDING AND FINISHING, PERMITTING UNINTERRUPTED APPLICATION.
3.5 REMOVAL OF SURFACE DEFECTS IN CONCRETE
A. GENERAL: REMOVE AND REPLACE SHOTCRETE WHICH LACKS UNIFORMITY, EXHIBITS SEGREGATION
HONEYCOMBING, OR LAMINATION, OR WHICH CONTAINS ANY DRY PATCHES, SLUGS, VOIDS OR POCKETS. REMOVE DEFECTIVE AREAS.
B. SOUNDING: SOUND WORK WITH HAMMER FOR VOIDS. REMOVE AND REPLACE DAMAGED IN-PLACE SHOTCRETE.
3.6 SHOTCRETE FINISH
A. FINISH: ALL EXPOSED SHOTCRETE SURFACES ARE TO RECEIVE HARD STEEL TROWEL FINISH UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. TROWEL UNTIL ALL VISIBLE POURS ARE CLOSED. CEASE TROWEL BEFORE SURFACE BECOMES GLOSSY. DO NOT BROOM FINISH AND DO NOT TROWEL BURN SURFACE.
B. GRINDING THE SURFACES WILL NOT BE AN ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF ACHIEVING THE INTENDED RADII/ANGLE.
C. COLOR: ALL SHOTCRETE SURFACES ARE TO BE NATURAL GRAY COLOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. MINOR VARIATIONS IN APPEARANCE OF COLORED CONCRETE, WHICH ARE SIMILAR TO NATURAL VARIATIONS IN COLOR AND APPEARANCE OF UNCOLORED CONCRETE, ARE ACCEPTABLE. DO NOT BROOM FINISH AND DO NOT TROWEL BURN SURFACE.
D. DURING THE CURING PERIOD, CONCRETE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT A TEMPERATURE ABOVE 40 DEGREES FAHRENHEIT AND IN MOIST CONDITION. FOR INITIAL CURING, CONCRETE SHALL BE KEPT CONTINUOUSLY MOIST FOR 24 HOURS AFTER PLACEMENT IS COMPLETE. FINAL CURING SHALL CONTINUE FOR SEVEN DAYS AFTER PLACEMENT. COVER CONCRETE WITH POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC TO MAINTAIN TEMPERATURE IF NECESSARY. LAP SEAMS IN THE PLASTIC 6” AND WEIGH DOWN.
3.7 CONCRETE JOINTS
A. CLEANING: THE ENTIRE JOINT SHALL BE THOROUGHLY CLEANED AND WETTED PRIOR TO THE APPLICATION OF ADDITIONAL SHOTCRETE.
B. REINFORCEMENT: MAKE JOINTS PERPENDICULAR TO THE MAIN REINFORCEMENT. CONTINUE REINFORCEMENT ACROSS JOINTS.
3.8 CRACKING
A. CRACKING FROM INADEQUATE CURING IS NOT ALLOWED. SAW CUT JOINTS AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS MAY BE SHOWN IN THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS FOR DIAGRAMMATIC PURPOSES ONLY. THE
CONTRACTOR MAY, WITH APPROVAL OF THE SKATEPARK DESIGNER, RECOMMEND AND DETAIL OTHER JOINTS REQUIRED TO PREVENT CRACKING.
B. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIX ALL CRACKS AND DISPLACEMENTS LARGER THAN 1/8” UP TO THE PROJECT COMPLETION.
END OF SECTION
515
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
SECTION 03 39 00 – CONCRETE CURING FOR SKATEPARKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. GENERAL: PROTECT FRESHLY PLACED CONCRETE FROM PREMATURE DRYING AND EXCESSIVE COLD OR HOT TEMPERATURES. COMPLY WITH ACI 306.1 FOR COLD-WEATHER PROTECTION AND FOLLOW RECOMMENDATIONS IN ACI 305R FOR HOT-WEATHER PROTECTION DURING CURING.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. EVAPORATION RETARDANT: WATERBORNE, MONOMOLECULAR FILM FORMING, MANUFACTURED FOR
APPLICATION TO FRESH CONCRETE, SUCH AS EUCOBAR EVAPORATION RETARDANT BY THE EUCLID CHEMICAL COMPANY OR SPECFILM CONCENTRATE.
B. ABSORPTIVE COVER: AASHTO M 182, CLASS 2, BURLAP CLOTH MADE FROM JUTE OR KENAF, WEIGHING APPROXIMATELY 9 OZ./SQ. YD. DRY.
C. MOISTURE-RETAINING COVER: ASTM C 171, POLYETHYLENE FILM OR WHITE BURLAP-POLYETHYLENE SHEET (BUR LENE).
D. WATER: POTABLE.
E. CURING COMPOUND: ASTM C-309, CLEAR, ODORLESS, WATER-BASED, NO VOLATILE ORGANIC
COMPOUND EMITTING, NON-STAINING, MEMBRANE-FORMING, COMPATIBLE WITH SUBSEQUENT CONCRETE TREATMENTS. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS: R.W. MEADOWS 1100-CLEAR, SPECFILM E-CURE, OR APPROVED EQUAL.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. APPLY EVAPORATION RETARDANT TO CONCRETE SURFACES IF HOT, DRY, OR WINDY CONDITIONS CAUSE MOISTURE LOSS BEFORE AND DURING FINISHING OPERATIONS. APPLY TO EXPOSED SURFACE OF CONCRETE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURERS WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS AS NECESSARY.
B. PROTECT CONCRETE SURFACES AGAINST RAPID DRYING. KEEP MOIST FOR NECESSARY AMOUNT OF TIME TO REACH CONCRETE STRENGTH AND INHIBIT MOISTURE LOSS AFTER PLACING.
C. BEGIN CURING AFTER FINISHING CONCRETE, BUT NOT BEFORE FREE WATER HAS DISAPPEARED FROM CONCRETE SURFACE.
D. CURING METHODS: CURE CONCRETE BY CURING COMPOUND, MOISTURE CURING, MOISTURERETAINING-COVER CURING, OR A COMBINATION OF THESE AS FOLLOWS:
i. CURING COMPOUND: MEET REQUIREMENTS OF MANUFACTURER’S CURRENT PRINTED APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS AND COVERAGE RATE CHART. FOR HORIZONTAL APPLICATIONS,
IMMEDIATELY APPLY AFTER ALL SURFACE WATER HAS DISAPPEARED AND THE CONCRETE SURFACE IS HARD ENOUGH TO WALK ON. FOR VERTICAL APPLICATIONS, APPLY IMMEDIATELY AFTER REMOVING THE CONCRETE FORMS. APPLY IN A UNIFORM AND CONTINUOUS MANNER.
AVOID OVER-APPLICATION OR PUDDLING OF CURING COMPOUND. PROTECT SURFACE FROM WATER, ADJACENT SHOTCRETE WORK, AND DEBRIS.
ii. MOISTURE CURING: KEEP SURFACES CONTINUOUSLY MOIST FOR NOT LESS THAN SEVEN DAYS WITH THE FOLLOWING MATERIALS:
• WATER.
• CONTINUOUS WATER-FOG SPRAY.
• ABSORPTIVE COVER, WATER SATURATED, AND KEPT CONTINUOUSLY MOIST. COVER CONCRETE SURFACES AND EDGES, OVERLAP SEAMS MIN. 6" BETWEEN ADJACENT ABSORPTIVE COVERS.
516
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
iii. MOISTURE-RETAINING-COVER CURING: COVER CONCRETE SURFACES WITH MOISTURERETAINING COVER FOR CURING CONCRETE, PLACED IN WIDEST PRACTICABLE WIDTH, WITH SIDES AND ENDS LAPPED AT LEAST 6 INCHES.
E. CRACKING:
i. CRACKING FROM INADEQUATE CURING IS NOT ALLOWED. SAW CUT JOINTS AND
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS MAY BE SHOWN IN THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS FOR DIAGRAMMATIC PURPOSES ONLY. THE CONTRACTOR MAY, WITH APPROVAL OF THE SKATEPARK DESIGNER, RECOMMEND AND DETAIL OTHER JOINTS REQUIRED TO PREVENT CRACKING. ii. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIX ALL CRACKS AND DISPLACEMENTS LARGER THAN 1/8” UP TO THE PROJECT COMPLETION.
END OF SECTION
517
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
SECTION 05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATIONS FOR SKATEPARKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
FURNISH MATERIALS AND PERFORM LABOR REQUIRED TO EXECUTE THIS WORK AS INDICATED ON THE
DRAWINGS, AS SPECIFIED, AND AS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO BOWL STEEL COPING, LEDGE STEEL EDGING, HANDRAILS, AND GRIND RAILS.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ALL WELDING SHALL CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF AWS STANDARDS.
B. ASTM A-36 FOR C, MC, ANGLES, AND PLATES.
C. ASTM A-53 GRADE A OR A-500 GRADE A OR A-501 GRADE A FOR STEEL PIPES.
D. ASTM A-123 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ZINC (HOT-DIP GALVANIZED) COATINGS ON IRON AND STEEL
PRODUCTS
E. ASTM A-780 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR REPAIR OF DAMAGED AND UNCOATED AREAS OF HOT-DIP GALVANIZED COATINGS.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR SKATEPARKS B. SECTION 03 37 13 – SHOTCRETE FOR SKATEPARKS
C. SECTION 03 40 00 – PRECAST CONCRETE FOR SKATEPARKS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. FURNISH MATERIALS AND PERFORM LABOR REQUIRED TO EXECUTE THIS WORK AS INDICATED ON THE
DRAWINGS, AS SPECIFIED, AND AS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO BOWL STEEL COPING, LEDGE STEEL EDGING, HANDRAILS, AND GRIND RAILS.
B. USE MATERIALS OF SIZE AND THICKNESS SHOWN OR, IF NOT SHOWN, OF REQUIRED SIZE AND THICKNESS TO PRODUCE STRENGTH AND DURABILITY IN THE FINISHED PRODUCT.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. ALL WELDING SHALL CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF AWS STANDARDS. ALL WELDING SHALL BE SHIELDED METAL ARC WELDING. WELDS IN FINISH WORK SHALL BE FILLED OUT FLUSH, GROUND AND DISTRESSED. WELDERS FOR STRUCTURAL SHALL BE CERTIFIED.
B. USING SKILLED WORKERS, FORM AND FABRICATE ITEMS OF WORK AS INDICATED AND AS REQUIRED TO MEET INSTALLATION CONDITIONS. MAKE PROVISIONS TO CONNECT WITH OR RECEIVE THE WORK OF OTHER TRADES.
518
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
C. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, WELD OR BOLT CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MEMBERS. WHERE POSSIBLE, CONCEAL CONNECTIONS ON THE FINISHED WORK. FIT OR MITER EXPOSED JOINTS TO HAIRLINE TOLERANCE OR USE WELDED JOINTS. ON FINISHED SURFACES, GRIND ALL WELDS SMOOTH AND FLUSH WITH BASE METAL.
D. WELD CONNECTIONS WHICH ARE NOT TO BE LEFT AS EXPOSED JOINTS, BUT CANNOT BE SHOP WELDED BECAUSE OF SHIPPING SIZE LIMITATIONS.
E. CAP ALL EXPOSED TUBE OR PIPE ENDS. USE SIZE AND THICKNESS OF MATERIAL SHOWN. PROPERLY FIT AND WELD CAP AT JOINT, GRIND WELD SMOOTH AND FLUSH WITH BASE METAL.
F. BEND PIPE OR TUBING WITHOUT COLLAPSING OR DEFORMING THE WALLS, SO AS TO PRODUCE A SMOOTH UNIFORM CURVED SECTION AND MAINTAIN UNIFORM SECTIONAL SHAPE.
G. WHERE ITEMS ARE TO BE IMBEDDED IN CONCRETE OR MASONRY, PROVIDE WELDED-ON ANCHORS OR LUGS AS INDICATED OR REQUIRED.
H. PROVIDE TEMPORARY BRACING OR ANCHORS IN FORMWORK FOR ITEMS WHICH ARE TO BE BUILT INTO CONCRETE OR SIMILAR CONSTRUCTION.
I. FASTENING TO IN-PLACE CONSTRUCTION: PROVIDE ANCHORING DEVICES AND FASTENERS WHERE
NECESSARY FOR SECURING MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS TO IN-PLACE CONSTRUCTION INCLUDING THREADED FASTENERS FOR CONCRETE INSERTS, OR OTHER CONNECTORS AS REQUIRED.
J. GALVANIZING REPAIR - USE A HIGH ZINC DUST CONTENT PAINT FOR RE-GALVANIZING WELDS IN GALVANIZED STEEL. HOT GALVANIZED SOLDER IS ALSO ACCEPTABLE. USE RUST-OLEUM COLD GALVANIZING COMPOUND SPRAY, OR SIMILAR.
K. POWDER COATING REPAIR—USE AN APPROPRIATELY COLOR MATCHED POWDER COAT TOUCH-UP SPRAY PAINT ON WELDED OR DAMAGED POWDER COATED SURFACES.
END OF SECTION
519
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
SECTION 07 92 00 – JOINT SEALANTS FOR SKATEPARKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. GENERAL: CONSTRUCT CONSTRUCTION, ISOLATION, AND CONTRACTION JOINTS AND TOOL EDGINGS TRUE TO LINE WITH FACES PERPENDICULAR TO SURFACE PLANE OF CONCRETE. CONSTRUCT TRANSVERSE JOINTS AT RIGHT ANGLES TO CENTERLINE, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR SKATEPARKS SECTION 03 37 13 – SHOTCRETE FOR SKATEPARKS
SECTION 03 40 00 – PRECAST CONCRETE FOR SKATEPARKS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINT FILLER STRIPS: EXPANSION JOINT MATERIALS SHALL BE FLEXIBLE POLYETHYLENE CLOSED CELL FOAM OR SIMILAR AND SUPPLIED BY CONCRETE CONTRACTOR. DECK-OFOAM OR EQUIVALENT.
B. EXPANSION JOINT SEALANT: SIKAFLEX - 1A NS TG POLYURETHANE ELASTOMERIC SEALANT, OR APPROVED EQUAL. COLOR OF CAULK SHOULD RESEMBLE NATURAL COLOR OF CONCRETE (ALUMINUM GRAY OR LIMESTONE).
C. SAW CUT JOINT SEALANT: SIKAFLEX-1C SL HIGH PERFORMANCE, SELF- LEVELING, 1-PART POLYURETHANE SEALANT, OR APPROVED EQUAL. COLOR OF CAULK SHOULD RESEMBLE NATURAL COLOR OF CONCRETE (ALUMINUM GRAY OR LIMESTONE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE
A. EXPANSION JOINTS: FORM EXPANSION JOINTS OF SPECIFIED JOINT-FILLER STRIPS WHERE INDICATED i. LOCATE EXPANSION JOINTS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS.
ii. EXTEND JOINT FILLERS FULL WIDTH AND DEPTH OF JOINT.
B. INSTALL DOWEL BARS AND SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES AT JOINTS WHERE INDICATED. LUBRICATE OR ASPHALTCOAT ONE-HALF DOWEL LENGTH TO PREVENT CONCRETE BONDING TO ONE SIDE OF JOINT. i. SPEED DOWELS, OR APPROVED EQUAL, ARE ACCEPTABLE FOR SLIP DOWELS C. CONTROL JOINTS: FORM WEAKENED-PLANE JOINTS, SECTIONING CONCRETE INTO AREAS AS INDICATED. CONSTRUCT CONTROL JOINTS FOR A DEPTH AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS (GENERALLY 1/3 OF THE PAVEMENT THICKNESS), AS FOLLOWS:
i. SAWED JOINTS: FORM CONTROL JOINTS WITH POWER SAWS EQUIPPED WITH SHATTERPROOF ABRASIVE OR DIAMOND-RIMMED BLADES. CUT 1/8 INCH WIDE JOINTS INTO CONCRETE WHEN
CUTTING ACTION WILL NOT TEAR, ABRADE, OR OTHERWISE DAMAGE SURFACE AN BEFORE 520
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
DEVELOPING RANDOM CONTRACTION CRACKS. EARLY SAW CUTS ARE APPROXIMATELY 1 INCH DEEP, REGARDLESS OF PAVEMENT THICKNESS. REFER TO CONTROL JOINT GUIDE DRAWING OF PLAN SET IF APPLICABLE.
ii. IF SKATEPARK PROJECT DESIGN UTILIZES POURED STEPS, CONTROL JOINTS MUST BE CUT 3 - 4 FEET FROM THE EDGE OF THE TOP STEP.
D. ALL JOINTS CREATED BY THE PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE ADJACENT TO PREVIOUSLY CAST CONCRETE IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE PARTY PLACING THE ABUTTING CONCRETE.
E. POST CURE DETAIL WORK (AS NEEDED): GRIND SMOOTH ANY INCONSISTENCIES IN THE FINISH OR HIGH SPOTS BETWEEN POURS.
END OF SECTION
521
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
SECTION 31 20 00 – EARTH MOVING FOR SKATEPARKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. PERFORM ALL EARTHWORK FOR SKATEPARK ITEMS AS INDICATED ON THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS AND SPECIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. FURNISH MATERIALS, LABOR, TRANSPORTATION, SERVICES, AND EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO PERFORM
ALL EARTHWORK OPERATIONS RELATED TO THE SKATEPARK AS INDICATED ON THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS. COMPLETE AS SHOWN AND AS SPECIFIED HEREIN.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TESTING SERVICES: COORDINATE THE FOLLOWING TESTING WITH THE OWNER RETAINED TESTING AGENCY (IF REQUIRED BY THE PROJECT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS):
i. MATERIAL EVALUATIONS TESTS FOR AGGREGATE BASE, SUBGRADE, AND IMPORTED STRUCTURAL FILL.
ii. INSPECTION OF STRUCTURAL FILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION. iii. INSPECTION OF FINAL SUBGRADE.
iv. BASE MATERIAL COMPACTION TEST FOR EVERY 1000 S.F. OF CONCRETE FLATWORK IN SKATEPARK AREA TO ENSURE 95% COMPACTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CIVIL ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTING AGENCY RECOMMENDATIONS.
B. THE EARTHWORK SHALL BE DONE UNDER SUPERVISION OF A SOILS ENGINEER RETAINED BY THE OWNER (IF REQUIRED BY THE PROJECT), WHO SHALL VERIFY EARTHWORK SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPORT OF SLAB ON GRADE AND FOR THE CONTROL OF SOIL SWELLING. FIELD DENSITY TESTS TO DETERMINE THE
LEVEL OF COMPACTION BEING ACHIEVED IN THE FILL SHALL BE PERFORMED ON EACH LIFT AT THE
BEGINNING OF FILL PLACEMENT AND AT A FREQUENCY MUTUALLY AGREED UPON BY THE PROJECT TEAM FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE PROJECT.
C. A SOILS REPORT MAY NOT EXIST FOR THIS PROJECT. OWNER SHALL RETAIN A SOILS ENGINEER (IF SO
REQUIRED BY THE PROJECT) TO VERIFY EXCAVATIONS FOR ASSUMED ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING, LOW SETTLEMENT AND SWELL POTENTIAL, AND TO MAKE ANY ADDITIONAL RECOMMENDATIONS.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. EXISTING CONDITIONS: THE EXISTING TOPOGRAPHIC CONDITIONS ARE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
B. UPON BEGINNING THE EARTHWORK, CONTRACTOR REPRESENTS THAT HE HAS INSPECTED THE SITE AND
SATISFIED HIMSELF AS TO ACTUAL GRADES AND LEVELS AND THE TRUE CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THE WORK IS TO BE PERFORMED.
C. PROMPTLY NOTIFY THE OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE OF UNEXPECTED SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS.
1.5 PROTECTION
A. MAINTAIN BENCHMARKS, MONUMENTS, AND OTHER REFERENCE POINTS. IF DISTURBED OR DESTROYED, REPLACE AS DIRECTED.
B. PROTECT EXCAVATIONS BY SHORING, BRACING, SHEETING, UNDERPINNING, OR OTHER METHODS, AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT CAVE-INS OR LOOSE DIRT FROM ENTERING EXCAVATIONS. BARRICADE OPEN EXCAVATIONS ADJACENT TO PUBLIC STREETS AND WALKS.
522
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
C. COVER HOLES AND TRENCHES WHEN WORK IS NOT IN PROGRESS.
D. PROMPTLY REPAIR DAMAGE TO ADJACENT FACILITIES CAUSED BY EARTHWORK OPERATIONS. COST OF REPAIR AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.
1.6 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM – AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS.
B. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS (AS SPECIFIED IN THE GENERAL PROVISIONS) PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. PROVIDE STRUCTURAL FILL AS REQUIRED TO MEET PROPOSED SUBGRADE ELEVATIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH GRADING PLAN, CIVIL ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTING AGENCY RECOMMENDATIONS.
B. PROVIDE THE SPECIFIED DEPTH OF COMPACTED AGGREGATE BASE MATERIAL IF REQUIRED.
C. SUITABLE MATERIALS MAY BE OBTAINED FROM ONSITE EXCAVATIONS, MAY BE PROCESSED ONSITE
MATERIALS, OR MAY BE IMPORTED PROVIDED THESE MATERIALS MEET ALL THE REQUIREMENTS IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. IF IMPORTED MATERIALS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS
SECTION OR TO MEET THE QUANTITY REQUIREMENTS OF THE PROJECT, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
PROVIDE THE IMPORTED FILL MATERIALS AND THE REQUIRED CONFORMANCE REPORTS OF TEST RESULTS
AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER, UNLESS A UNIT PRICE ITEM IS INCLUDED FOR IMPORTED MATERIALS (INCLUDING THE APPROPRIATE REQUIRED TESTING REPORTS) IN THE BIDDING SCHEDULE.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. ESTABLISH AND MAINTAIN REQUIRED LINES AND GRADE ELEVATIONS. DESIGNATE AND IDENTIFY DATUM ELEVATION AND PROJECT ENGINEERING REFERENCE POINTS.
B. BEFORE STARTING GRADING AND EXCAVATION, ESTABLISH THE LOCATION AND EXTENT OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES IN THE WORK AREA. EXERCISE CARE TO PROTECT EXISTING UTILITIES DURING EARTHWORK OPERATIONS. PERFORM EXCAVATION WORK NEAR UTILITIES BY HAND AND PROVIDE NECESSARY SHORING, SHEETING, AND SUPPORTS AS THE WORK PROGRESSES. NOTIFY RESPECTIVE UTILITY COMPANIES OF DAMAGE CAUSED TO ACTIVE UTILITIES IMMEDIATELY.
C. PROOF-ROLL EXPOSED SUBGRADES WITH A LOADED TRI-AXLE DUMP TRUCK OR SIMILAR PIECE OF
RUBBER-TIRED CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT TO ASSIST IN THE EVALUATION OF THE SUBGRADES ACROSS THE SITE. IF UNSTABLE AREAS ARE DETECTED, AN INITIAL ATTEMPT SHOULD BE MADE TO AERATE (12 INCHES MIN.) AND DENSIFY THE SUBGRADE BY RECOMPACTION WHERE NATURAL MOISTURE CONTENTS ARE AT APPROPRIATE LEVELS. IF THIS PROCEEDURE IS INEFFECTIVE, THE DISTURBED SOILS SHOULD BE UNDERCUT AND REPLACED WITH CLEAN FILL AND/OR STABILIZING MATERIALS. COMPACT TO 95% OF THE MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM D698 STANDARD PROCTOR METHOD. FILL AND CONSOLIDATE DEPRESSED AREAS. A FIRM, NON-YIELDING SUBGRADE SHOULD BE ESTABLISHED PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH FILL PLACEMENT.
D. SOIL COMPACTION SHALL BE ACHIEVED BY MEANS OF PNEUMATIC TIRE ROLLERS, HOE PACKS, RIDE-ON DRUM ROLLER OR OTHER MECHANICAL TAMPERS (PLATE, RAMMER, OR WALK BEHIND ROLLER).
E. BRING UP FILL USING STOCKPILED MATERIAL AND/OR APPROVED MATERIAL WITH LOW PLASTICITY. THE
FILL SHOULD BE PLACED IN LIFTS THIN ENOUGH TO ATTAIN THE SPECIFIED COMPACTION LEVEL THROUGHOUT THE ENTIRE LIFT THICKNESS. PRIOR TO COMPACTION, MOISTURE CONDITION AS NEEDED. COMPACT EACH LIFT TO AT LEAST 95 PERCENT OF ASTM D698.
F. THE EXCAVATION CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL SWELLABLE SOIL AS DIRECTED BY THE SOILS ENGINEER.
G. EXCAVATION AND COMPACTION OF FILL SHALL EXTEND TO 5 FEET BEYOND SKATE PARK FOOTPRINT. 523
WESTACRE SKATEPARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT BID SET
WEST SACRAMENTO, CA
H. ANY PORTION OF THE BACKFILL OPERATION THAT DOES NOT MEET THE MINIMUM COMPACTION
REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION SHALL BE REMOVED, RECOMPACTED, AND RE-TESTED AT THE COST OF THE CONTRACTOR UNTIL PASSING TESTS ARE OBTAINED.
I. PROCEED WITH SUB-BASE IF REQUIRED ONLY AFTER NONCONFORMING CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN CORRECTED AND SUBGRADE HAS BEEN INSPECTED. A FIRM, NON-YIELDING SUBGRADE SHOULD BE ESTABLISHED PRIOR TO BASE COURSE PLACEMENT.
J. PROVIDE THE SPECIFIED DEPTH OF COMPACTED AGGREGATE BASE MATERIAL IF REQUIRED. COMPACT AGGREGATE BASE TO 95% OF THE MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM D698 STANDARD PROCTOR METHOD IF REQUIRED.
K. PROCEED WITH CONCRETE ONLY AFTER NONCONFORMING CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN CORRECTED, SUBGRADE HAS BEEN INSPECTED, AND FORMWORK AND FIELD MOCK-UPS HAVE BEEN REVIEWED.
L. UPON COMPLETION OF EARTHWORK OPERATION, CLEAN AREAS WITHIN CONTRACT LIMITS, REMOVE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT.
M. REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF PROPERLY OFF SITE ALL ROCKS AND OTHER DEBRIS FROM GRADING OPERATIONS
AT APPROVED RECYCLING CENTERS AND/OR LICENSED LANDFILL, IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES.
END OF SECTION
524
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16050 September 2024 Electrical General Requirements
16050-1
SECTION 16050
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all necessary labor, materials, tools and equipment to perform and completely finish the work according to the intent of this specification, and the accompanying drawings.
B. Furnish and install any incidental work which can reasonably be inferred as required and necessary to provide complete and workable systems.
C. Provide connections of all equipment including installation and connection of all motors, relays, remote starters, etc.
D. The requirements of the General and Supplemental Conditions, and Division 1 apply to this Division and these specifications. All sections tin Division 16 are interrelated.
Work specified in order sections, as applicable, shall apply to all work here under.
1.2 LOCAL CONDITIONS
A. Examine site; verify dimensions and locations against drawings and become informed of all conditions under which work is to be done before submitting proposal. No allowance will be made for extra expenses because of omission on Contractor’s apart to include cost of work under prevailing conditions.
B. Information shown relative to services is based upon available records and data shall be regarded as approximate only. Minor deviations found necessary to conform with actual locations and conditions shall be made without extra cost.
1.3 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Obtain and pay for all permits and service charges required in installation of the work. Arrange for required inspections and secure approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
B. During its progress, work shall be subject to inspection by Project Inspector.
1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Work and materials shall be in full accordance with California Occupational Safety Health Act (CAL-OSHA), California Electrical Code (CEC), State Fire Marshal, Electrical Safety Orders (Title 8, Subchapter 5), the National Fire Protection Association, California Building Code (CBC); California Code of Regulations – Title 24 and other applicable State or local laws or regulations. Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. 525
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16050 September 2024 Electrical General Requirements
16050-2
B. Electrical materials shall bear the label of, or be listed by, the Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) unless of a type for which label or listing service is not provided.
C. Materials and components shall conform to Industry Standards, including:
1. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
2. ANSI – American National Standard Institute
3. ASTM – American Society for Testing Material Association
4. IPCEA – Insulated Power Cable Owners Representative’s Association
5. CBM – Certified Ballast Manufacturers
D. When Contract Documents differ from governing codes, furnish and install larger size or higher standards called for without extra charge.
1.5 REVIEW OF MATERIALS
A. Prior to commencement of work and within 35 days after award of contract, submit for approval in accordance with General Conditions all equipment and materials to be furnished including all substitutions.
1. Equipment / Product submittals shall be bound and indexed by their referenced specification section and shall include a table of contents listing all equipment submitted including description of product and part numbers. Where a group or series of products are submitted, each item does not have to be listed only the series need to be identified.
2. Shop drawings submittals shall be neat and professionally done using CAD (computer aided drafting), hand-drawn submittals will not be accepted. Shop drawings shall have sufficient information to clearly indicate work to be performed and be complete including device / equipment locations, wire sizes, wire types and number of wires, symbol list or legend, point-to-point connections, wiring diagrams, and equipment anchorage detail where needed.
B. Substitutions
1. Substitution will be considered 10 days prior to the award of the contract on each item of material or equipment. No substitutions will be considered thereafter.
Substitutions will be interpreted to be all manufacturers other than those specifically listed by model or catalog number. Should the original submittal of a proposed substitution be rejected, the specified item shall be furnished.
2. Submit complete information or catalog data to show equality of equipment or material offered to that specified. No substitutions will be allowed unless requested and approved in writing. Materials of equal merit and appearance, in the opinion of the Owners Representative, will be approved for use. Owners Representative reserves the right to require originally specified item. 526
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16050 September 2024 Electrical General Requirements
16050-3
3. Acceptance of a substitute is not to be considered a release from the Specifications. Any deficiencies in an item, even though approved, shall be corrected by the Contractor at his expense.
4. Responsibility for installation of approved substitution is include herein. Any changes required for installation of approved substituted equipment shall be made without additional cost to Owner.
5. Where it is in the best interest of the Owner, Owners Representative may give written consent to a submittal received after expiration of designated time limits, or for an additional resubmittal.
6. Submit for approval in ample time to avoid delay of construction, shop drawings or submittals on all items of equipment and materials covered in list mentioned above. Submit in accordance with General Conditions in a complete package; partial submittals will not be considered.
7. Failure to comply with any of the preceding requirements will necessitate that the specified materials be submitted and supplied.
1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Upon completion of Work, furnish Owners Representative with complete sets of plans on reproducible vellums (not marked blueprints) upon which shall be shown all Work installed under Contract, which are note in accordance with Original Contract Drawings.
B. All symbols and designations used in preparing Record Drawings shall match those used in Contract Drawings.
C. Show all buried and concealed conduit, stubs-outs, etc. Locate all buried conduit and stub-outs by dimensions from permanent, easily located and identifiable portions of structure; also dimension ends of stub-outs, etc. Note depth of buried items below grade.
1.7 ADDENDA AND CHANGE ORDERS
A. Changes in the plans and specifications shall be made by Addenda or Change Orders signed by the Owners Representative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials mentioned herein or on drawings require that each item listed be provided and of quality noted, or an approved equal. All material shall be new, full weight and standard in all respects and in first-class conditions. Where possible, all materials used shall be of the same brand or manufacturer throughout for each class of material or equipment.
527
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16050 September 2024 Electrical General Requirements
16050-4
B. Grade or quality of materials desired is indicated by trade names or catalog numbers stated herein. Dimensions, sizes and capacities shown are a minimum and shall not be changed without permission of Owners Representative.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DRAWINGS AND COORDINATION
A. Examine Drawings and Site; be familiar with types of construction where electrical installation is involved.
B. Work shall be neatly installed in a workmanlike manor in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. Work shall be coordinated with other trades to avoid conflicts. Clarifications will be made by Owners Representative and minor adjustments shall be made without additional cost to Owner. Obtain ruling from Owners Representative concerning any obvious discrepancies or omissions in work before bidding. All work involved in correcting obvious errors or omissions after award of Contract shall be performed as directed by Owners Representative without additional cost to Owner
C. Layouts of equipment, accessories and wiring systems are diagrammatic (not pictorial), but shall be followed as closely as possible. Drawings and Specifications are for assistance and guidance, and exact locations, distances, levels, etc., will be governed by Site.
D. All equipment (devices, conduits, boxes, etc.) shall be flush or semi-flush mounted unless otherwise noted. Where conditions do not allow flush mounting and where acceptable to the Architect, equipment may be surface mounted.
3.2 WORKING SPACE
A. Provide adequate working space around electrical equipment in compliance with Article 4 of Electrical Safety Orders. In general, provide 36 inches minimum clear work space in front of panelboards and controls of 120/208 volt systems and 42 inches minimum for 277/480 volt systems.
3.3 CABLE AND CLEANING
A. All broken, damaged or otherwise defective parts shall be repaired or replaced without additional cost to Owner. Work shall be left in a condition satisfactory to Owners Representative. At completion, carefully clean and adjust all equipment, fixtures and trim installed as part of this work. Systems and equipment shall be left in a satisfactory operating condition.
B. All surplus materials and debris resulting from this work shall be cleaned out and removed from site; this includes surplus excavated material. 528
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16050 September 2024 Electrical General Requirements
16050-5
3.4 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
A. Excavate and backfill as required for installation of electrical work. Restore all surfaces, roadways, sod, walks, curbs, walls, existing underground installation, etc., cut by installations to original condition in an acceptable manner. Maintain all warning signs, barricades, flares and lanterns as required by the Safety Orders and local ordinances.
B. Excavation: Dig trenches straight and true to line and grade, with bottom clear of any rock points. Support conduit for entire length on undisturbed original earth. Minimum conduit depth of pipe crown shall be 2 feet below finished grade.
C. Backfill: All backfill material shall be local material free of rubble, rubbish or vegetation. Provide sand as backfill material where specified. Trenches shall be backfilled and compacted to 90% (per ASTM D1557) of maximum dry density at optimum moisture content in layers not to exceed 6 when compacted.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. In performance of work, protect work from damage. Protect electrical equipment, stored and installed from dust, water or other damage.
3.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Panelboards, remote control switches, terminal boxes, etc., shall be properly identified with a descriptive nameplate. Nameplate shall be made of 3/32 inch laminated plastic with black background and white letters. Size of letters shall be ¼ inch high for equipment in device box or boxes 12 or smaller, and ½ inch high for panelboard, terminal can, or larger items. Letters shall be machine engraved. Punched strip type nameplates and cardholders in any form are not acceptable. Nameplates shall be attached with oval head machine screw tapped into front panel.
B. Indicate type of equipment and equipment designation, ex. “MAIN SWITCHBOARD-MSB”, “LIGHTING CONTROL PEDESTAL - SP”, Etc.
3.7 RUST INHIBITOR
A. Channels, joiners, hangers, straps, clamps, brackets, caps, nuts and bolts and associated parts shall be plated electrolytically with zinc followed immediately thereafter by treating freshly deposited zinc surfaces with chromic acid to obtain a surface which will not form a white deposit on surface for an average of one hundred twenty (120) hours when subjected to a standard salt spray cabinet test, or shall be hot dipped galvanized.
3.8 EQUIPMENT PADS
A. Concrete reinforced pads for mounting of equipment (i.e. switchboard, transformers, freestanding panels, etc.) shall be minimum 3000 psi, 6 thick with #4 rebars at 12 on center each way. Rebars shall be centered in pad. Pad shall extend 2 beyond equipment and 1-1/2 above surrounding area. Backfill and compact to 95% 529
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16050 September 2024 Electrical General Requirements
16050-6
maximum dry density at optimum moisture content in layers not be exceed 6 when compacted.
3.9 EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE
A. All equipment shall be braced or anchored to resist a horizontal force acting in any direction using the following criteria:
B. Fixed Equipment on Grade: 75% of operating weight.
C. Fixed Equipment on Structure: 50% of operating weight.
D. Simultaneous Vertical Force – Use 1/3 x Horizontal Force.
E. Where anchorage details are not shown on the drawings the field installation shall be subject to the approval of the Structural Owners Representative.
3.10 TEST
A. Test all wiring and connections for continuity and grounds; where such test indicate faulty insulation or other defects, located, repair and retest. Balance load at panelboards. Furnish all testing equipment.
3.11 CLOSING OF AN UNINSPECTED WORK
A. Do not allow or cause any work installed hereunder to be covered up or enclosed before it has been inspected and approved.
B. Should any work be enclosed or covered up before is has been approved, uncover such work and after is has been inspected and approved, make all repairs necessary to restore work of others to conditions in which it as found at time of cutting, all without additional cost.
3.12 WARRANTY
A. All materials and installation shall be provided with one (1) year warranty, which shall include replacement parts, labor, retesting, and travel to and from the job site.
The warranty period shall begin after final acceptance of the project. The warranty shall cover but is not limited to the following:
B. Defective workmanship and installation
C. All system components, devices, conduit, wires, etc.
D. Manufactured items such as light fixtures, receptacles, switchboard, panelboard, transformer, switches, etc.
E. Basic materials such as conduit, wires, boxes, cabinets, etc.
F. Certain manufactured items will have longer warranty periods. Refer to specific item and specification section for warranty information and terms. 530
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16050 September 2024 Electrical General Requirements
16050-7
END OF SECTION
531
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16100 September 2024 Basic Materials and Methods
16100-1
SECTION 16100
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. The work of this Section consists of basic materials and methods for all work included under Division 16. Additional specifications requirements for electrical work are specified under other sections of Division 16 and where those requirements differ from the requirements of this Section, they shall govern.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data per Section 16050.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Standard weight, mild steel pipe, zinc coated on both inside and outside by a hot dipping or sherardizing process. Inside and outside of conduit shall be finished with a protective coating. All threads galvanized after cutting. Meets UL 6, UL Card #DYIX, and ANSI C80.1.
B. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC): Intermediate weight, mild steel pipe, meeting same requirements for finish and material as rigid steel conduit. Meets UL 1242, UL Card #DYIX, and ANSI C80.6.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Cold rolled steel tubing, hot-dipped galvanized, with zinc coating on outside and protective lubricating coating on inside. Fittings shall meet same requirements for finish and material as EMT. Meets UL 797 and ANSI C80.3.
D. Liquid Tight (LT) Flexible Conduit: Flexible steel, zinc coated on both inside and outside by hot dipping or sherardizing process with extruded ployvinyl covering and with watertight connectors. Conduit to be one continuous length, no couplings, minimum LT 1”.
E. PVC Conduit
1. Type 40, 90C, UL listed, composed of polyvinyl chloride, conforming to NEMA TC-2, Fed Spec WC1094A, UL651 Standards. Material shall have minimum tensile strength of 6,500 psi at 73.4F, flexural strength of 12,500 psi and compressive strength of 9,000 psi per ASTM testing. PVC conduit shall be suitable for direct burial without concrete encasement. Fitting shall be of same manufacture. All joints shall be solvent welded. 532
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16100 September 2024 Basic Materials and Methods
16100-2
2. Type 80, similar to type 40 except with extra heavy wall.
F. Raceway Fittings:
1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Fittings, such as couplings, connectors, condulets, elbows, bends, etc., shall be subject to same requirements as for rigid steel conduit. Couplings and unions shall be threaded type, assembled with anticorrosion, conductive anti-seize compound at joints made absolutely tight to exclude water. Connectors shall be threaded hubs with bonding insulated metallic bushings. Unions shall be equal to Crouse Hinds UNY or UNF.
2. IMC: Fittings shall be as specified for rigid steel conduit.
3. EMT: Fittings shall be steel, box connectors shall have insulated throat.
Connectors and couplings to be compression type.
4. Flexible Metallic Conduit: Connectors to be insulated. Metallic connectors (except for liquid-tight) shall be steel “squeeze” type via a screw, Steel City XC-90X and XC-49X series. Liquid-tight metallic connectors shall be watertight approved for such use.
5. Bushings: Metallic insulated type. Weatherproof or dust-tight installations; liquid-tight with sealing ring and insulated throat, OZ/Gedney type “KR”.
6. All box connectors to be insulated throat type.
7. Conduit Straps: Galvanized steel, 2-hole straps. 1-hole straps may be used for conduit sizes 1” and smaller concealed in wall or above ceiling.
G. Metallic conduits, raceways, and fittings shall be listed and approved as grounding means.
2.2 BOXES
A. Boxes located outdoors, or in wet or damp locations shall be rated cast type with gasketed plates.
2.3 WIRES
A. Wire shall be copper only, manufactured by General Cable Co., Rome, General Electric Co., or Anaconda. Wire shall have type THW, THWN or XHHW insulation.
Wire installed in high temperature areas, including branch circuits in ballast enclosures shall have type RHW-2 or XHHW-2 90 insulation.
B. Wire shall Code type copper wire of not less than 98% conductivity. Wires #8 gauge and larger, shall be stranded. Wire shall bear the Underwriters’ label, be color coded and be marked with gauge, type and manufacturer’s name on 24 centers. Wires smaller than #8 may be solid or stranded. Where stranded wire is used, provide solid pigtail for connection to screw terminals of receptacles, switches, etc. 533
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16100 September 2024 Basic Materials and Methods
16100-3
C. Color coding to be as follows:
D. 208/120 Volts 480/277 Volts
Phase A Black Brown
Phase B Red Orange
Phase C Blue Yellow
Neutral White Natural Grey
Ground Green Green
E. Switch legs shall use the same branch circuit phase color coding which they are connected to.
F. Bring wires to job in original unbroken packages.
2.4 CONVENIENCE OUTLETS
A. Shall be “Specification” grade rated 20 amperes at 125 volts, composition base with slots to accommodate parallel plug caps with grounding peg. Contact shall grip both sides of plug prongs. Outlet shall be UL listed.
B. Receptacle Hubbell A-H P&S Leviton
20A duplex GFI. GF5352 GF5242 2091S 6898
C. Weatherproof covers for receptacles shall be of heavy-duty die cast construction, selfclosing type with hinged flip-lids and gasket. Each receptacle in a duplex receptacle shall have an individual lid. While-in-use rated covers shall be used at all locations.
D. Provide a separate GFI duplex receptacle at each location identified on the drawings.
Through wiring is not acceptable.
2.5 SAFETY/DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Type “HD” Heavy-Duty safety switches with externally operated handle. Switches shall be manufactured by Westinghouse, General Electric, Square D or approved equal. Switches shall be rated 250 and 600 volts, A.C., of size and poles as shown on drawings and as required. Disconnects used outdoor shall be in NEMA-3R. Provide fused switches with proper sized fuses where required by equipment manufacturer.
All switches shall have pad-locking cover with cover interlock. Label switch per section 16050
534
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16100 September 2024 Basic Materials and Methods
16100-4
2.6 PULL LINE
A. Furnish and install pull line in all unused (empty) raceways. 1/8 diameter braided line of polypropylene or Jet-Line #232, or approved equal line of continuous fiber polyolefin. Minimum break strength, 200 lbs.
B. Provide pull line in conduits for utility company systems, size and type per their requirements.
2.7 PRECAST CONCRETE PULLBOXES/HANDHOLES
A. Boxes shall be size as indicated on the drawings. Design loads shall consist of live, dead, impact hydrostatic, and other loads. Design loads shall be sixteen KIPS.
Concrete shall be per ASTM-C-33-64. Lightweight concrete shall conform to ASTMC-33-64T. Cement shall be Portland Cement meeting ASTM-C-150 Type II standards. Compressive strength shall be minimum 4,000 psi at 28 days.
B. Boxes: Precast high-density reinforced concrete with end and side knockouts, and extension as required. Minimum 1-1/2 wall thickness. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Forni, Christy or equal.
C. Covers: Reinforce concrete covers shall have hold-down bolts. All covers shall be factory marked, see drawings for marking/label required. If not noted, use the following markings:
SYSTEM MARKING
Power 600 volts or less Electrical
Telephone Telephone
Lighting Lighting
D. Installation
1. Excavate around area to accept box, a minimum of 4 around all sides for ease of installation. Provide 12 of compacted pea gravel for bedding and/or to facilitate drainage.
2. Backfill shall be concrete.
3. Grout and seal conduits at box entry with cement. Provide with end bells.
E. Utility Company boxes shall be per their requirements. Provide with ground rod as required.
2.8 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Contactors shall be UL listed, electrically operated, for all types of lighting loads.
Short circuit withstand rating shall exceed maximum available short circuit amps.
Coil voltage shall match control voltage. Square-D class 8903 type LO (electrically held) or equal.
535
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16100 September 2024 Basic Materials and Methods
16100-5
B. Contactors shall be installed on vibration isolators.
2.9 GROUND RODS
A. Ground rods shall be ¾ in dia. X 10 ft. copper clad steel.
2.10 SERVICE PEDESTAL
A. Pedestal enclosures shall be fabricated from 12 gauge hot dipped galvanized steel.
Internal parts shall be fabricated from 14 gauge cold rolled steel. The pedestal shall be of all welded construction with welding materials specifically designed for the material used. All fasteners, hinged, latches and hardware shall be of stainless steel and hinges shall be continuous piano style. There shall be no exposed nuts, bolts, screws, rivets, or other fasteners on the exterior.
B. Pedestals shall be NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 with fully framed side hinged outer doors with swaged close tolerance sides for flush fit with top drip lip and closed cell neoprene flange compressed gaskets. The door shall have 2,000 lb. stress rated stainless steel hasp, welded to cabinet and door. The pedestals shall have hinged deadfront panel with ¼ turn latch and knurled knobs. Deadfront shall be hinged on the same side as the front door and shall open on a minimum of 102.
C. Pedestal finish shall be dry powder polyurethane plastic electrostatically applied to produce a finish of 3 to 5 mils thickness. The coating shall be commercially smooth, substantially free of flow lines, paint washout, streaks, blisters and other defects that would impair serviceability or detract from general appearance.
D. Panel shall include circuit breakers for each load with through-deadfront operating handles. Provide facilities for power company watt hour meter.
E. Provide terminal blocks for all wiring connections. Bundle and neatly install wiring in panel.
F. Provide pedestal mounting kit of standard design by control panel manufacturer for bolting to concrete slab.
G. Provide thermostatically controlled condensation heaters to help keep moisture from condensing in control panel.
H. Provide a 120V light with switch, to light up inner door and provide a weatherproof 20- ampere duplex receptacle.
I. Provide lightning arrester or surge suppressors to protect control equipment from lightning induced surges or high voltage transients.
J. Provide additional equipment and controls as indicated on drawings.
K. Current transformers and metering shall be as required by Power Utility company.
All equipment shall be factory installed by the switchboard manufacturer. 536
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16100 September 2024 Basic Materials and Methods
16100-6
L. Make provisions for the installation of utility's metering equipment and entrance conductors, all in strict conformance with the requirements of the utility company and as shown on the Drawings. Pedestal manufacturer shall be held to have submitted shop drawings of the service entrance and metering provisions to the Utility prior to manufacture. Owners Representative's shop drawing approval does not imply conformance with utility requirements. Provide for off site metering if required by the local serving utility company.
M. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the board shall be furnished when required. All groups of control wires leaving the switchboard shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. All hardware used on conductors shall have a high tensile strength and an anti-corrosive zinc plating.
N. A one-piece copper ground bus complete with lugs shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical section structure and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard and shall be front accessible.
O. Ground bus current rating to be same as main device.
P. Pedestal main and distribution circuit breakers shall be molded case bolt-on type with trip rating as scheduled on Drawings.
Q. Pedestal shall be labeled to serve as "Service Entrance Equipment".
R. Each circuit breaker shall be identified with an engraved laminated phenolic plate showing the load served or the function of the circuit breaker and trip rating. The nameplate shall be attached with oval head machine screws tapped into the front of the board. Equip breaker handles with padlocking "lock-off" devices.
S. Pedestal shall be completely factory assembled, wired and tested before delivery and shall conform to UL where applicable, WUESSC, National Electrical Code Standards and State of California requirements.
T. Where pedestal has facilities for revenue metering, comply with the requirements of servicing utility company. Provide heaters with control thermostat to maintain temperature of 55 degrees Fahrenheit minimum inside switchboard.
U. The board shall be as manufactured by Tesco or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUITS
A. All Exposed Conduits shall be rigid steel or IMC. Obtain Architect approval prior to installing any exposed conduits.
537
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16100 September 2024 Basic Materials and Methods
16100-7
B. Provide flexible connections of short length to equipment subject to vibration or movement and to all motors. Provide a separate bonding conductor in all flexible connections. Flexible conduit shall be one continuous length with couplings.
C. Support conduit with straps and secure to concrete by means of insert or expansion bolts. Expanders and shields shall be steel or malleable iron.
D. Conduits installed in contact with ground shall be PVC-40 conduits.
1. Install PVC conduit in a 2 sand or fine earth envelope below ground. Provide a minimum of 2 of sand or fine earth bedding at the bottom of the trench before laying conduits. Risers, including elbows, shall be double-wrapped rigid steel or PVC coated rigid steel conduit; except that risers, including elbows and bends; at in-ground pull box locations shall be PVC-40, concrete encased.
2. When installing underground conduits to specified depth, depth shall be taken from the top of the conduit to the finished grade level. Unless otherwise specified, underground conduits shall be installed with topside not less than 24 below finished grade.
3. Utility Company (electric, telephone, etc.) conduits shall be installed per their depth and backfill requirements. Minimum depth shall be 24 below finished grade. Minimum conduit shall be PVC-40. Where the utility company allows use of a “lesser” grade conduit, i.e. DB120, PVC-40 shall be used.
4. The minimum size of conduits shall be 1.
5. Bends shall be wide sweeping type with radius equal to 10 times O.D. and minimum 24 inch.
6. Place a 6 wide non-biodegradable plastic tape at 12 below grade, labeled “CAUTION ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW”. Fluorescent red for electric power conduits and fluorescent orange for telephone conduits. Tape shall be continuous for full length of trench.
E. Although circuiting is shown as diagrammatic, their point-to-point destinations and their indication above/below ground route shall be followed as much as possible.
Where site conditions dictate that an alternate means of routing will alleviate conflicts, the alternate means will be considered with prior approval by the Architect.
Route conduits below paved roadways where possible.
F. Feeder conduits connected to panels/switchboard shall have ground lug bushing connected to equipment ground bus.
3.2 CAPPING
A. Cap conduits during construction with manufactured seals. Swab out conduits before wires are pulled in.
538
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16100 September 2024 Basic Materials and Methods
16100-8
B. Cap all empty conduits below grade and in pull boxes with manufacturer’s caps to prevent entrance of water and debris, attach pull string to cap.
3.3 CONDUCTORS
A. Splices and joints shall be made with Burndy, T & B or approved equal, solderless tool applied pressure lugs and connectors, Uninsulated lugs and wire ends shall be insulated with layers of plastic tape equal to insulation of wire and with all irregular surfaces properly padded with “Scotchfil” putty tape prior to application of tape. Tape shall equal to Scotch #33, General Electric #AW-1 or approved equal. Feeder splicing is not permitted.
B. Conductor splices below grade where approved shall meet ANSI C119.1-1986 and UL 486D standards. Raychem RVA or RVC series. Conductors to be joined with compression sleeve connectors.
C. Use only UL approved wire pulling compound as lubricant.
D. Lace conductors together with waxed linen lacing cord, T &B “Ty-Rap”, Holub “Quik-Wrap” or equal, in a neat and workmanlike manner in panelboards, wireways, raceways, pull boxes and similar locations.
E. #10 AWG wire shall be minimum size wire used.
F. All conductors shall be in conduit unless otherwise indicated.
G. Conduit sizes shall be based on code fill table for THW insulated wires to accommodate the number, size and type of wires shown or specified.
H. Wiring installed in pull boxes or junction boxes, shall be pulled through without splices.shall have a service loop around the interior of the box for 360 degrees utilizing the largest circumference.
I. Where conductors are increased in size and number (such as for voltage drop reasons), and such that conductors will not fit the standard breaker or panel lugs, terminate in one of the following manners:
1. Provide larger breaker frame.
2. Provide oversized lugs.
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground fittings shall be approved manufactured type, installed and connected conform with Code requirements.
B. Neutral conductors and noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment at each installation shall be grounded in accordance with applicable code. Ground conductor shall be copper having a current capacity sized in accordance with CEC. 539
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16100 September 2024 Basic Materials and Methods
16100-9
C. All equipment cases, equipment frames, etc., shall be completely grounded to satisfy requirements of CEC. Install bond wire in flexible conduit. Install copper bond wire, sized in accordance with CEC, in all nonmetallic raceways and bond to all metallic parts using approved fittings.
D. Service ground conductor shall be connected to “Ufer” electrode, concrete encased ground, per CEC 250.
E. Ground resistance shall not exceed 25 ohms as measured at MSB.
F. All connections shall be made with solderless connectors or molded fusion-welding process.
G. Equipment grounding conductors shall be insulated with a continuous green outer finish along its entire length. Conductors size #4 AWG and larger may be identified (with green electrical tape applied half-lapped) at each end and at every point where the conductor is accessible
H. Insulated grounded (neutral) conductors shall be identified with a continuous white outer finish along its entire length. Neutral conductors #4 AWG or larger can be identified by a distinctive white marking (applied half-lapped with white electrical tape) for the last 12 inches at each end.
I. Where equipment is 1000 volts or above, fence grounding shall be provided with a ground rod at each fixed gate post and at each corner post. Attach #4 ground wire exothermic weld to ground rod, and with compression ground post clamp to post.
Each gate shall be bonded to its gatepost by flexible braided copper strap.
3.5 FIELD TESTS
A. Provide required labor, materials, equipment and connections to perform tests.
Document results and submit them to the Owners Representative. Repair or replace all defective work.
B. Perform Megger test on all feeders and motor branch circuits.
C. Verify operation of all controls and adjust time settings per Architect.
D. Each ground rod shall be tested. A ground rod which does not have a resistance to ground of 25 ohms or less shall be augmented by one additional ground rod at no less than 8 ft. from each other.
E. CLEANING
F. Brush and clean work prior to concealing, painting and acceptance. Performed in stages if directed.
G. Clean and repair soiled or damaged painted exposed work and match adjoining work before final acceptance.
H. Remove debris from inside and outside of material, equipment and structures. 540
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16100 September 2024 Basic Materials and Methods
16100-10
END OF SECTION
541
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16500 September 2024 Lighting
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
Furnish and install a complete lighting system consisting of overhead luminaires, structural lighting and appurtenances as show on drawings and specified.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. The requirements of Sections 16050, 16100 and 16550 apply to the Work of the Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. ground information, photometric data, fixture efficiency, ballasts information, lamp information, weights, accessories, etc.
B. Submit per Section 01330
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRES
A. Weatherproof fixtures shall have weatherproof gaskets on fixture trim and door assemblies. Fixture shall be UL listed for wet locations.
B. Luminaire voltage indicated on the plans is for reference. Verify actual voltage required based on the branch circuit.
C. Housing shall be prefinished. Color to be selected by Architect.
2.2 LIGHT POLES
A. Poles shall be as shown on the drawings with a minimum wind rating 90 mph with a
1.3 gust factor. Base dimensions shall be as directed by the structural engineer at each pole location.
B. Reflector optical systems shall be high reflectance prefinished.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
542
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 16500 September 2024 Lighting
A. Mounting of luminaires shall be in strict accordance the CEC Section 410.
B. Install per manufacturer’s specifications for all specified (or approved equal) products.
END OF SECTION
543
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 260923 September 2024 Lighting Control Devices
260923-1
SECTION 260923
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. See Specification Section 262726 “WIRING DEVICES” for non-related control devices and systems outside summary of products.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Time switches.
2. Photoelectric switches.
3. CEC Title 24 compliant lighting control devices and systems (see Shop Drawings below).
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Products: As indicated on plans. Equals are allowed.
C. Shop Drawings: Lighting controls shown on plans indicate placement, control desired, and basis of design by manufacturer listed (typically Acuity Controls nLight, nLight AIR Avi-on and/or Sensorswitch). The contractor shall submit the plans to a manufacturer’s representative who will produce a product bill of material and submittal sheets. These submittals shall include:
1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Submittal data sheets for each product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TIME SWITCHES
A. Astronomic Time Switches (Single Gang): Complying with UL 917.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in CEC and marked for intended location and application.
2. Contact Rating:
a. 20A general purpose and resistive.
b. 1HP @ 120VAC
544
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 260923 September 2024 Lighting Control Devices
260923-2
c. 2HP @ 240VAC
3. Programs: Basic 24-Hour, 7-day electronic control.
4. Astronomic programming.
B. Astronomic Time Switches (Enclosed): Complying with UL 917.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in CEC and marked for intended location and application.
2. Contact Rating:
a. Normally open, 20A general purpose and resistive.
3. Programs: At least eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.
4. Astronomic programming.
5. Automatic daylight savings time changeover.
6. Large Case NEMA 1 enclosure.
a. Number of circuits: 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Low voltage wiring:
1. Supporting wiring shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner per CEC 393.14.
2. Cables and conductors installed shall be supported by the building structure in such a manner that the cable is supported by straps, staples, hangers, cable ties listed and identified for securement and support, or similar fittings designed and installed so as not to damage the cable. .
3. Low voltage wiring shall be supported per CEC standards at intervals not exceeding 60”.
Leave 3’-0” of slack between devices to adjust locations if necessary.
4. The Electrical Engineer of Record shall conduct a punchlist site walk at the request of the owner or client to examine adherence to this requirement. If it is found that low voltage wiring is not supported by the building structure, the EEOR shall order for the wiring to be properly secured and/or replaced entirely.
545
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 260923 September 2024 Lighting Control Devices
260923-3
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor shall program the lighting control system as shown and described in the Drawings.
B. Programmable lighting controls shall be set to comply with California Energy Code applicable to the date of permit for construction. See Construction Drawings and the California Energy Code Sections 130.1, 130.2 and 130.5 for further information.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections after lighting control programming:
1. Ensure each space complies with manual shutoff, dimming, automatic shutoff and daylit controls as shown and described on the Drawings and incompliance with the California Energy Code.
2. Confirm that sensors are further than 4’-0” from any HVAC diffuser.
3. Confirm that spaces shut off with 20 minutes.
4. Confirm lighting is not triggered from adjacent spaces (i.e., unintended space turns on or is kept from turning off while walking through an adjacent separate room or space).
D. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. The electrical contractor shall note that the California Energy Code requires compliance testing for new and existing buildings where lighting installations or alterations have occurred. If the certified compliance testing agency is on site and the lighting controls are not programmed correctly, and if they must make a return visit to the site before it is rectified, this will be an additional charge to the contracted party. It is essential that the electrical contractor confirm settings are correct before compliance testing takes place.
F. The electrical contractor shall inform the general contractor when the lighting controls are programmed and ready for compliance testing.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 3 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to two visits to the site during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide a 2-Hour training to the owner or maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.
END OF SECTION 260923
546
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 260519 September 2024 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519-1
SECTION 260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.
2. Metal Clad-Cable (non-hospital grade).
3. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MOCP: Maximum overcurrent protection.
B. MCA: Minimum circuit ampacity.
C. Exposed: On or attached to the surface or behind panels designed to allow access. Raceways and cables in unfinished basements in accessible underfloor areas or attics; or behind, above, or below panels designed to allow access; and that may be removed without damage to the building structure or finish are considered exposed.
D. Concealed: Rendered inaccessible by the structure of finish of the building. Raceways and cables supported or located within hollow frames or permanently enclosed by the finish of buildings are considered concealed.
1.3 LISTINGS
A. Provide and install products to the project that are labeled and/or listed for the intended location and use per manufacturer’s guidelines and the California Electric Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.
B. Conductor Insulation:
1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.
547
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 260519 September 2024 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519-2
2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC (non-Hospital Grade)
A. Conductor Insulation:
1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.
2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.
B. Armor: Steel, interlocked.
C. Jacket:
1. PVC applied over armor if used in wet or damp locations per CEC 330.10(11).
2. Non-damp or wet locations may use dry location rated MC.
2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in CEC, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
B. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.
C. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.
1. Material: Copper.
2. Type: One or two-hole with standard or long barrels.
3. Termination: Compression.
D. Above Ground Splices for No. 10 AWG and Smaller:
1. Solderless, screw-on, reusable pressure cable type, with integral insulation, approved for copper and aluminum conductors.
2. The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped conductors.
3. The number, size, and combination of conductors used with the connector, as listed on the manufacturer's packaging, shall be strictly followed.
E. Above Ground Splices for No. 8 AWG to No. 4/0 AWG:
1. Compression, hex screw, or bolt clamp-type of high conductivity and corrosion-resistant material, listed for use with copper and aluminum conductors.
2. Insulate with materials approved for the particular use, location, voltage, and temperature.
Insulation level shall be not less than the insulation level of the conductors being joined.
3. Splice and insulation shall be product of the same manufacturer.
F. Underground Splices for No. 10 AWG and Smaller:
1. Solderless, screw-on, reusable pressure cable type, with integral insulation. Listed for wet locations and approved for copper and aluminum conductors.
2. The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped conductors. 548
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 260519 September 2024 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519-3
3. The number, size, and combination of conductors used with the connector, as listed on the manufacturer's packaging, shall be strictly followed.
4. Submersible-type.
5. Standards: ANSI C119.1 and C119.4 for Class A underground.
6. Multicable pedestals allowed.
G. Underground Splices for No. 8 AWG and Larger:
1. Mechanical type, of high conductivity and corrosion-resistant material. Listed for wet locations and approved for copper and aluminum conductors.
2. Insulate with materials approved for the particular use, location, voltage, and temperature.
Insulation level shall be not less than the insulation level of the conductors being joined.
3. Splice and insulation shall be product of the same manufacturer.
4. Plastic electrical insulating tape: Per ASTM D2304, flame-retardant, cold and weather resistant.
5. Submersible-type.
6. Standards: ANSI C119.1 and C119.4 for Class A underground.
7. Multicable pedestals allowed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with:
1. CEC Chapter 2 for Wiring and Protection.
2. CEC Chapter 3 for Wiring Methods and Materials.
3. NECA 1: Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.
4. NECA 101 Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (RMC, IMC, EMT) B. The contractor shall verify MOCP and MCA requirements with the listing and labeling of each piece of equipment or device delivered to the field and determine if the feeder or branch circuit is compliant with the listing and labeling. Comply with CEC 110.3 and 422.60. The contractor shall inform the EEOR of any discrepancies.
C. It is assumed that all terminations in the field shall have minimum rated 75°C rated terminals.
The contractor shall field verify all terminals for connection in compliance with CEC 110.14. The contractor shall inform the Engineer of Record of any terminals deviating from 75°C. All conductors are rated for 75°C on plans unless otherwise noted.
3.2 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Branch Circuits and Feeders: THHN/THWN-2 Copper; solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger.
549
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 260519 September 2024 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519-4
3.3 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A. Feeders: Concealed or exposed: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
B. Branch Circuits:
1. General:
a. Branch circuits shall be routed as single conductors in raceway from the power source unto each room, space, device, or equipment served. b. The use of flexible raceway to equipment, appliances, surface and lay-in luminaires and devices shall be limited to 6’-0”.
c. The use of metal-clad cable to equipment and appliances is prohibited. d. Metal-clad cable may be used to serve surface and lay-in luminaires and devices.
2. Exposed Branch Circuits not readily visible (typ. above ceiling or other similar spaces) without removal of an access panel: Type THHN/THWN-2 or XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
3. Exposed Branch Circuits readily visible: Type THHN/THWN-2 or XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
4. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2 or XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
5. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN/THWN-2 or XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible.
E. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer with a minimum separation of 0’-6”. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with fire-alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
F. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; cabinets; or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made. 550
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 260519 September 2024 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519-5
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than un-spliced conductors.
1. Comply with CEC 110.14.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified professional to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors and all conductors #6 AWG and larger. a. The cabling system shall be certified (inspected, tested and documented) that it is ready for operation.
1) Insulation resistance test:
a) Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor #6 AWG and larger with respect to ground. Applied potential to be 1,000 VDC for one minute.
b) Record test values and submit to the Engineer. Insulation resistance to be 50 megohm, minimum.
c) Measure insulation resistance of complete circuits with the breakers open.
b. Forms: Example ORT forms are provided in the supplement at the end of this section.
END OF SECTION 260519
551
SUPPLEMENT NO. 1
EXAMPLE
ORT FORMS
552
INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST REPORT
Project: Location: Date:
Tested By:
PNL Identification: Test Equipment Used:
T E S T D A T A
INSULATION RESISTANCE IN MEGOHMS
CIRCUIT DESIGNATION A-GND B-GND C-GND A-B A-C B-C TEST VOLTAGE DURATION Notes:
553
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 262200 September 2024 Low Voltage Transformers
262200-1
SECTION 262200
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Distribution and buck-boost, dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.
2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Eaton.
2. Siemens.
3. Square D.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer. 554
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 262200 September 2024 Low Voltage Transformers
262200-2
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in CEC, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Comply with NEMA TP 1 energy-efficiency levels as verified by testing according to NEMA TP 2.
D. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.
E. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
F. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints that are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are easily identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.
G. Dry-type transformers shall be certified by the manufacturer as required by Title 20 appliance efficiency regulations.
H. Taps: [email protected]%, [email protected]%
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with CEC, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Cores: One leg per phase.
C. Enclosure:
a. 37.5kVA and above: ventilated.
b. NEMA 3R kit at wet locations..
D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1. Finish Color: NSF/ANSI 61 gray.
E. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.
F. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.
G. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor.
1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor.
2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate. 555
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 262200 September 2024 Low Voltage Transformers
262200-3
3. Unit shall meet requirements of NEMA TP 1 when tested according to NEMA TP 2 with a K-factor equal to one.
H. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals.
2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield.
I. Neutral: Rated 200 percent of full load current for K-factor rated transformers.
J. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
K. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.
L. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:
1. 30 to 50 kVA: 45dBA.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.
1. Resistance measurements of all windings at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.
2. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.
3. Phase relation and polarity tests at the rated voltage connections.
4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at the rated voltage connections.
5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at the rated voltage connections.
6. Applied and induced tensile tests.
7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage.
8. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. High-voltage to ground.
b. Low-voltage to ground.
c. High-voltage to low-voltage.
9. Temperature tests.
B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project. 556
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 262200 September 2024 Low Voltage Transformers
262200-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Comply with CEC 450.21(A), keeping transformers rated over 112.5kVA at a minimum of 12” away from combustive materials.
B. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.
C. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by CEC and manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.
E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.
F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer wall brackets fabricated from design drawings signed and sealed by a licensed structural engineer.
1. Coordinate installation of wall-mounted and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.
B. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-dampening supports.
Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall surface.
1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.
C. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce noise generation.
E. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.
F. Comply with reference standard NECA 409.
557
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 262200 September 2024 Low Voltage Transformers
262200-5
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
B. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
2. Inspect anchorage, alignment and grounding.
3. Verify resilient mounts are free and that shipping brackets have been removed.
4. Verify the unit is clean.
5. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable, in accordance with 2009 NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications.
6. Perform insulation-resistance test winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground with 1,000 VDC test voltage. Calculate dielectric absorption ratio or polarization index.
C. Test Values:
1. Insulation-resistance test values at one minute should be in a minimum 500 megohms.
2. The dielectric absorption ratio or polarization index shall be greater than 1.0 and shall be recorded for future reference.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.
B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.
C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. 558
Westacre Park Expansion and Renovation Project Section 262200 September 2024 Low Voltage Transformers
262200-6
END OF SECTION 262200
559
Abide Builders, Inc.
CPC24-355 Westacre Park Renovation and Expansion
Project Expires: 180 Working Days
1795423.1 7203-038
PART 5 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
(BOUND SEPARATELY)
560
3 561
Statutory Exemptions. State code number:
_______________________________________________
Notice of Exemption Appendix E
To: Office of Planning and Research From: (Public Agency): ____________________________ P.O. Box 3044, Room 113 _______________________________________________ Sacramento, CA 95812-3044 County Clerk
(Address)
___________________________
___________________________
County of: __________________
Project Title: ____________________________________________________________________________ Project Applicant: ________________________________________________________________________ Project Location - Specific:
Project Location - City: ______________________ Project Location - County:
Description of Nature, Purpose and Beneficiaries of Project:
_____________________
Name of Public Agency Approving Project: _____________________________________________________ Name of Person or Agency Carrying Out Project: ________________________________________________ Exempt Status: (check one):
Ministerial (Sec. 21080(b)(1); 15268);
Declared Emergency (Sec. 21080(b)(3); 15269(a));
Emergency Project (Sec. 21080(b)(4); 15269(b)(c));
Reasons why project is exempt:
Lead Agency
Contact Person: ____________________________ Area Code/Telephone/Extension: _______________ If filed by applicant:
1. Attach certified document of exemption finding.
2. Has a Notice of Exemption been filed by the public agency approving the project? Yes No Signature: ____________________________ Date:
Signed by Lead Agency Signed by Applicant
Authority cited: Sections 21083 and 21110, Public Resources Code. Date Received for filing at OPR:
Reference: Sections 21108, 21152, and 21152.1, Public Resources Code. _______________
Categorical Exemption. State type and section number: ____________________________________ ______________________________________________
______________ Title: _______________________
562 Revised 2011
CITY COUNCIL AGENDA REPORT
MEETING DATE: February 19, 2024 ITEM # 5
SUBJECT:
CONSIDERATION OF AWARD OF CONTRACT TO MESA ENERGY SYSTEMS INC. FOR
THE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF WATER HEATER TANKS FOR THE FIRE STATION 45 WATER HEATER UPGRADE PROJECT (CIP 51046)
INITIATED OR REQUESTED BY: REPORT COORDINATED OR PREPARED BY:
[ ] Council [X] Staff
[ ] Other
Jim Johnston, Project Management Assistant
Capital Projects Department
ATTACHMENT [X] Yes [ ] No [ ] Information [ ] Direction [X] Action
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this report is to provide the City Council with sufficient information to approve a contract award to Mesa Energy Systems Inc. for the removal and replacement of water heater tanks for the Fire Station 45 Water Heater Upgrade Project (CIP 51046).
RECOMMENDED ACTION
Staff respectfully recommends that the City Council:
1) Find that the Fire Station 45 Water Heater Upgrade Project (CIP 51046) is exempt from CEQA review pursuant to the Categorical Exemption under California Code of Regulations, Title 14, Division 6, Chapter 3 (“CEQA Guidelines”), Article 19, Section 15301 (Existing Facilities); 2) Authorize the City Manager, or his designee, to execute a contract with Mesa Energy Systems Inc. in an amount not to exceed $50,447;
3) Authorize the City Manager, or his designee, to execute non-substantive changes or modifications to the contract with Mesa Energy Systems Inc. with the approval from the City Attorney; and 4) Authorize the City Manager, or his designee, to execute contract amendments up to 30% ($15,134.10) of the value of the contract.
BACKGROUND
The West Sacramento Fire Station 45, located at 2040 Lake Washington Blvd., serves as both a live-in residence for firefighters and the City’s Fire Administration Building, as well. In 2024, this mission-critical facility experienced issues with one of its current two water heater tanks, which required repairs. City staff determined that both units, built in 2006, have reached the end of their useful life and need to be replaced. It is the intent of City staff to replace this equipment before any failure occurs, thereby preventing any unacceptable interruption of service to the building and resident firefighters.
ANALYSIS
The Capital Projects Department issued an invitation to bid (ITB) to select a contractor to remove and replace the two aging water heater tanks. The project was advertised in the local newspaper and posted for a competitive bid via OpenGov Procurement on November 25, 2024. At the close of the bid period, City staff received three (3) bids that were opened December 19, 2024. The bid results were as follows:
Ranking Contractor Bid Amount
1 Mesa Energy Systems Inc. $ 50,447
2 Hometown Construction, Inc. $ 58,265
3 ACCO Engineered Systems, Inc. (bid was disqualified) $ 54,988 After examining the Contractors’ licenses, work experience, qualifications, and proposal submitted in each of the bid packages, staff determined that Mesa Energy Systems Inc. is the lowest-cost, responsive, responsible bidder, with a total bid of $50,447. On this basis, staff recommends awarding the construction contract to Mesa Energy Systems Inc. The ACCO bid was disqualified due to incomplete submission.
Environmental Considerations
The Fire Station 45 Water Heater Upgrade Project (CIP 51046) is exempt from CEQA review pursuant to the Categorical Exemption under California Code of Regulations, Title 14, Division 6, Chapter 3 (“CEQA Guidelines”), Article 19, Section 15301, Class 1. Class 1 consists of the operation, repair, maintenance, permitting, leasing, licensing, or minor alteration of existing public or private structures, facilities, mechanical 563
Consideration of Award of Contract to Mesa Energy Systems Inc. for the Fire Station 45 Water Heater Upgrade Project (CIP 51046) February 19, 2025